Food Exit Recipes

menu icon
subscribe
search icon

×

Oven-Baked Shrimp Skewers (BEST shrimp Recipe )

by 5 Comments

If you're looking for a quick and easy dinner or appetizer that feels a little fancy, these oven-baked shrimp skewers are a total win. Juicy, tender shrimp are perfectly seasoned and roasted to perfection—no grill required! Just pair them with a creamy ranch dipping sauce, and you’ve got a delicious weeknight meal ready in no time.

Overhead shot of baked shrimp skewers baked to perfection and served on a gren platter.

All you need are a few basic pantry seasonings and some high-quality shrimp to whip up this flavorful, no-fuss meal. It’s one of those weeknight recipes that comes together quickly but still feels special enough to serve the whole family around the dinner table. Whether you're pairing it with rice, salad, or dipping sauces, these roasted shrimp kebabs are simple, easy, and sure to become a regular in your dinner rotation.

I made shrimp scampi fettuccine last night and had about half of the fresh shrimp leftover. I originally thought of making shrimp fried rice for dinner tonight, but ended up turning them into these juicy shrimp skewers for my daughter’s after-school snack. Since she loves shrimp, she enjoyed them with homemade parmesan ranch sauce as a fun and tasty evening treat. This is a dish bursting with flavor and perfect for your next easy meal or quick weeknight dinner.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Oven Baked Shrimp Skewers Recipe

One of my favorite ways to make shrimp is by roasting them on skewers right in the oven. It’s quick, mess-free, and delivers perfectly cooked shrimp every time. But that’s not the only reason, here are a few more reasons why you’ll want to try these shrimp skewers in an oven recipe!

  • No Grill Needed – Get that delicious roasted flavor right in your oven, perfect for any season, no outdoor grill required.
  • Quick & Easy – This recipe comes together in under 20 minutes, making it a go-to for busy weeknights or last-minute entertaining.
  • Packed with Flavor – A handful of pantry spices bring out the natural sweetness of the shrimp without overpowering them.
  • Family-Friendly – Trust me, even picky eaters love these! Serve with a favorite dip like parmesan ranch or tuck them into tacos for a fun dinner twist.
  • Versatile – Great to serve these baked shrimps with rice, salad, grilled veggies, or served solo as a light party appetizer.
Skewered shrimp seasoned with herbs and spices, baked to perfection and served on a platter with dipping sauce.

What to Serve with Oven-Baked Shrimp Skewers or Shrimp Kabobs

Ingredients and Substitutions 

If you're making oven shrimp skewers for the first time, you're in for a real treat! This recipe is all about simple prep, fresh ingredients, and bold lemon flavors that bring out the natural sweetness in the succulent shrimp. You don’t need anything fancy, just a handful of pantry staples and a quick squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten everything up. Lets see the ingredients list below!

Oven-roasted shrimp skewers ingredients laid out on a warm backdrop before making the recipe.
  • Shrimp - Shrimp is one of the best quick-cooking proteins you can add to your weekly seafood recipes, and the best part is how nutrient-dense it is without being heavy. It’s rich in essential fatty acids that support heart and brain health, and packed with Vitamin B, especially B12, which helps with energy and metabolism. I have used large shrimp for this recipe. You can use jumbo shrimp (adjust cooking time slightly), or medium shrimp or any shrimp size.
  • Olive Oil - Helps coat the shrimp with seasonings, you can also use avocado oil, olive oil or melted butter as a substitute.
  • Lemon Juice - Adds brightness and cuts through the richness. Lemon juice can be replaced by lime juice too.
  • Salt - Enhances the overall flavor of the shrimp.
  • Seasonings - Paprika gives that smoky depth of flavor, Italian seasonings gives a herby note, garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper and cayenne pepper.
  • Lemon Zest - Intensifies the lemon flavor and adds freshness. If you don’t have zest, increase lemon juice slightly or use lime zest.

See recipe card for quantities.

Holding a Juicy oven-baked shrimp skewers with crispy edges in a hand.

How to make easy oven-baked shrimp skewers recipe

Start by preheating your oven to 425°F. We want that nice high heat to roast the shrimp quickly and lock in all that juicy flavor. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper or foil for easy clean up, then place a wire rack on top. This helps the heat circulate around the shrimp for even cooking and a slightly crisp finish.

If you’re using bamboo skewers, be sure to soak them in water for at least 15 minutes to prevent them from burning in the oven. I used metal skewers, which saves a little prep time and makes cleanup even easier.

Shrimp marinade ingredients added into a large bowl.
  1. In a large mixing bowl, combine olive oil, lemon zest, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, Italian seasoning, salt, black pepper, cayenne pepper, and a splash of lemon juice.
Shrimp added into the marinade and tosses well.
  1. Before adding the deveined shrimp, give them a quick pat dry with a clean kitchen towel or paper towel—this helps the marinade stick better and ensures they roast instead of steam. Toss the shrimp into the bowl and gently coat them in the seasoning mix.
Shrimp skewers are arranged in a baking sheet and ready for baking.
  1. Thread 4 to 5 marinated shrimp onto each skewer from the sharp end of the skewer, making sure to leave a little space between each one so they cook evenly. Place the assembled skewers in a single layer on your prepared wire rack.
Shrimp skewers are just out from the oven and cooling in the wire rack.
  1. Pop them into the oven and bake for 8 to 10 minutes, or until the shrimp are pink, firm, and opaque. Keep an eye on them, as they cook fast, and we don’t want to dry them out!

Once they’re done, remove the shrimp skewers from the oven and let them rest for a minute. Garnish with a sprinkle of chopped parsley or any fresh herbs.The texture of the shrimp turns beautifully tender with lightly crisped edges, and reaches the ideal internal temperature (about 120–125°F for shrimp) making sure they stay juicy, not rubbery. Plus, you can pair them with so many different side dishes, from salads and rice bowls to roasted veggies. The hint of seasoning with the lemon flavors makes them incredibly versatile and hard to resist!

Hint: For a little extra char or crisp edges, you can broil them for the last 1–2 minutes, just keep a close watch so they don’t burn.

Overhead shot of baked shrimp skewers served with a side of creamy Parmesan Ranch Dip.

Variations

  • Swap Italian seasoning for Cajun or Creole spice blend to make spicy Cajun shrimp skewers—serve them with ranch or a cooling yogurt dip.
  • To make Garlic Butter Shrimp Skewers, use melted butter instead of olive oil and add minced fresh garlic in place of garlic powder for bold, buttery flavor.
  • For a sweet and spicy twist, mix together honey, soy sauce, sriracha, and lime juice to create a glaze. Brush it over the shrimp before baking and again just before serving.
  • Want to turn it into a meal? Alternate the shrimp with chunks of zucchini, bell peppers, red onions, or cherry tomatoes to make Shrimp & Veggie Skewers—also known as shrimp kabobs!

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl – For marinating the shrimp.
  • Measuring spoons – To measure spices and seasonings accurately.
  • Wooden or metal skewers – Metal skewers are reusable; wooden ones need soaking.
  • Baking sheet – For roasting the skewers in the oven.
  • Wire rack – Helps air circulate and gives a nice roasted finish.
  • Parchment paper or foil – For easy cleanup and to line your baking sheet.
Close-up of oven-baked shrimp skewers arranged on a platter, garnished with fresh parsley and lemon wedges.

Storage Instructions for Oven-Baked Shrimp Skewers

In the Refrigerator: Let the shrimp cool completely before storing. Remove from skewers and place in an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 3 days.

To reheat: Warm in a skillet over medium heat for 2–3 minutes or reheat in the oven at 350°F until heated through. 

In the Freezer: Cooked shrimp skewers can be frozen for up to 2 months. Place in a freezer-safe container or with parchment paper between layers.

To reheat: Thaw in the fridge overnight, then bake at 375°F until hot, about 6–8 minutes.

Top Tips for Oven-Baked Shrimp Skewers

  1. Use larger or jumbo shrimp, since it holds up better in the oven and stays juicy without overcooking.
  2. Patting the shrimp dry before marinating helps the seasoning stick and prevents excess moisture during baking.
  3. Marinate the shrimp for at least 15 minutes before baking. Wrap it with a plastic wrap and set aside, for extra depth, you can marinate up to 2 hours in the fridge.
  4. If using wooden skewers, soak them in water for 15–20 minutes to prevent burning in the oven.
  5. Shrimp cooks fast, about 8–10 minutes at 425°F. Overcooking can make them rubbery, so keep an eye on them!
  6. Use a wire rack for even roasting since it helps hot air circulate for a more evenly roasted result.
Skewered shrimp seasoned with herbs and spices, baked to perfection being dipped into the parmesan ranch dip sauce.

FAQ

Can I use frozen shrimp for this skewers recipe?

Yes you can! Just make sure to fully thaw and bring it to room temperature
and pat dry the shrimp before marinating. Excess moisture can affect the texture and flavor of the dish.

Do I have to use skewers?

Nope! You can simply spread the seasoned shrimp on a parchment-lined baking sheet and roast them the same way, no skewers needed.

How do I know when the shrimp is cooked or not?

Shrimp are fully cooked when they turn opaque pink and firm. They also curl into a "C" shape. Avoid overcooking the shrimps, they only need about 8–10 minutes in the oven.

Can I prep these shrimp skewers ahead of time?

Yes! You can marinate the shrimp up to 1 day in advance, then skewer and bake just before serving. 

Can I grill these shrimps instead of baking?

Absolutely! Grill over medium heat for about 2–3 minutes per side until shrimp are cooked through and slightly charred.

Close-up of oven-baked shrimp skewers arranged on a blue plate, garnished with fresh parsley and lemon wedges with ranch dip in a blue bowl.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this best shrimp skewers recipe:

If you tried this BEST Oven-Baked Shrimp Skewers recipe or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Golden roasted shrimp skewers fresh out of the oven, served with dipping sauce and herbs arranged beautifully on a green platter.

Oven-Baked Shrimp Skewers (BEST shrimp Recipe )

Abi Guna
These oven-baked shrimp skewers are juicy, flavorful, and ready in under 20 minutes—no grill required! Perfect for a quick weeknight dinner or easy appetizer, made with fresh ingredients and bold seasonings
5 from 3 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Course Appetizer, Main Course
Cuisine American
Servings 4 people

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowl
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Metal or wooden skewers
  • Wire rack
  • Baking Sheet

Ingredients
  

  • 1.5 lb large raw shrimp peeled and deveined (tails off)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon dried Italian seasonings
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional
  • Fresh parsley for garnish
  • Lemon wedges for garnish

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or foil, and place a wire rack on top. Set it aside.
  • (If you're using wooden skewers, soak them in water for at least 15 minutes to prevent burning. I used metal skewers, so I was able to skip this step.)
  • In a large bowl, combine olive oil, lemon zest, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, Italian seasoning, salt, pepper, cayenne pepper, and lemon juice. Mix well with a spoon or fork until fully combined.
  • Pat the shrimp dry using a clean kitchen towel to remove any excess moisture.
  • Add the shrimp to the marinade and toss until they are evenly coated.
  • Thread 4–5 shrimp onto each skewer, leaving a bit of space between each piece to ensure even cooking.
  • Place the prepared skewers in a single layer on the wire rack.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 8–10 minutes, or until the shrimp are pink, firm, and opaque. Be careful not to overcook them!
  • Once done, remove from the oven, garnish with chopped fresh parsley, and serve with lemon wedges and your favorite dipping sauce—like parmesan ranch dip or garlic aioli.

Notes

  • Use fresh or thawed shrimp for any shrimp skewer recipe to get the best results.Pat them dry to help the marinade stick and prevent sogginess.
  • Marinate at least 15 minutes for great flavor, but avoid over-marinating as the acid in lemon juice can slightly "cook" the shrimp.
  • Broil (optional): For extra char or crisp edges, you can broil the shrimp skewers for the last 1–2 minutes of cooking. Keep a close eye to avoid burning!
  • If using wooden skewers, don’t forget to soak them in water for 15–20 minutes to prevent them from burning.
  • To reheat the shrimp skewers use a skillet or oven. (Avoid the microwave to maintain texture.)
Keyword Appetizers, Baked, Dinner, Shrimp
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Parmesan Ranch Dip Recipe (Garlic ranch dressing)

by 5 Comments

Homemade dips are the BEST, and this Parmesan Ranch Dip has quickly become a favorite in our home! It’s a simple, flavorful dip made with tangy sour cream and a savory, cheesy twist from freshly grated parmesan. Whether you're serving it with chicken tenders, shrimp skewers, fresh-cut veggies, sweet potato wedges, or onion rings at your next get-together, this dip is guaranteed to be a crowd-pleaser.

Parmesan ranch dip surrounded by carrot sticks, cucumber slices, and broccoli.

I stopped buying store-bought dips and dressings because of their high cost and added preservatives. Once you realize how easy it is to make this homestyle ranch at home that has great flavor, I promise you won’t want to go back to the store-bought kind! This parmesan garlic ranch dressing comes together in just minutes with simple ingredients you probably already have in your kitchen. Just mix everything in a bowl until smooth and creamy, and enjoy it with your favorite appetizers.

Want to turn this into a dressing too? Just add an extra ¼ cup of buttermilk to thin it out a bit. It makes the dip perfectly pourable and great for drizzling over salads like salmon kale salad or a classic chicken caesar salad or taco salads. One recipe, two delicious ways to enjoy!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
A spoon is taking a spoonful of parmesan ranch dressing dipping sauce.

Why You’ll Love This Parmesan Ranch Dipping Sauce Recipe

  • Quick & Easy – Ready in just minutes with basic ingredients and no fancy equipment needed.
  • Super Flavorful – A creamy blend of tangy sour cream, basic ranch seasoning ingredients, and rich parmesan makes this dip totally irresistible.
  • Versatile – Use it as a dip for appetizers or sides or thin it out for a delicious salad dressing.
  • Family Favorite – Even picky eaters love it! It’s cheesy, creamy, and always a hit at gatherings or weeknight dinners. My daughter puts this ranch dip on everything—you name it!
  • Better Than Store-Bought – No preservatives added! Just simple, fresh flavors made at home with quality ingredients!
Overhead shot of Bowl of cheesy ranch dip made with buttermilk and fresh parmesan sorrounded by veggies like cucumber, carrots, broccoli, cherry tomatoes.

What to Serve with Homemade Parmesan Ranch Dip

  • Chicken Tenders or Nuggets - Crispy, juicy, and made for dipping—this combo is a guaranteed crowd-pleaser.
  • Shrimp Skewers - Grilled or baked shrimp skewers in the oven pairs beautifully with the creamy, cheesy tang of parmesan ranch.
  • Veggie Platter – Carrots, broccoli, celery, cucumbers, bell peppers, and cherry tomatoes all pair perfectly with this dip. It makes eating raw veggies way more fun—just like dipping into no-garlic hummus or roasted carrot hummus! This dipping sauce even pairs well with roasted carrots and cauliflower!
  • Sweet Potato Wedges or Sweet potato cubes - Swap out ketchup for this rich, flavorful dip.
  • Onion Rings - Crispy and golden on the outside, perfectly matched with the cool creaminess of ranch.
  • Pizza or Flatbreads - Use it as a dipping sauce for pizza crusts or drizzle over cheese naan for extra flavor.
  • Sandwiches or Wraps - Spread it inside wraps or sandwiches like chicken salad melts or veggie club bagel sandwiches for a creamy kick.
  • Salads (as a dressing) - Thin it out with a splash of buttermilk and use it as a creamy dressing for chopped Caesar salad, or Quinoa salads. The best salad dressing ever!

Ingredients and Substitutions for Garlic Ranch dressing

I personally love creamy dips with bold flavor, this Parmesan Ranch Dip is about to become your new favorite! It’s rich, zesty, and packed with cheesy goodness—perfect as a tasty dip for everything from veggie sticks to crispy chicken tenders. The smooth, tangy base, it doubles as a flavorful parmesan ranch dressing too! Lets see the ingredients needed to make this dipping sauce recipe below!

Creamy parmesan ranch dip ingredients laid out for making the recipe.
  • Sour Cream - Adds tanginess and creaminess to the dip. I have used the full fat version but you are welcome to use low-fat or light sour cream too. Plain Greek yogurt is a good option too for that extra protein and a thicker texture.
  • Mayonnaise - Gives the dip a richness and a silky texture. You can substitute with light mayo too.
  • Parmesan Cheese  - Adds a salty, nutty, and cheesy depth of flavor to the dipping sauce. You can also use Pecorino Romano (for a sharper taste) or nutritional yeast for a dairy-free, cheesy alternative.
  • Salt - Balances and enhances all the flavors.
  • Black Pepper - Adds mild heat and a little zing to the sauce.
  • Dried Parsley and Dried Dill Weed (optional) - For the herby flavor.
  • Onion Powder and Garlic powder - Brings that classic ranch flavor and a little sweetness that we will get in the store bought hidden valley ranch mix.
  • Garlic - Adds a bold, fresh garlic kick to the dip. Use more garlic powder if preferred, or mash into a paste for a smoother texture.
  • Lemon Juice - Brightens the dip and balances the richness. You can very well substitute with White vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
  • Buttermilk – Helps thin the dip to your desired consistency while adding a subtle tangy flavor. Don’t have buttermilk? No worries! Just make a quick DIY version by mixing 4 tablespoons of milk with ½ teaspoon of lemon juice. Let it sit for 5 minutes, and your buttermilk is ready to use.

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make parmesan ranch dip recipe

To make this creamy Parmesan Ranch Dip, start by mixing the base, combine sour cream and mayonnaise in a bowl until smooth. Then, add the flavor by stirring in grated parmesan, garlic powder, onion powder, chopped garlic, lemon juice, and your seasonings.

Next, adjust the texture by adding a splash or two of buttermilk until you reach your desired dip consistency. Chill the dip in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors meld.

Mix in all the ingredients into a bowl for making ranch dip.
  1. Add all the ingredients in a small bowl for mixing.
Parmesan ranch dip in a bowl with a spoon.
  1. Mix until smooth and creamy.

One of my favorite ways to serve this dip is with fresh veggie dippers like carrots, cucumbers, bell peppers, and even snap peas. Chopped green onions add a subtle bite and make the flavor pop even more! If you're into trendy flavors, this could easily become your next signature sauce thast is perfect for sandwiches, wraps, and even drizzled over roasted potatoes. It's one of those homemade recipes you'll keep coming back to, no matter the season.

How to make parmesan ranch dip with ranch seasoning mix (alternative method )

If you are looking for a quick shortcut, this easy Parmesan Ranch Dip made with ranch seasoning mix is perfect when you're short on time but still want big flavor! Just mix together sour cream, mayonnaise, and your favorite ranch seasoning mix in a medium bowl. Stir in the grated parmesan, a bit of lemon juice, and a splash of buttermilk to get the consistency just right. Chill for about 30 minutes to let the flavors come together, and you're good to go. It’s a super simple and tasty option if you already have ranch mix in your pantry!

Thick parmesan ranch dip in a glass jar with lemon and garlic on the side, a spoon comes in and take the sauce.

Parmesan Ranch Dip Variations

  • Add a pinch of cayenne pepper, smoked paprika, or a few drops of hot sauce for a little heat to make spicy parmesan ranch dip.
  • Mix in ¼ cup of shredded sharp cheddar cheese along with the parmesan for a bolder, more indulgent cheddar parmesan ranch dip recipe.
  • Add finely chopped fresh herbs like chives, dill, or basil for a fresh, for a herby note ranch dip.
  • Mash half a ripe avocado and add in to create avocado ranch dip that is an ultra-creamy twist that’s perfect for tacos or grilled meats.

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowl – Medium-sized, for combining all your ingredients.
  • Whisk or Spoon – For mixing the dip until smooth and well combined.
  • Measuring Cups & Spoons – To measure ingredients accurately.
  • Airtight Container – For storing the homemade dip in the fridge.
Parmesan ranch dip styled with a veggie platter on a wooden board.

Storage Tips for Homemade Parmesan Ranch Dip

Refrigerator: Store the ranch dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5–6 days. Stir well before each use.

Make Ahead Friendly: This parmesan dip actually tastes better after a few hours, once the flavors have had time to meld, so feel free to make it ahead of time when you host parties.

Top Tips for Parmesan Ranch Dip and dressing recipe

  1. Use freshly grated parmesan cheese as it melts into the dip better and adds richer flavor than pre-packaged shredded cheese.
  2. Add a pinch of cayenne or a few drops of hot sauce in the sauce recipe to make the ranch dip a little spicier.
  3. Adjust the consistency with buttermilk, start with a little and add more as needed, less for a thick ranch dip, more for a pourable dressing to make Parmesan ranch dressing for salads.
  4. Let the dip rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes so the flavors can meld. It gets better as it sits!
  5. It disappears fast, especially when served with fries, tenders, or veggie platters—so make extra if you're hosting!
Easy ranch dip with parmesan cheese and garlic placed in a glass jar, perfect for veggies or wings.

FAQ

Can I make this parmesan ranch dip ahead of time?

Yes Of course! The dipping sauce tastes even better after a few hours in the fridge. Make it ahead and let the flavors develop before serving.

How long does parmesan ranch dip recipe last in the fridge?

Store the dip in an airtight container, it will stay fresh for up to 5–6 days in the refrigerator.

Can I use bottled lemon juice instead of fresh?

Fresh lemon juice is best for flavor, but bottled will work in a pinch. Just use a bit less since it's more concentrated.

Is this Parmesan ranch dip gluten-free?

Yes! All the ingredients are naturally gluten-free, but always double-check your labels, especially for mayo and parmesan.

Can I make this parmesan ranch dip dairy-free?

Absolutely! Use vegan mayo, plant-based sour cream, and nutritional yeast in place of parmesan for a delicious dairy-free version.

Can I use this as a salad dressing?

Yes! Just add a few extra tablespoons of buttermilk to thin it out to your desired pourable consistency.

What’s the best way to serve this parmesan dip?

Serve it with veggies, chicken tenders, fries, shrimp skewers, or as a spread for wraps and sandwiches. It’s super versatile!

Parmesan ranch dip in a green bowl surrounded by carrot sticks, cucumber slices, cherry tomatoes and broccoli.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with parmesan ranch dip recipe:

If you tried this Parmesan Ranch Dip or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Parmesan ranch dip in a green bowl surrounded by veggies like broccoli, carrots, cherry tomatoes and cucumber.

Parmesan Ranch Dip Recipe (Garlic ranch dressing)

Abi Guna
Creamy Parmesan Ranch Dip made with sour cream, mayo, garlic, and fresh parmesan—perfect for veggies, chicken tenders, or chips. Quick, easy, and full of flavor!
5 from 3 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Course Appetizer, Condiments, Dip, Sauce, Snack
Cuisine American
Servings 2 cups of sauce

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowls
  • Measuring spoons and cups
  • Spoon or Whisk

Ingredients
  

  • ½ cup sour cream
  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 2 teaspoon dried parsley
  • 1 teaspoon garlic clove finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2-4 tablespoons buttermilk adjust for desired consistency

Instructions
 

  • In a medium bowl, combine the sour cream and mayonnaise. Whisk until smooth and well combined.
  • Stir in parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, parsley, onion powder, garlic powder, chopped garlic, and lemon juice.
  • Add buttermilk 1 tablespoon at a time until you reach your desired dip or dressing consistency.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors meld.
  • Enjoy with veggie platters, chicken tenders, fries, shrimp skewers, or as a creamy salad dressing if thinned out further.

Notes

  1. For a thicker ranch dip, use less buttermilk. For a pourable ranch dressing, add more buttermilk 1 tablespoon at a time until you reach your desired consistency.
  2. Letting the homestyle ranch dip rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes allows the flavors to fully develop. It tastes even better the next day!
  3. Store the parmesan ranch dipping sauce in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days and use it when needed.
Keyword Condiments, Dips, parmesan, ranch, sauces
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Cheese Naan bread Recipe (Stuffed with cheese)

by 3 Comments

As a true bread lover, I'm always looking for new and fun ways to level up my homemade naan, and that’s exactly how this cheese naan was born! It’s everything you love about classic naan: soft, fluffy, and golden, but with a gooey, melty cheese surprise tucked inside. Learn how to make this Indian recipe from scratch with VIDEO instructions! 

A hand taking a piece of cheese naan and the cheese is streching over.

You know what's the best part about this cheesy naan? You don’t need a tandoor oven—just a hot cast iron skillet and a handful of pantry staples. Whether you’re pairing it with your favorite Butter Chicken or enjoying it on its own as a cheesy snack, this recipe is guaranteed to be a crowd-pleaser!

As an Indian mom, making naan at home is one of my favorite parts of meal prep—it brings so much warmth and comfort to our table. There's something incredibly satisfying about watching the dough puff up and turn golden in a hot pan, ready to scoop up rich curries or spicy gravies. I’m always excited to explore new variations, from the plain naan to flavorful twists like garlic naan, stuffed naan, cheesy garlic naan and even cheesy versions that the kids absolutely love.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

CHECK OUT THE Cheese stuffed NAAN RECIPE MADE FROM SCRATCH, WITH A VIDEO TUTORIAL!

Why You’ll Love This Cheese Naan Recipe

  • Simple ingredients – You only need a handful of pantry staples like flour, yogurt, and cheese—no other fancy ingredients are required.
  • Perfect for meal prep – These naan reheat beautifully, making them a great make-ahead option for busy weeknights or hosting parties or potlucks.
  • Soft, fluffy, and cheesy – This naan is everything you love about classic Indian bread, but with a melty cheese center that makes every bite extra comforting and crave-worthy.
  • No tandoor needed – You can make it right on your stovetop in a skillet, with simple ingredients you likely already have at home.
  • Versatile Recipe – Serve it with your favorite curries, soups, or enjoy it as a snack or appetizer. It’s always a hit—especially with kids!
Cheese is melting and oozing from the cheese naan when cutting into halves.

What to serve with cheese stuffed naan

  • Rich, creamy curries like Butter Chicken, Paneer Tikka Masala, Chana Masala, or Palak Paneer pair beautifully with this cheese-stuffed naan bread.
  • A cool, refreshing yogurt dip like Cucumber Raita is a wonderful complement to balance the richness.
  • For a fusion twist, Classic Hummus or Roasted Carrot Hummus taste amazing with the warm, cheesy naan.
  • Grilled chicken or lamb skewers are perfect for wrapping inside the soft naan to make a hearty handheld meal.
  • You can also use roasted carrots and cauliflower or roasted asparagus as a delicious filling layered inside the naan and enjoy it as a flavorful vegetarian option.

Ingredients and substitutions

Made with simple ingredients like plain flour and a generous filling of cheese, each naan is soft, golden, and oozing with melty mozzarella in every bite. You can roll the dough thicker for a pillowy, bread-like feel or keep it thinner if you prefer a slightly crispier texture. Let's see the ingredients needed below!

Ingredients laid out for making cheese stuffed naan bread.
  • All-purpose flour - The base of the dough, making the naan soft and tender pillowy indian flatbread. For substitutions use bread flour for a chewier texture or half whole wheat flour for a more wholesome version.
  • Active dry yeast - Helps the dough rise and gives it that light, airy texture. You can also use instant dry yeast in the same amount, but no proofing needed.
  • Sugar - Feeds the yeast and adds a hint of sweetness. You can always substitute it with honey or maple syrup.
  • Warm water - Activates the yeast and hydrates the dough.
  • Plain yogurt  - Adds softness, a slight tang, and moisture to the naan dough. But you can substitute with Greek yogurt, sour cream or any non -dairy yogurt option as well.
  • Oil - Adds richness to the dough and keeps the dough soft. You can substitute with melted ghee, vegetable oil or any neutral oil.
  • Salt - Enhances flavor and balances the dough. You can also use sea salt instead.
  • Shredded mozzarella - Melts well and gives that gooey, stretchy center we are looking for. Use a blend of mozzarella and cheddar for a twist.
  • Butter - Gives a rich, glossy finish.

See recipe card for quantities.

Cheese-stuffed naan bread stacked on a baking paper with melted cheese oozing out.

How to make cheese naan bread recipe in stove top

Active the yeast - Start by mixing warm water, sugar, and sprinkle yeast in a small bowl. Let it sit for 5–10 minutes until it becomes foamy—this means your yeast is alive and ready to go!

Make the dough - In a large stand mixer bowl, combine the dry ingredients; flour and salt, then pour in the foamy yeast mixture along with yogurt and oil. Mix it all together until a shaggy, sticky dough begins to form.

Knead the dough - Transfer dough to a floured surface or stand mixer and knead for about 8–10 minutes. If needed add a tablespoon of warm milk (optional).You’re looking for a soft, smooth, and elastic texture that bounces back when gently pressed.

First rise - Place the dough in a lightly greased bowl and cover with a towel or cling film. Let the dough rest in a warm spot for 1 to 1.5 hours, or until it’s doubled in size and fluffy.

Divide and fill - Punch down the dough and divide it into 8–10 equal portioned balls. Use flour on a work surface and flatten each ball to a small circle, fill the center with shredded cheese, then pinch the edges of the dough and seal it lock in the filling. Cover the remaining dough with a clean towel to avoid drying.

Roll Out the Naan - Lightly roll each filled ball into an oval or teardrop shape about ¼ inch thick using a rolling pin. Be gentle—pressing too hard can cause the cheese to break through the dough.

Cook the naan - Heat a dry skillet or cast iron pan over medium heat. Cook each naan for 1–2 minutes per side until golden spots appear and it puffs up with beautiful bubbles.

Serve - Brush the hot naan with melted butter or garlic butter (grate a garlic clove in butter)as soon as it comes off the pan. Serve warm with curries, dips, or enjoy it all on its own—the melty cheese inside is irresistible! Store the leftover naan in an airtight container.

Cheese being stuffed and rolled out while making cheese naan bread.

If you're a fan of favorite Indian dishes, you’re going to love this cheese-stuffed naan! Whether it’s your first timemaking naan at home or you’re just trying something new, this recipe today brings that warm, comforting vibe you'd find in your favorite Indian restaurant—right from your kitchen.

Cheese-Stuffed Naan Variations

  • Garlic Cheese Naan - Add minced garlic or garlic powder to the cheese filling or mix it into melted butter before brushing. Sprinkle with chopped cilantro or coriander leaves for extra flavor.
  • Spicy Cheese Naan - Add a pinch of red chili flakes, chopped green chilies, or jalapeños to the filling for a spicy kick.
  • Mixed Cheese Naan - Use a cheese blend like mozzarella, cheddar, gouda, or feta for a more complex flavor and texture.

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups & Spoons - For measuring the ingredients.
  • Stand mixer - To knead the dough.
  • Dough Scraper or Knife - To divide dough into portions.
  • Cast iron skillet - To cook the naan.
  • Pastry brush - To brush the melted butter on top of the naan.
Close-up of freshly cooked naan with melted cheese inside and brushed butter on top.

How to Store Cheese Naan

At Room Temperature - Store cooled naan in an airtight container or wrap it in foil.Best enjoyed within 1–2 days.

In the Refrigerator - Store in a sealed container for up to 4–5 days. Reheat in a skillet or toaster oven. Avoid the microwave if possible, it can make the naan chewy texture or soggy.

In the Freezer - Let naan cool completely, then stack with parchment paper between each piece to prevent sticking. Place in a freezer-safe bag or container and freeze for up to 2 months. To reheat, thaw for a few minutes, then warm in a hot pan until soft and melty again. You can also reheat directly from frozen on low heat.

Top Tips for Cheese-Stuffed Naan Bread

  1. Make sure the water is warm—not hot—when activating yeast (around 105–110°F). 
  2. Use room temperature ingredients for the best dough consistency.
  3. Don’t overstuff the cheese. Add just 2-3 tablespoons of cheese, too much can cause the filling to burst while rolling or cooking. Pinch the edges well after filling to keep the cheese from leaking out.
  4. Addition of yogurt yields softer bread, so don't skip this step.
  5. Use light pressure when rolling stuffed naan. If you press too hard, the cheese may break through the dough.
  6. A hot skillet or cast iron pan is key for that golden-bubbled, tandoor oven -style finish. No need for oil in the pan.
  7. Cheese-stuffed naan is best when served hot and fresh, so the cheese stays gooey and melty.

FAQ

What kind of cheese works best for stuffed naan bread?

Mozzarella cheese is the best option for its meltability and stretch. You can also use a blend of cheddar, gouda, feta, or your favorite melting cheese for added flavor.

Can I make the naan dough ahead of time?

Yes! You can refrigerate the dough after the first rise. Just bring it back to room temperature for 30–45 minutes before shaping and filling.

Can I make this naan without yeast?

Of Course you can, but the texture will be slightly different. Use baking powder (1 tsp) and baking soda (¼ tsp) instead of yeast, and skip the rise time. The naan will be soft but less airy.

Is cheese-stuffed naan freezer-friendly?

Absolutely. Let cooked naan cool completely, then freeze in a zip-top bag. Reheat on a skillet or in the oven.

Why is my cheese leaking out when cooking?

It could be due to overfilling or not sealing the edges tightly. Make sure to gently roll the naan without pressing too hard, and seal the dough well before cooking.

What should I serve with cheese naan?

Serve it with curries, soups, grilled chicken, or even dips like hummus or raita.

Overhead view of garlic butter cheese naan with chopped herbs on top.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Indian cheesy naan recipe:

If you tried this Cheese Naan or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

A hand is taking a slice of cheese naan and the cheese is melting and stretching.

Cheese Naan bread Recipe (Stuffed with cheese)

Abi Guna
Soft and fluffy cheese naan made on the stovetop with simple ingredients. This easy homemade naan is filled with melty cheese and perfect with curries or as a cheesy snack - with a step-by-step video tutorial included.
5 from 2 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours
Course Appetizer, Breakfast, Snack
Cuisine Indian
Servings 10 Naan Bread

Equipment

  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Standing Mixer
  • Sharp Knife
  • Cast iron skillet
  • Mixing Bowls

Ingredients
  

  • 4 cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 packet active dry yeast 2 ¼ tsp
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 cup warm water
  • ½ cup plain yogurt at room temperature
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil or any neutral oils
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 2 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
  • 2 tablespoons melted butter for brushing

Instructions
 

  • In a small bowl, combine 1 cup warm water, sugar, and active dry yeast.
  • Stir and let it sit for 5–10 minutes until the mixture becomes foamy and bubbly, indicating the yeast is active.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together flour and salt.
  • Add the activated yeast mixture, plain yogurt, and oil (vegetable or olive oil).
  • Mix with a spatula or wooden spoon until a rough, shaggy dough forms.
  • Transfer the dough to a stand mixer with a dough hook, or knead by hand on a lightly floured surface.
  • Knead for 8–10 minutes, until the dough is smooth, soft, and elastic.
  • If the dough is too sticky, sprinkle in a little more flour as needed.
  • Place the kneaded dough in a greased bowl, cover with a clean kitchen towel or plastic wrap.
  • Let it rise in a warm place for 1 to 1.5 hours, or until doubled in size.
  • Punch down the risen dough and divide it into 8–10 equal portions.
  • Flatten each ball slightly, place 2–3 tablespoons of shredded cheese in the center.
  • Pinch and seal dough edges tightly to enclose the cheese and form a ball.
  • Gently roll each filled dough ball into an oval or teardrop shape , about ¼ inch thick. Be careful not to press too hard—this helps prevent the cheese from leaking out.
  • Heat a cast iron skillet over medium-high heat until hot (no oil needed).
  • Place one rolled naan onto the pan and cook for 1–2 minutes until bubbles form and the bottom is golden.
  • Flip and cook the other side for 1–2 minutes until lightly charred and cooked through.
  • Remove from the pan and immediately brush with melted butter or garlic butter.
  • Serve the cheese naan warm with your favorite curry, dip, or enjoy as it is.

Video

Notes

  1. Water that’s too hot can kill the yeast. Aim for around 105–110°F to activate it properly.
  2. Allow the dough to rise fully, until doubled in size for the fluffiest naan texture.
  3. Stick to 2–3 tablespoons of cheese per naan to prevent it from bursting while rolling or cooking.
  4. Make sure the edges are pinched tightly after stuffing to avoid cheese leaks while rolling or cooking.
  5. A cast iron skillet or heavy-bottomed pan gives the naan those classic golden brown spots and light charring—like you'd get from a tandoor.
  6. Brush the cheese stuffed naan  immediately with butter to keep the naan softer for a longer time.
  7. Cooked naan can be frozen. Cool completely, then store in freezer-safe bags. Reheat straight from frozen on a pan or in the oven.
Keyword cheese, Indian, snacks
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Butter Chicken With Naan Bread (Easy Indian Recipe)

by 5 Comments

Want a restaurant-style experience at home? This rich, comforting Butter Chicken with Naan is a must-try! It’s a beloved family favorite—tender, juicy chicken simmered in a creamy, buttery tomato-based sauce, packed with bold spices and irresistible flavor. Check out the from-scratch recipe with video!

Top view of butter chicken in a bowl with naan and basmati rice. Garnished with cilantro and red onions.

And the best part? It’s perfect for scooping up with soft, fluffy homemade naan bread, made the easy way. Whether you’re planning a cozy weeknight dinner or a special meal, this butter chicken recipe with naan delivers everything you need for a warm, satisfying, restaurant-style meal at home. So no more take-outs from Indian restaurants!

Having strong Indian roots, I’ve always wondered why so many people shy away from cooking Indian recipes. I realized it’s often because of the long ingredient lists—many classic curries call for at least 10 spices or more! But here’s the truth: not all Indian dishes are hard to make. There’s always a simpler, approachable way to prepare them without losing the authentic flavor and richness that makes Indian food so special. I’m here to break that myth, one easy recipe at a time!

Fan of Indian Naan recipes? Check out my cheese naan recipe thats, kids love!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Check out the butter chicken and naan recipe made from scratch, complete with a VIDEO tutorial!

What is Butter Chicken, why it is so famous?

Butter Chicken, also known as Murgh Makhani, is one of the most beloved Indian dishes worldwide. It features tender, marinated chicken simmered in a rich, creamy tomato-based sauce that's spiced just right.The sauce gets its signature silky texture from butter and cream, making it perfect for scooping up with warm naan or spooning over basmati rice. It’s comforting, indulgent, and surprisingly easy to make at home.

Why You’ll Love This Easy Butter Chicken with Naan Recipe

  • Better than Restaurant: This recipe gives you all the bold, creamy, comforting flavors of your favorite Indian restaurant, without leaving your kitchen.
  • Easy to make: With step-by-step instructions and video with pantry-friendly ingredients, this butter chicken is beginner-friendly yet tastes like it simmered for hours.
  • Perfect flavors: Tender chicken is cooked in a rich tomato-butter sauce spiced just right—not too hot, just flavorful and satisfying.
  • Pairs perfectly with naan: Homemade soft, fluffy naan takes this dish to the next level, ideal for soaking up every bit of that buttery sauce.
  • Crowd-pleaser: Whether it's a cozy dinner or a special occasion, this dish always impresses guests and family alike. We make them for Friday night dinner and best for meal preping options!
Creamy butter chicken close up shot. Garnished with heavy cream and cilantro.

Butter Chicken vs. Chicken Tikka Masala Sauce

These two dishes are both popular Indian favorites, but many people often get them confused and aren't sure how they differ in taste. Here's a simple breakdown to help you understand the difference—especially if you're new to Indian cooking!

  • Butter Chicken - Creamier, milder, buttery, and slightly sweet
  • Tikka Masala - Spicier, tangier, with a more intense and complex spice profile

Both are absolutely delicious—the choice comes down to whether you're in the mood for something rich and comforting, bold and spicy!

Ingredients for making Butter chicken with substitutions

Not every household has all the Indian pantry staples on hand, but check out the alternative options below so you can still make this authentic butter chicken curry right at home.

Ingredients laid out to make the authentic Indian Butter Chicken recipe.
  • Chicken breast – Lean and tender; can substitute with chicken thighs for juicier texture.
  • Plain yogurt – Helps tenderize; Greek yogurt or dairy-free yogurt works too.
  • Lemon juice – Adds tang and helps break down the meat; substitute with lime juice if you don't have lemon handy.
  • Spices - Garam masala, Paprika or red chili powder, ground coriander, Turmeric, Ground cumin, provides lots of flavors and mild spice to the butter chicken.
  • Salt - Enhances the overall taste of the dish.
  • Garlic - Fresh preferred, but you can also substitute with ½ teaspoon garlic powder.
  • Ginger - Adds warmth to the dish. Substitute with ½ teaspoon ground ginger if you don't have fresh ginger handy.
  • Lemon juice - Helps to tenderize the chicken pieces.
  • Butter - Add richness to the sauce and entire dish.
  • Oil - To prevent sticking and any oil works like vegetable oil, olive oil , sunflower oil, etc.,
  • Onion - For the base sauce. I have used yellow onion but red onion works too.
  • Dried fenugreek leaves (kasuri/ kasoori methi) – Adds authentic aroma to the sauce but you can skip if not available.
  • Tomato paste - For that bold tomato flavor.
  • Tomato puree – Adds a rich tomato base to the sauce; can use crushed tomatoes instead.
  • Water - To adjust the consistency of the masala.
  • Heavy cream – Adds creaminess to the dish. You can substitute coconut cream or cashew cream for a dairy-free option. Even Greek yogurt works too!
  • Cilantro – For garnish and freshness.

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for making Indian Naan Bread with substitutions

Ingredients laid out for making Indian Naan bread recipe from the scratch.
  • All-purpose flour - The base of the dough, you can substitute with bread flour for chewy naan, or use half whole wheat flour for a nuttier flavor.
  • Active dry yeast -  Helps the dough rise and creates airiness.
  • Sugar - Feeds the yeast and adds a hint of sweetness; you can use honey or maple syrup instead.
  • Warm water - Activates the yeast and hydrates the dough; make sure it’s not too hot. Can use warm milk for a softer texture.
  • Yogurt - Makes the naan soft and tender; substitute with Greek yogurt, dairy-free yogurt, or sour cream also.
  • Oil - Adds richness and keeps the dough soft. Use olive oil, vegetable oil, or melted ghee.
  • Salt -  Enhances flavor of the bread.
  • Melted butter - Adds flavor and that signature buttery finish.
  • Garlic and cilantro - Optional but flavorful!

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make butter chicken with homemade naan

To make butter chicken, start by marinating the chicken in yogurt, spices, garlic, and ginger to infuse it with flavor and tenderness. Next, cook the chicken in a skillet until it’s browned and cooked through. In the same pan, sauté onions and spices until fragrant, then add the tomato puree and let it simmer until thickened. 

Indian butter chicken and naan making steps.

Return the cooked chicken to the pan and let it simmer in the sauce to absorb all the flavors. Once the sauce is rich and well-blended, stir in the cream to create that signature silky, buttery texture. Finally, garnish with chopped cilantro and serve hot with naan or rice.

Indian butter chicken and naan step by step process.

To make naan bread, start by activating the yeast with warm water and sugar until it becomes foamy. Then, make the dough by mixing in flour, salt, yogurt, and oil with the yeast mixture. Once combined, knead the dough until it’s smooth and elastic. Let it rest for the first rise, allowing it to double in size. After rising, divide and shape the dough into small balls and roll each one into a teardrop or oval shape. 

Indian naan bread recipe un making with step by step process.

Cook the naan in a hot skillet until bubbly and golden on both sides. Finally, brush with melted butter or garlic butter to enjoy with the homemade butter chicken!

What to serve with Homemade Butter Chicken

Naan or Garlic Naan - Soft, warm naan is ideal for scooping up butter chicken. You can check the recipe below for making your classic homemade naan bread!

Basmati Rice - Fluffy and aromatic, basmati rice is another most classic pairing.

Cucumber Raita - This cooling yogurt-based side with cucumber and spices helps balance the richness and spice of butter chicken.

Roasted Vegetables - Roasted veggies make a delicious and wholesome side for this butter chicken. I love serving this with roasted carrots and cauliflower or roasted asparagus and carrots for a flavorful pairing.

Authentic Indian butter chicken with soft garlic naan and fresh cilantro garnish.

Butter Chicken Recipe Variations

  • Add extra chili powder or fresh green chilies or cayenne pepper for more heat to make spicy butter chicken.
  • Swap heavy cream with full-fat coconut milk or coconut cream for a dairy-free, butter chicken with coconut milk.

Naan Bread Recipe Variations

  • Add minced garlic to the dough or brush on top before cooking. Sprinkle with chopped cilantro for extra flavor to make Garlic Naan.
  • Fill rolled dough with shredded mozzarella then seal and cook for gooey, cheesy naan.
  • Replace half or all of the all-purpose flour with whole wheat flour for a heartier, more nutritious version to make whole wheat naan.
Close-up of butter naan bread brushed with melted butter and garnished with cilantro.

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowls - For marinating the chicken and mixing the dough ingredients.
  • Large Skillet - To cook the chicken.
  • Dutch oven or Deep Pan -  For simmering the sauce.
  • Measuring Cups & Spoons - For measuring the ingredients.
  • Stand mixer - To knead the dough.
  • Dough Scraper or Knife - To divide dough into portions.
  • Cast iron skillet - To cook the naan.
  • Pastry brush - To brush the melted butter on top of the naan.

Storage Tips for Butter Chicken

Refrigerator:  Store the cooldown butter chicken in an airtight container and keep well in the fridge for up to 4 days. Reheat gently in a pan or microwave, for the best results add a splash of water or cream to loosen the sauce.

Freezer (meal prep friendly): Cool the butter chicken completely, then store in a freezer-safe container or resealable bag. Freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge and reheat on the stovetop over medium-low heat.

Close up shot of Indian butter chicken and naan served with pickled onions and raita.

Storage Tips for Naan Bread

Room Temperature: Store cooled naan in an airtight ziplock bag or bread box. The naan stays best for 1–2 days at room temp.

Refrigerator: Place the naan in a sealed container or wrap in foil. The naan stays up to 4–5 days, but naan may dry out slightly. Reheat in the microwave or lightly toast in a toaster.

Freezer: Stack cooled naan with parchment between each piece, then freeze in a zip-top freezer bag and the shelflife is Up to 2 months. Reheat directly from frozen in a hot skillet or toaster oven for best texture.

Top tips to make the perfect Butter Chicken with Naan Bread

Butter Chicken Tips

  1. Marinate the chicken for at least one hour.
  2. Browning the chicken before adding it to the sauce adds a delicious smoky flavor and gives it that authentic touch.
  3. A pinch of dried fenugreek leaves (kasuri methi) is the secret to that authentic butter chicken aroma. Crush it between your fingers before adding to enhance the buttery sauce flavor!

Naan Bread Tips

  1. Water should be warm—not hot—to properly activate the yeast.
  2. Kneading helps build gluten for that perfect chew. Aim for 8–10 minutes until the dough is smooth and stretchy.
  3. A good rise (about 1–1.5 hours) helps create airy, bubbly naan when cooked.
  4. Add garlic or herbs for extra flavor while brushing the naan with melted butter.
Flatlay of homemade butter chicken with naan, rice, and Indian-style.

FAQ

Can I make butter chicken ahead of time?

Of Course you can! In fact, butter chicken often tastes better the next day as the flavors deepen. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days, or freeze for up to 2 months.

What kind of chicken is best for butter chicken?

Boneless, skinless chicken breasts or thighs are ideal because they stay juicy and flavorful.

Is butter chicken spicy?

Traditional butter chicken is mildly spiced, not overly hot. Even small childrens can enjoy them. You can adjust the spice level by using more or less chili powder or adding fresh green chilies if you prefer it hotter.

Can I use store-bought naan?

Absolutely! While homemade naan is delicious, store-bought naan is a quick and easy alternative. Just warm it up in a skillet or oven before serving.

What’s a good substitute for heavy cream in butter chicken?

You can use coconut cream, cashew cream, Greek yogurt, or even half-and-half. Coconut cream adds a slightly sweet, dairy-free twist.

Can I make naan without yeast?

Yes! You can make no-yeast naan using baking powder or baking soda with yogurt. It won’t rise as much, but it’s still soft and tasty.

How do I store and reheat leftover Indian naan bread?

Wrap naan in foil or store in an airtight container. Reheat on a hot skillet or in the oven. You can also freeze cooked naan and toast straight from the freezer.

What should I serve with butter chicken and naan?

Pair it with basmati rice, cucumber raita, pickled onions, or a fresh side salad to complete the meal.

Homemade butter chicken in rich tomato sauce with a stack of warm butter naan in the side.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this butter chicken with butter naan recipe:

If you tried this Homemade Butter Chicken With Naan or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Flatlay of butter chicken with naan, rice, and Indian-style salad.

Butter Chicken With Naan Bread (Easy Indian Recipe)

Abi Guna
Creamy homemade butter chicken with naan—an easy, flavorful Indian dish made from scratch with a step-by-step video tutorial. Enjoy the soft and fluffy butter naan dipped in rich and creamy tomato based gravy.
5 from 2 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Naan Bread Prep Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Course Dinner, lunch, Main Course
Cuisine Indian
Servings 4

Equipment

  • Measuring spoons and cups
  • Mixing Bowls
  • Large Skillet
  • Dutch Oven
  • Sharpe knife
  • Cast iton skillet
  • Standing Mixer

Ingredients
  

Ingredients For Butter Chicken

For the Chicken Marinade:

  • 1.5 lb boneless chicken breasts cut into bite-sized pieces
  • ⅓ cup plain yogurt full fat
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ⅛ teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 inch fresh ginger grated
  • 2 tablespoons butter
  • 1 tablespoon oil

For the Butter Sauce:

  • 2 tablespoons butter
  • 2 tablespoons oil
  • 1 medium yellow onion finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 inch fresh ginger grated
  • 2 teaspoons garam masala
  • 1 ½ teaspoons dried fenugreek leaves
  • 1 teaspoon coriander powder
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder or paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 15 ounce can tomato puree
  • ½ cup water
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • 1 teaspoon sugar optional
  • 1 tablespoon chopped cilantro for garnish

Ingredients For Homemade Naan

  • 4 cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 packet active dry yeast (2 ¼ teaspoons)
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 cup warm water
  • ½ cup plain yogurt
  • 2 tablespoon oil
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoon melted butter for brushing
  • Chopped garlic cilantro or topping

Instructions
 

Instructions For Butter Chicken

  • In a large mixing bowl, combine the boneless chicken pieces with all the marinade ingredients: yogurt, lemon juice, garlic, ginger, garam masala, paprika, turmeric, and salt. Mix everything thoroughly to coat the chicken evenly.
  • Cover the bowl with a lid or plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 1 hour—or ideally overnight. This allows the chicken to absorb all the flavors and become tender.
  • Heat 1 tablespoon of oil and 2 tablespoons of butter in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
  • Once hot, add the marinated chicken pieces in a single layer (work in batches if needed).
  • Cook for 4–5 minutes on each side, or until the chicken is nicely browned and fully cooked through. Remove the chicken from the pan and set it aside on a plate.
  • In the medium dutch oven , melt another 2 tablespoons of butter over medium heat along with 2 tablespoons of oil.
  • Add the finely chopped onion and sauté for about 5–7 minutes, until it's soft, translucent, and golden brown.
  • Add the minced garlic, grated ginger, and all the spices—including garam masala, cumin, chili powder or paprika, coriander, turmeric, fenugreek leaves, and salt.
  • Stir constantly and cook for 1–2 minutes until fragrant. Add the tomato paste and stir for a couple more minutes.
  • Pour in the tomato puree and mix well to combine with the onion-spice mixture. Let it cook for 5–6 minutes, stirring occasionally, until the butter chicken sauce darkens slightly in color and thickens.
  • The mixture will turn too thick, add ½ cup of water to loosen it to a smooth consistency.
  • Return the cooked chicken (along with any juices) to the pan.
  • Stir to coat the chicken thoroughly in the buttery tomato sauce.
  • Simmer on low heat for 5–7 minutes, allowing the chicken to absorb the sauce and the flavors.
  • Lower the heat to medium-low, then pour in the heavy cream and sugar (if using).
  • Stir gently until the sauce becomes rich, smooth, and creamy. Let it simmer for another 2–3 minutes to bring everything together. Turn off the heat and sprinkle with chopped fresh cilantro.
  • Serve hot with naan, jeera rice, or basmati rice for a comforting and satisfying Indian meal alongside some lime wedges or lemon wedges.

Instructions For Homemade Naan Recipe

  • In a glass cup or small bowl, combine 1 cup warm water (about 110°F), 1 teaspoon sugar, and 1 packet active dry yeast (2 ¼ teaspoons). Stir to dissolve the sugar and yeast.
  • Let it sit for 5–10 minutes, or until the top becomes foamy and bubbl.
  • In a large mixing bowl (or the bowl of a stand mixer), whisk together 4 cups all-purpose flour and 1 teaspoon salt.
  • Pour in the activated yeast mixture, followed by ½ cup plain yogurt and 2 tablespoons of oil (such as vegetable or olive oil).
  • Stir with a spatula or wooden spoon until a shaggy dough begins to form.
  • Using a standing mixer knead the dough. Attach the dough hook and knead on medium speed for 8–10 minutes, until the dough is smooth, elastic, and slightly tacky but not sticky.
  • Lightly grease a clean bowl with oil and place the dough inside. Cover with a clean kitchen towel or plastic wrap.
  • Let it rise in a warm place (like inside an off oven with the light on) for 1 to 1.5 hours, or until the dough has doubled in size.
  • Once risen, punch down the dough to release the air.
  • Divide the dough into 8–10 equal pieces, depending on how large you want your naan.
  • Roll each piece into a smooth ball, then use a rolling pin to roll each one into an oval or teardrop shape, about ¼ inch thick. Lightly flour your surface if needed.
  • Heat a cast iron skillet over medium-high heat until hot (no oil needed). Place one piece of rolled dough onto the hot skillet.
  • Cook for 1–2 minutes, until bubbles form on the surface and the bottom has golden spots. Flip and cook the other side for another 1–2 minutes, pressing lightly with a spatula for even browning.
  • Remove from the skillet once both sides are cooked and slightly charred in spots.
  • Immediately brush the hot naan with melted butter or ghee.
  • Serve the naan bread warm with your favorite Butter Chicken to enjoy.

Video

Notes

Notes For Butter Chicken Recipe:
  1. Marinating the chicken for at least 1 hour is great, but overnight in the fridge gives the best depth of flavor and tenderness.
  2. Use mild paprika for a mild spice, or swap with chili powder or cayenne for more heat. Adjust to your preference.
  3. Like many Indian dishes, butter chicken often tastes even better the next day once the flavors have had more time to deepen. So leftovers taste better!
  4. This butter chicken recipe freezes beautifully. Let it cool completely, then store in an airtight container for up to 2 months.
Notes For Naan Bread Recipe:
  1. The water for activating yeast should be around 105–110°F. Too hot can kill the yeast, and too cold won’t activate it properly.
  2. If kneading by hand, transfer the dough onto a lightly floured surface and knead for about the same time, adding a little flour as needed until you get a smooth texture.
  3. Make sure the dough rises until doubled in size—this helps create that light, airy naan texture. Cold environments may require a longer rise time.
  4. Use a hot skillet to get the signature golden-brown bubbles and slightly charred spots—like what you'd get from a tandoor oven.
  5. Brushing the naan with melted butter, ghee, or garlic butter immediately after cooking enhances flavor and keeps it soft.
  6. Cooked naan can be frozen! Just cool completely, then store in freezer bags. Reheat in a hot pan or toaster.
Keyword Chicken, comfort food, Indian
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Hummus Bagel Recipe (Veggie Bagel Sandwich)

by 9 Comments

A quick and easy way to elevate your breakfast or lunch game, this veggie Hummus Bagel sandwich is a must-try! Packed with fresh, colorful veggies and creamy hummus, it's a satisfying and healthy meal that's perfect for busy mornings or a light, nutritious lunch. Plus, it comes together in just 10 minutes!

Healthy veggie hummus bagel sandwich with avocado, cherry tomatoes, mixed greens, and a generous layer of hummus, served on a toasted whole grain bagel stacked one above the other.

Not only is this hummus and bagel recipe loaded with flavor, but it's also vegetarian, making it a great option for plant-based eaters. With minimal effort and simple ingredients, you’ll have a hearty, delicious sandwich ready in no time.I always make these bagels and hummus for our Saturday lunch when it’s time for my daughter’s game since it only takes 10 minutes to whip up this sandwich! Give it a try and see how this veggie hummus sandwich quickly becomes your new go-to meal!

Whether you're a fan of classic hummus or prefer roasted carrot hummus for a twist, this sandwich is incredibly versatile and easy to customize. The combination of crunchy veggies, smooth hummus, and a perfectly toasted bagel creates a mouthwatering bite every time. Serve it with a side of sweet potato wedges or sweet potato cubes or a refreshing quinoa salad for a complete, wholesome meal. Craving something a little heartier? Check out my Chicken Melt Sandwich recipe for a deliciously cheesy and satisfying option!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Healthy veggie hummus bagel sandwich with avocado, cherry tomatoes, mixed greens, and a generous layer of hummus, served on a toasted whole grain bagel.

Why You Will Love This Hummus Bagel Recipe

  • Quick and Easy: Ready in just 10 minutes, this bagel sandwich is perfect for busy mornings or a quick lunch. All you need is just 5 ingredients!
  • Healthy: Loaded with fresh veggies and creamy hummus, it’s a nutritious option that keeps you full and energized. Its a protein rich meal option!
  • Customizable: Swap the veggies, try different hummus flavors, or add your favorite toppings to make it your own!
  • Plant-Based Goodness: This veggie hummus bagel is naturally vegetarian, and you can easily make it vegan by choosing a dairy-free bagel and hummus.
  • Perfect for Meal Prep: Prep the veggies ahead of time and assemble when you’re ready to eat, perfect for quick and easy lunches on the go.
Creamy hummus spread on a toasted bagel topped with crisp veggies and avocado, served on a rustic tin tray.

What to Serve with Hummus Bagel Sandwich

  • Salads - A fresh, tangy salad with cucumbers, tomatoes, olives, and feta pairs perfectly with this recipe. Try it with my Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad for a wholesome and balanced meal.
  • Fries and Wedges - Crispy and slightly sweet, sweet potato wedges or sweet potato cubes are the perfect complement to the savory bagel. They add a satisfying crunch and a hint of natural sweetness.
  • Pickles - Dill pickles and pickled red onions add a punch of flavor and a pop of color to your bagel sandwich. 
  • Soups - A warm and comforting bowl of tomato basil soup pairs beautifully with the freshness of the bagel. For a spicier option, try a hearty vegetable soup to add some heat and contrast to the creamy hummus veggie sandwich.
  • Drinks: A classic vanilla bean latte pairs beautifully with the savory sandwich, while a salted caramel latte adds a rich, contrasting flavor.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This recipe is a game-changer! Imagine creamy, flavorful hummus on a bagel, layered with fresh veggies and a hint of seasoning. Whether you're spreading hummus on bagel halves or loading it up with crisp greens, juicy tomatoes, and creamy avocado, this sandwich is a perfect balance of texture and taste. The ingredient list has everything you need to create this delicious, satisfying meal in just minutes. Ready to whip up your new favorite lunch? Let’s get started!

Ingredients laid out for hummus bagel veggie sandwich recipe.
  • Everything Bagels - Everything bagels are the perfect base for this sandwich. If you don’t have everything on hand, plain, whole grain, or even sesame bagels work just as well!
  • Homemade Hummus - Creamy and smooth, hummus brings richness and flavor to the bagel sandwich. You can use your favorite store-bought hummus or make it at home like my no garlic hummus recipe.
  • Mixed Greens - A mix of fresh greens like baby spinach, arugula, and kale adds color, crunch, and a burst of freshness. You can also use romaine, spring mix, or even some microgreens for a more delicate texture.
  • Cucumber - Crisp and hydrating, cucumber slices add a refreshing crunch that balances the creaminess of the hummus. If you’re out of cucumbers, thinly sliced zucchini or bell peppers work great too!
  • Cherry tomatoes - Juicy and slightly sweet, cherry or grape tomatoes add a pop of color and a burst of freshness to every bite.
  • Avocado - Creamy avocado slices add a buttery texture and a dose of healthy fats to the sandwich.
  • Seasonings - Salt and pepper adds the flavors of the veggies and hummus.

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make Bagel with Hummus

This quick and easy sandwich comes together in no time! Perfect for busy mornings or a light and healthy lunch! Let's see to how to make this easy sandwich recipe with step-by step instructions.

Everything bagels toased to perfection and placed on the baking tray.
  1. Lightly toast the bagel halves until they are golden and crispy.
Hummus has been spreaded generously on the bagels on the baking tray.
  1. Spread the hummus generously on both sides of the toasted bagel. 
Spring green mix placed above the hummus layer on the toasted bagel.
  1. Start by placing the mixed greens on one half of the bagel.
Cucumber slices and tomato slices placed on the bagels for hummus sandwich recipe.
  1. Add the sliced cucumber, tomato slices.
Avocado slices are being topped above the toasted bagel sandwich.
  1. Top it off with avocado slices.
CLose the other half of the toasted bagel to make the hummus sandwich.
  1. Place the other half of the bagel on top and gently press down.

Once your delicious hummus bagel sandwich is fully assembled, carefully slice it in half using a sharp knife. This not only makes it easier to eat but also showcases all those vibrant layers of creamy hummus, fresh veggies, and perfectly toasted bagel.

Serve the sandwich immediately to enjoy that perfect combination of crunchy bagel, smooth hummus, and crisp, juicy vegetables. If you’re packing it to go, wrap it tightly in parchment paper or foil to keep it fresh and easy to transport. Whether you’re enjoying it for breakfast, lunch, or a quick snack, this hummus bagel sandwich is sure to hit the spot! 

Meal prep Tip: Prepare the veggies and hummus ahead of time and store them separately. Toast and assemble just before eating to keep everything fresh and flavorful.

Close-up of a hummus bagel sandwich cut in half with creamy garlic-free hummus, colorful veggies, on a golden, crispy bagel.

Variations on hummus bagel

  • Mediterranean Twist: Add some roasted red peppers, Kalamata olives, and crumbled feta cheese for a bold and savory flavor.
  • Spicy Kick: Add pickled jalapeños and a drizzle of sriracha or hot sauce for a spicy, flavorful twist.
  • Caprese Hummus Bagel: Top with fresh mozzarella slices, juicy tomato slices, and fragrant basil leaves to create a delicious Caprese-inspired bagel.

Equipment

  • Toaster - To toast the bagels
  • Spatula or Butter Knife: To spread the hummus.

Storage

Make Ahead Tips:

  • If you’re preparing the sandwich ahead of time, it’s best to keep the components separate and assemble just before eating.
  • Store sliced veggies, hummus, and bagels separately to prevent sogginess.

Refrigeration:

  • Once assembled, wrap the sandwich tightly in plastic wrap or place it in an airtight container.
  • Store in the refrigerator for up to 1 day for the best freshness and texture.
  • If using avocado, drizzle it with lemon juice to prevent browning before assembling.
Healthy veggie hummus bagel sandwich with avocado, cherry tomatoes, mixed greens, and a generous layer of hummus, served on a toasted whole grain bagel placed on a baking tray.

Top Tips for Making the Best Hummus Bagel Sandwich

  1. Lightly toast the bagel halves until they’re golden and crispy. This adds a nice crunch and prevents the bagel from becoming soggy when layered with hummus and veggies.
  2. Allow the bagel cool for a minute after toasting before spreading the hummus. This prevents the hummus from melting and keeps the texture smooth and creamy.
  3. Use fresh, crisp veggies to balance the creamy hummus and soft bagel. Sliced cucumbers, cherry tomatoes, and avocado work wonderfully for a vibrant, colorful presentation.
  4. Add greens first to create a barrier between the hummus and juicy veggies like tomatoes to prevent sogginess.
  5. Hummus bagels are best enjoyed fresh to maintain their texture and flavor. If making ahead, wrap tightly to keep the bagel from drying out.

FAQ

Can I make the hummus bagel sandwich ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the ingredients ahead of time and store them separately. Toast the bagel and assemble the sandwich just before eating to maintain freshness and prevent sogginess.

What type of bagel works best for this sandwich?

Everything bagels add a great flavor with their savory seasoning, but plain, whole wheat, sesame, or multigrain bagels also work well. 

Can I use store-bought hummus?

Absolutely! Store-bought hummus works great, especially if you're short on time. 

Can I add protein to this bagel sandwich?

Yes! Adding grilled chicken, turkey slices, smoked salmon, or a fried egg can make it more filling and protein-packed. 

Delicious hummus bagel sandwich with colorful veggies and a creamy hummus spread, perfect for a healthy breakfast or lunch.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this hummus bagel recipe:

If you tried this Hummus Bagels recipe or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

A vibrant veggie hummus bagel sandwich topped with creamy hummus, fresh avocado slices, crisp cucumber, juicy tomatoes, and mixed greens, served on a toasted everything bagel.

Hummus Bagel Recipe (Veggie Bagel Sandwich)

Abi Guna
This creamy and flavorful hummus bagel sandwich is loaded with fresh veggies and smooth hummus on a perfectly toasted bagel will be ready in 10 minutes. A quick and healthy meal that's perfect for breakfast, lunch, or a satisfying snack!
5 from 4 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Course Breakfast, lunch, Main Course, Snack
Cuisine American, Mediterranean
Servings 4 people
Calories 418 kcal

Equipment

  • Toaster to toast the bagels
  • Spatula or Butter Knife to spread the hummus

Ingredients
  

  • 4 counts everything bagel sliced
  • 1 cup homemade hummus
  • 2 cups mixed greens
  • 1 cup cucumber sliced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 medium avocado sliced
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon pepper

Instructions
 

  • Prep the Veggies: Slice the cucumber, cherry tomatoes, and avocado, and set them aside.
  • Toast the Bagel: Lightly toast the bagel halves until they are golden and crispy.
  • Spread the Hummus: Generously spread hummus on both sides of the toasted bagel.
  • Layer the Veggies: Start by placing the mixed greens on one half of the bagel. Add the sliced cucumber, tomato slices, and top it off with avocado slices. Season with a little salt and pepper, if desired.
  • Assemble the Sandwich: Place the other half of the bagel on top and gently press down.
  • Serve: Slice in half and serve immediately.

Notes

  • Use a flavored hummus like roasted carrot hummus or sun-dried tomato for an extra punch or a regular hummus.
  • Swap the bagel with a whole grain or gluten-free option if preferred.
  • Hummus bagel sandwiches are best enjoyed fresh, but if you have leftovers, wrap them tightly and store in the refrigerator for up to one day.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 bagel sandwichCalories: 418kcalCarbohydrates: 67gProtein: 14.6gFat: 11.6gSaturated Fat: 1.2gSodium: 5474mgPotassium: 400mgFiber: 7.3gSugar: 7gCalcium: 143mgIron: 6mg
Keyword bagel, Healthy, hummus, sandwich, vegetable
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Hummus Without Garlic

by 9 Comments

If you're a hummus lover but not a fan of garlic, you're in the right place! This creamy and smooth homemade Hummus without Garlic is packed with flavor without the strong garlic punch. It's perfect for those who prefer a more subtle taste or want to avoid lingering garlic breath. Plus, since garlic can trigger acid reflux for some people, skipping it makes the hummus gentler on the stomach.

A bowl of creamy hummus without garlic, topped with a drizzle of olive oil, smoked paprika, and fresh parsley, served with colorful veggie sticks.

Whether you're prepping for a party, looking for a healthy snack, or just craving something quick and easy, this garlic-free hummus is your new go-to. Plus, it’s so simple to make, and you’ll wonder why you didn’t try it sooner! 

You know what's the best part? This hummus is just as delicious and versatile as the classic version. You still get the rich, nutty flavor from tahini, the bright zing from fresh lemon juice, and that irresistibly creamy texture. It pairs beautifully with pita bread, crunchy veggie sticks, or as a spread for hummus bagels, sandwiches and wraps. Craving something unique and more flavorful than regular hummus? Check out my delicious Roasted Carrot Hummus Recipe with a twist!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
The cucumber slice being dipped in the creamy homemade humus.

How to make hummus creamy

Wondering how to make hummus creamy with canned chickpeas? The secret lies in blending the tahini and lemon juice first, adding a bit of ice water for a smooth, fluffy texture. Incorporating aquafaba (the liquid from the can) also makes a noticeable difference. Whether you're serving it as a dip, spread, or side dish, this vegan hummus recipe will impress everyone with its rich, velvety texture and vibrant flavor.

This chickpea hummus is perfect for meal prepping or whipping up a quick appetizer. With just a few simple steps and minimal effort, you’ll have a batch of delicious, creamy hummus ready to enjoy. Pair it with fresh veggies, pita bread, or use it as a sandwich spread for a healthy and satisfying option. Try this hummus recipe with canned chickpeas today and elevate your snacking game!

Why You’ll Love This No Garlic Hummus Recipe

  • Quick and Easy: With just a few pantry ingredients and a few minutes in the food processor, you’ll have a healthy snack or dip ready to go! It’s the perfect meal prep spread option.
  • Smooth and Creamy: The texture is irresistibly velvety and perfect for dipping or spreading. Smear it on anything from sourdough bread, bagels, wraps, naan, or pita bread—the possibilities are endless!
  • No Garlic Breath: You get all the classic hummus goodness without the worry of lingering garlic breath, making it great for social gatherings and everyday meals.
  • Great for Everyone: Whether you’re garlic-sensitive or just prefer a milder taste, this hummus is a crowd-pleaser. It’s the perfect addition to potlucks, parties, or your weekly meal prep lineup!
Smooth and velvety hummus without garlic presented in a rustic bowl, garnished with olive oil and sesame seeds, surrounded by sliced vegetables and tomatoes.

What to Serve with Classic Creamy Hummus

Hummus is so versatile that you can pair it with just about anything! Whether you’re hosting a party, whipping up a quick snack, or just craving something hearty and satisfying, here are some of my favourite ways to enjoy the creamy hummus:

  • Breads, Crackers and Chips- Think warm, soft pita bread or crispy pita chips, crunchy seed crackers, are classic and unbeatable! Try naan, sourdough, or even toasted bagel slices for a fun twist. Sometimes you just need that salty crunch! Tortilla chips, pretzel sticks, and veggie chips are fun and easy dipping options.
  • Spread on Bread - Start your morning right by spreading this creamy hummus on a slice of toasted bread. You can also make a hearty sandwich, like my Hummus Bagel for lunch, or use it as a flavorful spread for a chicken sandwich. Either way, you’ll love the amazing taste!
  • Veggie Sticks - Veggies and hummus are a match made in snacking heaven! Slice up some carrots, cucumbers, bell peppers, or celery for that satisfying crunch. Don’t forget radishes, cherry tomatoes, and roasted sweet potato wedges, sweet potato cubes for a colorful, vibrant platter.
  • Protein and Grains - Amp up your hummus game by serving it alongside grilled chicken skewers or crispy falafel balls or chicken meatballs. Feeling fancy? Serve with a couscous or quinoa salad for a Mediterranean feast!
  •  Salads - Pair hummus with a bright Greek salad, roasted veggies, or a simple chickpea salad. The freshness complements the creamy texture and makes it feel extra wholesome.

Ingredients and Substitutions

All you need are fewer than 7 ingredients to whip up this creamy homemade hummus recipe—without garlic! Let’s take a look at each ingredient, along with some handy substitution options if you’re missing anything.

Garlic-free homemade hummus ingredients laid out.
  • Chickpeas (Garbanzo Beans) - Chickpeas are the main ingredients for hummus, giving it that creamy, slightly nutty flavor. Canned chickpeas are super convenient, but you can also cook dried chickpeas from scratch for an even fresher taste. If you’re out of chickpeas, try using white beans or cannellini beans for a similar texture!
  • Tahini (Sesame Paste) - Tahini is what gives hummus its signature creamy, nutty flavor. If you’re not a fan of tahini or don’t have it on hand, swap it out with smooth peanut butter or sunflower seed butter for a slightly different, but equally delicious, result.
  • Olive Oil - Olive oil adds a luscious, silky texture to your hummus. Use extra virgin olive oil for the best quality.
  • Lemon Juice - Freshly squeezed lemon juice brings brightness and balances the richness of the tahini.
  • Ice cubes - Adding ice cubes to the food processor while blending hummus might sound a bit unusual, but it actually helps in achieving that super smooth and creamy texture! Ice cubes keep the mixture cool, preventing the ingredients from overheating and maintaining that silky texture.
  • Salt - A pinch of salt enhances all the flavors, giving your hummus that satisfying, savory taste.
  • Ground Cumin - Cumin adds a warm, earthy note that complements the nuttiness of the tahini and chickpeas.
  • Paprika - A dash of paprika adds that extra smokey flavor to the hummus recipe.
  • Water - Adding a few tablespoons of water helps achieve that perfect, creamy consistency. You can also use the aquafaba (the liquid from the canned chickpeas) instead—just be sure to save it before draining the can!

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make hummus without garlic

If you're looking for a garlic-free hummus that's just as creamy and flavorful as the classic version, I got you covered with simple steps! This hummus recipe without garlic is perfect for those who prefer a milder taste. Made with simple pantry ingredients like canned chickpeas, tahini, lemon juice, and olive oil, this recipe is quick and easy to make. Plus, it's completely vegan, making it a great addition to your plant-based meal rotation.

In a food processor ingredients added for prepping Delicious and smooth hummus without garlic.
  1. Add the ingredients into the food processor; chickpeas, salt, paprika, cumin, tahini, ice cubes and lemon juice.
In a fod processor the hummus being processed without salt.
  1. Blend until smooth and creamy by scraping the sides using a spatula.

Add water, one tablespoon at a time, to the food processor while blending. This gradual addition helps you control the consistency, ensuring the hummus becomes smooth and creamy without getting too watery. Keep blending until the texture reaches your desired level of creaminess—light and fluffy or dense and thick, depending on your preference.

Once the hummus has the perfect consistency, take a quick taste and adjust the seasoning. Add more salt or a squeeze of lemon juice to brighten the flavors if needed. If you prefer a bit of warmth and depth, sprinkle in a little more cumin and blend again. Remember, tasting and adjusting as you go ensures your hummus has a balanced and delicious flavor profile.

Hint: Always use a clean spoon to scoop out portions to avoid contamination. If the hummus thickens after storage, simply stir in a little water or olive oil to bring back the creamy texture!

Cucumber slice being dipped in the creamy homemade hummus without garlic in a bowl.

Variations

  • Spicy Hummus - Give your hummus a little kick by adding 1-2 teaspoons of harissa, sriracha, or cayenne pepper. 
  • Roasted Vegetable Hummus - Blend in roasted carrots, beets, or red bell peppers for a colorful and naturally sweet variation. Roasting brings out a deep, caramelized flavor that pairs beautifully with creamy hummus. Like my roasted carrot hummus recipe!
  • Avocado Hummus - For a rich and creamy twist, blend in half a ripe avocado. It adds a silky texture and a mild, buttery flavor—perfect for spreading on toast!
  • White Bean Hummus 0 Replace chickpeas with cannellini or navy beans for a softer, smoother texture. This variation is extra creamy and mild in flavor.

Equipment

  • Food Processor or Blender: Essential for blending all the ingredients into a smooth and creamy consistency.
  • Spatula: Great for scraping down the sides of the processor and making sure every bit of hummus gets blended evenly.
  • Measuring Cups and Spoons: Accurate measurements help you get the perfect balance of flavors.
Garlic-free homemade hummus with a golden drizzle of olive oil, sprinkled with cumin and herbs, paired with crisp veggie dippers , a hand taking the hummus dip with a baby carrot.

Storage

Refrigerator: Transfer your hummus to an airtight container to keep it fresh. Drizzle a thin layer of olive oil on top to help seal in moisture and maintain creaminess. Store in the fridge for up to 4-5 days.

 Freezer: Use a freezer-safe container and leave some space at the top for expansion. Drizzle with olive oil to prevent drying out. Freeze for up to 3 months. To thaw, move it to the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Top Tips for Making Hummus Without Garlic

  1. A good-quality tahini makes all the difference! Choose a smooth, creamy variety for the best texture.
  2. To get that dreamy, velvety texture, blend the hummus for a few extra minutes, even if it looks done. Stop occasionally to scrape down the sides for an even mix.
  3. Start with a small amount of water or aquafaba, then add more as needed. This helps avoid runny hummus.
  4. A drizzle of olive oil not only adds richness but also helps with the smooth texture. I highly recommend using Extra virgin olive oil as it has the best flavor for hummus.
  5. Hummus tastes even better after chilling for a few hours. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen. Make it ahead of time for parties or meal prep!
  6. Always store your hummus in an airtight container with a layer of olive oil on top to keep it fresh and moist.
Rich and creamy garlic-free hummus served in a handmade pottery dish, topped with olive oil and a sprinkle of paprika, with fresh veggies.

FAQ

What can I use instead of tahini in this no garlic hummus recipe?

If you want to make a garlic hummus recipe without Tahini, you can swap tahini with smooth peanut butter, almond butter, or sunflower seed butter. The flavor will be slightly different but still creamy and delicious!

Is hummus without garlic still flavorful?

Yes! The combination of tahini, lemon juice, cumin, and olive oil creates a delicious and well-rounded flavor profile, even without the garlic punch.

Can I make hummus without olive oil?

Yes, you can skip the olive oil and add a bit more water or aquafaba for consistency. It will be slightly less rich but still tasty.

How long does hummus without garlic last in the fridge?

Store it in an airtight container, and it should last for 4-5 days. Adding a thin layer of olive oil on top helps keep it from drying out.

Can I freeze hummus without garlic?

Yes! Freeze it in a sealed container for up to 3 months. Let it thaw in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Is hummus without garlic good for people with acid reflux?

Yes! Garlic can trigger acid reflux for some people, so skipping it makes the hummus gentler on the stomach.

What are some creative ways to use hummus without garlic?

Use it as a sandwich spread, dip for veggies and pita, or even as a creamy salad dressing by thinning it with a little water or lemon juice.

A bowl of creamy hummus without garlic, topped with a drizzle of olive oil, smoked paprika, and fresh parsley, served with colorful veggie sticks.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this no garlic hummus recipe:

If you tried this Hummus without garlic recipe or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Delicious and smooth hummus without garlic, artfully styled on a bowl with vibrant veggies and , perfect for dipping.

Hummus Without Garlic

Abi Guna
Creamy and flavorful hummus without garlic that's perfect for those who prefer a milder taste or want to avoid garlic breath. Made with simple pantry ingredients, this smooth and velvety dip is quick to make and versatile for any meal or snack. Enjoy it as a spread, dip, or healthy appetizer!
5 from 4 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Course Appetizer, Snack
Cuisine Mediterranean
Servings 8 servings (¼ cup per serving)
Calories 64 kcal

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Spatula

Ingredients
  

  • 1 (15 ounces) can chickpeas drained and rinsed
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus extra for drizzling
  • 2 tablespoons freshly squeezed lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ¾ teaspoon salt
  • 2-3 ice cubes
  • 2–3 tablespoons water to adjust for consistency
  • Chopped parsley optional, to garnish
  • Sesame seeds optional, to garnish

Instructions
 

  • In a food processor, combine chickpeas, tahini, ice cubes, olive oil, lemon juice, cumin, paprika and salt.
  • Blend until smooth, scraping down the sides as needed.
  • Add water, one tablespoon at a time, and blend until the hummus reaches your desired creaminess.
  • Adjust salt and lemon juice to your taste. You can add more cumin for a bit of warmth if desired.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and drizzle with olive oil to keep the hummus moist.
  • Sprinkle with smoked paprika for a pop of color, along with chopped parsley and sesame seeds.
  • Serve the no-garlic hummus with pita bread, veggie sticks, or use it as a spread in bagel sandwiches and wraps.

Notes

  • Store the hummus in an airtight container with a layer of olive oil on top to keep it fresh and moist.
  • If the hummus is too thick, add a little more water or aquafaba and blend again until it’s just right.
  • This hummus recipe is super versatile! Feel free to add roasted veggies, herbs, or spices to suit your taste similar to my roasted carrot hummus recipe!
  • Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4-5 days. Make a big batch and portion it out for snacks or quick meals throughout the week.
  • You can pair this hummus without garlic with fresh veggies, bread, or as a spread for wraps, bagels and sandwiches.

Nutrition

Serving: 2 tablespoonsCalories: 64kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 3gFat: 1.8gSaturated Fat: 0.2gSodium: 650mgPotassium: 101mgFiber: 2.6gSugar: 1.7gCalcium: 19mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Condiments, Dips, Healthy, hummus, snacks
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Nutella Waffles

by 5 Comments

If you're a Nutella lover, get ready to fall in love with these Nutella Waffles, the easiest and most indulgent waffles you'll ever make! These Nutella Waffles are crispy on the outside, soft on the inside, and packed with rich, chocolate-hazelnut flavor in every bite. By mixing Nutella directly into the batter, you get a perfectly indulgent waffle that’s great for breakfast, brunch, or dessert!

A stack of warm Nutella waffles served topped with whipped cream, fresh strawberries, and a rich chocolate-hazelnut drizzle, creating a decadent and mouthwatering brunch treat.

Top them with fresh strawberries, bananas, a dollop of whipped cream, and an extra drizzle of warm Nutella to take them to the next level. These waffles are effortless, decadent, and absolutely irresistible!

As many of you know, I love Nutella! My Nutella-covered strawberries have been a huge hit on the blog, followed by my no-bake Nutella Mousse recipe, which is a must-try. With just ½ cup of Nutella left in my jar, I wanted to create something quick and family-friendly for brunch—and that’s how these BEST Nutella Waffles came to life!

Are you a waffle fan? Then you have to try these Red Velvet Waffles made with cake mix!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Close up shot of A plate of Nutella-infused waffles with a crispy, golden texture, topped with a drizzle of melted Nutella, fresh strawberries, whipped cream and nutella drizzle.

Why You’ll Love This Nutella Waffle Recipe

  • Decadent Treat - Unlike regular waffles with Nutella as a topping, this waffle recipe blends Nutella directly into the batter, giving every bite a rich, chocolate-hazelnut flavor. 
  • Easy to Make – With simple ingredients and minimal prep time, you can whip up these waffles effortlessly for breakfast, brunch, or dessert. This is our goto weekend breakfast!
  • Versatile & Customizable – Enjoy them plain, or top them with extra Nutella drizzle, fresh fruit like berries or bananas, whipped cream, or a sprinkle of powdered sugar for an extra treat.
  • Kid-Friendly & Crowd-Pleasing – Whether you're making these for kids or serving them at a brunch gathering, they’re guaranteed to be a hit!
  • Great for Make-Ahead & Freezing – These waffles freeze well and reheat beautifully in the toaster or oven, making them perfect for busy mornings.
A fork cutting through a soft, chocolatey Nutella waffle, showing its fluffy interior, with extra Nutella drizzled on top.

What to Serve with these Nutella Waffles

Whether you're in the mood for a simple drizzle over warm waffles or a decadent sandwich stuffed with fresh fruit and Nutella, there are endless breakfast ideas with Nutella to start your day on a sweet note. Pair it with a hot coffee or a fresh fruit smoothie for a breakfast that feels like a treat every time! Here are some of my favorite pairings!

  • Fresh Fruits – Serve these waffles with fresh fruits like strawberries, whose slight tartness balances the sweetness of Nutella. Bananas are a classic combination, while mixed berries enhance the chocolate-hazelnut flavor.
  • Extra Toppings – Nutella waffles are delicious on their own, but you can take them to the next level with toppings like a warm drizzle of Nutella, light and airy whipped cream, a dusting of powdered sugar, crunchy nuts, or shredded coconut for a tropical touch!
  • Syrups & Spreads – Maple syrup is a classic choice, but for a different flavor, try a drizzle of caramel sauce, almond butter, or peanut butter.
  • Drinks – A classic vanilla bean latte pairs beautifully with Nutella’s sweetness, while a salted caramel latte offers a rich, contrasting flavor.

Ingredients and Sustitutions

To make these delicious Nutella waffles, you'll need a few simple ingredients that come together for the perfect crispy yet fluffy texture. Let's see the ingredients needed below!

Ingredients spread over on pink hue background for making quick and easy nutella waffles.
  • All-Purpose Flour – The base of the waffle batter, giving structure and fluffiness. If you're looking for a healthier option, swap it with whole wheat flour for added fiber, or use gluten-free flour for a gluten-free version. I have tested this recipe with kodiak protein pancake mix for that extra protein and still it tastes great!
  • Baking Powder – The secret to light, fluffy waffles! It helps the batter rise and creates that perfect crisp-on-the-outside, soft-on-the-inside texture. 
  • Salt – A pinch of salt balances the sweetness and enhances the chocolate-hazelnut flavor. If using salted butter, you can reduce or skip the added salt.
  • Eggs – Provide structure and help the waffles stay soft and fluffy inside. If you're out of eggs or need a vegan option, replace each egg with ¼ cup unsweetened applesauce or a flax egg (1 tablespoon ground flaxseed + 3 tablespoon water, mixed and rested for 5 minutes).
  • Milk – Keeps the batter smooth and adds moisture. You can use buttermilk for extra fluffiness, or substitute with almond milk, oat milk, or coconut milk for a dairy-free option.
  • Nutella – The main ingredient for this waffle recipe! It infuses the batter with a rich, chocolate-hazelnut flavor. 
  • Vanilla Extract – Enhances the overall flavor with a warm, sweet aroma.
  • Melted Butter – Adds richness and helps create crispy edges. Use vegetable oil, melted coconut oil, or even Greek yogurt for a slightly healthier alternative.
  • Strawberries - To serve with waffles. But any fruits like berries, bananas, sliced apples works too!

See recipe card for quantities.

How To Make Nutella Waffles

If you're a Nutella lover looking for the best Nutella recipes, you can't go wrong with a delicious chocolate laoded nutella waffles! It's the perfect balance of crispy waffles and creamy chocolate-hazelnut goodness, making it one of the most irresistible Nutella breakfast recipes. Lets see the recipe with step-by step images below!

In a bowl dry ingredients being mixed for nutella waffles recipe.
  1. In a bowl combine the dry ingredients; flour, salt and baking powder.
Nutella being added to the wet mixture in a large bowl.
  1. In a seperate large bowl beat the eggs followed by nutella. Mix until well combined. Add milk, vanilla, butter.
Flour being added to a large bowl to make nutella waffles.
  1. Once the wet mixture is combined fold in the dry ingredients mixture.
The nutella waffle batter in a large bowl.
  1. Mix the flour until combined, dont overmix the waffle batter. (Few lumps are just fine)
Pour the nutella waffle batter in a waffle maker.
  1. Pour the waffle batter in the greased waffle maker.
crispy nutella waffles being cooked in a waffle maker.
  1. Cook the waffles until golden and crispy.

For the ultimate indulgence, serve your Nutella waffles warm and fresh off the waffle iron. Drizzle extra warm Nutellaover the top for a rich, chocolate-hazelnut finish that melts into every bite. Add a handful of fresh strawberries or sliced bananas to balance the sweetness with a refreshing, fruity touch.

For extra decadence, top with a dollop of fluffy whipped cream and a light dusting of powdered sugar, creating a beautiful and irresistible presentation. Pair with a side of maple syrup, chopped hazelnuts, or a scoop of vanilla ice cream for a next-level treat. Whether you're enjoying them for breakfast, brunch, or dessert, these waffles are guaranteed to impress!

A plate of Nutella-infused waffles with a crispy, golden texture, topped with a drizzle of melted Nutella, fresh strawberries slices, sweet and nutty breakfast.

Variations

Want to switch things up? Here are some fun and delicious variations of Nutella waffles to suit different tastes and occasions!

  • Double Chocolate Nutella Waffles  - Add ¼ cup extra cocoa powder and ¼ cup chocolate chips to the batter for a richer, double-chocolate experience.
  • Banana Nutella Waffles - Mash ½ ripe banana into the batter for a naturally sweet, moist waffle.
  • Nutella-Stuffed Waffles - Instead of mixing Nutella into the batter, add a spoonful of Nutella between two layers of batter in the waffle iron for a gooey, stuffed center. I use this method when I am making pancakes!

Equipment

  • Waffle Maker - A good-quality waffle iron ensures crispy edges and a fluffy interior. 
  • Mixing Bowls – One for dry ingredients and another for wet ingredients, making it easier to mix everything smoothly.
  • Whisk or Hand Mixer – Helps combine ingredients evenly, especially when mixing Nutella into the batter.
  • Measuring Cups & Spoons – Ensures accurate measurements for the perfect waffle texture.
  • Spatula – Great for folding the wet and dry ingredients together without overmixing.
A oval plate served with Fluffy Nutella waffles with deep, crispy pockets filled with melted Nutella, garnished with fresh strawberries for a beautiful and delicious presentation.

Storage & Reheating Tips for waffles with nutella

Storing Leftover Waffles:

  • Place completely cooled waffles in an airtight container or resealable bag. Separate layers with parchment paper to prevent sticking. The waffles stay fresh for 3 days.
  • Lay waffles in a single layer on a baking sheet and freeze for 1-2 hours until firm. Transfer to a freezer-safe bag or airtight container with parchment paper between layers. Staying fresh for 3 months.

Reheating Nutella Waffles: 

  • Toaster – The best method for a crispy texture. Heat frozen or refrigerated waffles on a medium setting until warm and crisp.
  • Oven – Preheat to 350°F (175°C), place waffles directly on the oven rack or a baking sheet, and bake for 5-7 minutes.
  • Air Fryer – Heat at 350°F (175°C) for 3-5 minutes for crispy results.

Top Tips for Making the Best Nutella Waffles

  • The nutella might be slightly thick, so heating the Nutella (10-15 seconds in the microwave) makes it easier to blend into the batter without clumping.
  • Don’t overmix the batter, stir until just combined.
  • A fully heated waffle iron ensures crispy edges and even cooking. So make sure the waffle iron is hot enough before pouring the batter.
  • Placing hot waffles directly on a plate can make them soggy from trapped steam. Instead, let them cool slightly on a wire rack for maximum crispiness.
  • Lightly grease the waffle iron with cooking spray or melted butter to prevent sticking and achieve golden, crispy waffles.
  • Use a ⅓ or ½ cup measuring cup to pour the batter, ensuring consistent waffle size and avoiding overflow.
Backlight shot of A breakfast spread featuring Nutella waffles stacked high, surrounded by bowls of fresh fruit, syrup.

FAQ

Can I make the waffle batter ahead of time?

Yes! You can prepare the waffle batter and store it in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Just give it a gentle stir before using.

Can I freeze Nutella waffles?

Absolutely! Let them cool completely, then freeze in a single layer on a baking sheet before transferring to a freezer bag. They can be stored for up to 3 months.

Can I make these waffles without eggs?

Yes you can! Replace each egg with ¼ cup applesauce or a flax egg (1 tablespoon ground flaxseed + 3 tablespoon water, mixed and rested for 5 minutes).

Can I use a pancake mix or cake mix instead of making the batter from scratch?

Yes of course! You can use a store-bought waffle mix and simply add ½ cup of Nutella to the wet ingredients. For a cake-like version, use chocolate cake mix as the base.

How do I prevent my waffles from sticking to the waffle iron?

Make sure to grease the waffle maker with cooking spray or melted butter before adding the batter. Also, avoid opening the waffle maker too soon—let it fully cook!

Can I make Nutella waffles gluten-free?

Yes! Substitute all-purpose flour with gluten-free 1:1 baking flour or almond flour for a gluten-free version

Can I make this recipe dairy-free?

Definitely! Use almond milk, oat milk, or coconut milk instead of regular milk, and replace butter with coconut oil or dairy-free margarine.

What are the best toppings for Nutella waffles?

Some delicious options include fresh strawberries, bananas, whipped cream, chopped nuts, powdered sugar, or an extra drizzle of warm Nutella.

Horizontal image of A stack of warm Nutella waffles served with a side of whipped cream, fresh strawberries, and a rich chocolate-hazelnut drizzle, creating a decadent and mouthwatering brunch treat.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Nutella Waffles recipe:

If you tried this Nutella Waffles or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

A stack of warm Nutella waffles served with a side of whipped cream, fresh strawberries, and a rich chocolate-hazelnut drizzle, creating a decadent and mouthwatering brunch treat.

Nutella Waffles

Abi Guna
These fluffy Nutella waffles are a chocolate lover’s dream! Infused with rich, creamy Nutella, they’re crispy on the outside and soft on the inside, making them perfect for breakfast, brunch, or dessert. Serve with extra Nutella drizzle, fresh fruit, and whipped cream for an indulgent treat the whole family will love!
5 from 3 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Course Breakfast, Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 5 servings
Calories 439 kcal

Equipment

  • Waffle Maker
  • Mixing Bowls
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Hand Mixer
  • Spatula

Ingredients
  

  • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 2 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 cup milk at room temperature
  • ½ cup Nutella
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • 2 tablespoons melted butter
  • Whipped cream to serve
  • Fresh fruits to serve
  • Cooking spray

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the waffle iron according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, and salt.
  • In another bowl, whisk the eggs, then add the Nutella. Use a whisk or hand mixer to mix until well combined.
  • Add milk, vanilla extract, and melted butter, whisking until smooth.
  • Gradually add the wet mixture to the dry ingredients, stirring until just combined. Do not overmix the batter.
  • Lightly grease the waffle iron, then pour ⅓ cup of batter in, spreading it evenly. Cook according to your waffle maker’s instructions until golden brown and crispy.
  • Serve warm with extra Nutella drizzle, fresh strawberries, whipped cream, or powdered sugar.

Notes

  1. Slightly warming the Nutella makes it easier to mix into the batter.
  2. For extra crispiness, let the waffles rest on a wire rack instead of stacking them.
  3. These waffles freeze well and stay fresh for 3 months,  just reheat in a toaster or oven for a quick treat!
  4. The recipe yeild 10 square waffles.

Nutrition

Serving: 2 wafflesCalories: 439kcalCarbohydrates: 43.3gProtein: 7.9gFat: 25.6gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 69mgSodium: 2045mgPotassium: 104mgFiber: 1.9gSugar: 36.5gIron: 2mg
Keyword breakfast, nutella, waffles
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Chicken Salad Melt Sandwich

by 9 Comments

Imagine biting into a warm, crispy sandwich with creamy chicken salad and gooey melted cheese in every bite. This Chicken Salad Melt Sandwich is the ultimate comfort food, perfect for a cozy weekend brunch or a delicious addition to your next picnic spread!

Close-up of a crispy chicken salad melt sandwich with golden toasted bread, melted cheese, and creamy chicken salad filling, served one above the above !

If you're craving a perfectly grilled sandwich or a classic chicken salad, this chicken salad melt satisfies both in one bite. It's a comforting, satisfying meal with a crispy outside and a creamy, cheesy inside. With just 15 minutes and a few simple pantry ingredients, you can make this delicious sandwich in no time.

A few days ago, I made a delicious chicken noodle stir-fry for dinner, followed by chicken and shrimp fried rice last night. Today, I found myself with just one lonely chicken breast left in the fridge, and that’s when inspiration struck! These chicken salad melt sandwiches came together in no time, making the perfect quick and satisfying lunch.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
A perfectly grilled chicken salad melt sandwich a hand holding it , with cheese oozing from the sides and garnished with fresh parsley.

Why You’ll Love This Chicken Salad Melt Recipe

  • Quick & Easy – Ready in just 15 minutes with simple pantry ingredients.
  • Perfect for Any Meal – Great for lunch, brunch, or a quick weeknight dinner.
  • Crispy and Cheesy – Golden, buttery toasted bread with gooey melted cheese in every bite.
  • Flavorful – The chicken salad is rich, creamy, and packed with texture from celery, bell peppers and onions.

What is a Chicken Salad Melt Sandwich?

A chicken salad melt is a warm, toasted sandwich made with creamy chicken salad and melted cheese. It’s similar to a tuna melt but uses shredded chicken mixed with mayonnaise, mustard, celery, onions, red bell pepper and seasonings. The mixture is spread onto bread, topped with cheese, and then grilled or toasted until the bread is golden brown and the cheese is melted.

Warm and crispy chicken salad melt with gooey cheese, placed on a wooden board with a side of coleslaw and Chips.

What to Serve with a Chicken Salad Melt

  • Potato Chips – I love serving these sandwiches with a side of crispy potato chips for the perfect crunchy contrast to the creamy, melty filling.
  • French Fries or Sweet Potato Fries – Crispy, salty, and always a favorite! My sweet potato wedges and sweet potato cubes also pair beautifully with this recipe.
  • Pickles – My husband enjoys these sandwiches with a side of tangy pickles, which add a refreshing bite that cuts through the richness.
  • Coleslaw – Whether creamy or vinegar-based, coleslaw adds the perfect crunch and freshness to balance the sandwich.
  • Roasted Vegetables – Roasted veggies make a delicious and wholesome side. I love serving this with roasted carrots and cauliflower or roasted asparagus and carrots for a flavorful pairing.

Ingredients & Substitutions

This chicken melt sandwich is the perfect blend of creamy, cheesy, and crispy textures, making it a go-to comfort meal. Whether you're craving a quick lunch or a satisfying dinner, this chicken melt recipe comes together in just 20 minuteswith simple ingredients. Below, you'll find everything you need to make this flavorful sandwich, that turns out perfectly golden and melty every time!

Ingredients laid out for making chicken salad melt sandwich.
  • Chicken Breast – Cooked and shredded chicken works best, but you can also use rotisserie chicken or any leftover chicken for your convenience.
  • Mayonnaise – Adds creaminess; swap with Greek yogurt  for a healthier option.
  • Dijon Mustard – Enhances the flavor with a little tang; substitute with yellow mustard or honey mustard if preferred.
  • Celery – Adds crunch to the salad.
  • Bell pepper - The red bell pepper brings the mild sweetness and flavor to the salad.
  • Red Onion – Brings a bit of sharpness; swap with green onions, shallots, or leave it out if you prefer a milder flavor.
  • Lemon Juice – Brightens the flavors.
  • Salt & Pepper – Season to taste.
  • Bread slices – I have used Sourdough bread in this recipe but a whole wheat, rye, or even a croissant works well. For a low-carb option, try a lettuce wrap.
  • Cheese – Pepper jack is a fantastic option. Cheddar, Swiss, provolone, or mozzarella also works beautifully. 
  • Butter – Helps create that crispy, golden crust when grilling. You can also substitute with olive oil, ghee, or vegan butter.

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make the BEST Chicken Salad Sandwich recipe

Creating a delicious melt sandwich is easy with this step-by-step guide! This chicken cheese sandwich is packed with creamy salad, spicy cheese, and crispy toasted bread, making it an irresistible meal. Follow these simple instructions to whip up the ultimate chicken melts, golden, cheesy, and full of flavor in every bite!

In a large bowl ingredients combined for chicken salad for the chicken salad melt sandwich.
  1. In a large bowl combine the ingredients; shredded chicken, onions, celery, mayonnaise, Dijon mustard, bell pepper, salt and pepper.
Chicken salad mixture mixed well in a bowl.
  1. Mix well until well combined to make the creamy chicken salad.
One side of the bread sliced being filled with chicken salad mixxture.
  1. Fill the prepared chicken salad mixture in one side of the sour dough bread slice.
The chese slice being arranged on top of the mixture while making chicken salad melt sandwich recipe.
  1. Top the chicken salad mixture with pepper jack cheese slices.
Butter being spread on top of the bread slice placed on a pan.
  1. Spread the butter on top of the bread slice.
A perfectly grilled chicken salad melt sandwich on a frying pan.
  1. Toast for 2-3 minutes per side, pressing lightly, until golden brown.

Once the sandwich is golden brown and the cheese has melted beautifully, remove it from the heat and let it rest for a minute. This helps the flavors settle and makes slicing easier. Using a sharp knife, carefully cut the chicken salad melt in half—either diagonally for a classic café-style look or straight down the middle for a hearty bite. Serve it warm while the cheese is still gooey, pairing it with a side of crispy chips, a fresh green salad, or a bowl of warm tomato soup for the ultimate comfort meal!

Variations

  • Add sriracha, hot sauce, or red pepper flakes to the chicken salad for an extra kick.
  • For a BBQ Chicken Melt, mix the chicken salad with BBQ sauce instead of mayo. As a BBQ chicken fan, my husband sometimes go with this method!
  • Stir in some homemade basil pesto and use mozzarella or provolone for an Italian-inspired melt.
  • Toss the chicken in buffalo sauce and mix with ranch or blue cheese dressing for a classic buffalo-flavored melt.
Close-up of a crispy chicken salad melt sandwich with golden toasted bread, melted cheese, and creamy chicken salad filling.

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowl – For combining the chicken salad ingredients.
  • Grill Pan or Skillet – To cook the sandwich until golden brown and crispy.
  • Measuring Cups & Spoons – For accurate ingredient portions.

Storage

Storing the Chicken Salad:

Store the chicken salad mixture in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. If making ahead, store the chicken salad separately and assemble the sandwich just before cooking.

Storing Assembled Sandwiches:

  • Refrigeration: If you have a non grilled sandwich assembled, wrap it tightly in plastic wrap or foil and refrigerate for up to 1 day.
  • Freezing: It’s best to freeze only the chicken salad mixture, not the assembled sandwich, as the bread can become soggy.

Reheating Leftovers:

  • Skillet: Reheat the sandwich over medium-low heat until crispy and warmed through.
  • Air Fryer: Heat at 350°F (175°C) for 3-5 minutes for a crispy texture.
  • Oven: Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 5-7 minutes until heated through.
A perfectly grilled chicken salad melt sandwich on a rustic tray, with cheese oozing from the sides and garnished with fresh parsley.

Top Tips for Making the Perfect Chicken Salad Melt

  1. Use the Right Bread – Choose sturdy bread like sourdough, which I used in this recipe. Whole wheat or rye also work well since they can hold up to the creamy filling without getting soggy. If using softer bread, lightly toast it before assembling to prevent it from becoming too soft.
  2. Shred the Chicken Well – Finely shredded or diced chicken blends better with the mayo and seasonings, giving a smoother, more even texture. I used two forks to shred the chicken easily.
  3. Best Cheese– Cheddar, Swiss, provolone, or mozzarella melt beautifully. If you prefer a sharper taste, try smoked gouda or pepper jack like I did here.
  4. Golden Crust – Spread softened butter on the outside of the bread before grilling for an extra crispy, golden-brown crust.
  5. Press Lightly While Cooking – Use a spatula to gently press the sandwich while grilling. This helps the cheese melt evenly and gives that perfect crunch.
  6. Cook Over Medium-Low Heat – Cooking too fast can burn the bread before the cheese melts. Medium-low heat allows the sandwich to crisp up while the cheese becomes gooey.
  7. Let It Rest Before Slicing – Let the sandwich sit for a minute after removing it from the heat. This helps the cheese set slightly, making slicing cleaner.
  8. Make Ahead Tip – The chicken salad mixture can be prepped up to 3 days in advance and stored in the fridge, making it an easy meal option and I always do that!
Golden-brown chicken salad melt sandwich, cut horizontally , with melted cheese and creamy chicken salad peeking out, served on a plate.

FAQ

Can I make the chicken salad ahead of time?

Yes Of Course! The chicken salad mixture can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Assemble and grill the sandwich fresh for the best texture. 

Can I use canned chicken for this recipe?

Absolutely! Just drain and shred it well before mixing. Freshly cooked or rotisserie chicken will have better texture and flavor, but canned chicken works too.

Can I make this cheesy sandwich recipe in an air fryer?

Yes you can! Assemble the sandwich and air fry at 350°F (175°C) for 5-6 minutes, flipping halfway, until crispy and melted.

​​What’s the best bread for a chicken salad melt?

Sourdough, whole wheat, rye, or ciabatta work well since they hold up to the creamy filling. If using soft bread, toast it first.

Can I freeze a chicken salad melt?

It’s best to freeze only the chicken salad mixture (without mayo) for up to 2 months. The sandwich itself doesn’t freeze well, as the bread can become soggy.

How can I make this sandwich healthier?

Swap Greek yogurt for mayo in the chicken salad, choose a low-carb bread option, and add sliced avocado for a boost of healthy fats!

A chicken salad melt sandwich sliced in half, revealing its creamy filling, melted cheese, and toasted bread, served with coleslaw and chips.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Chicken Melts recipe:

If you tried this Chicken Salad Melt Sandwich or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Close-up of a crispy chicken salad melt sandwich with golden toasted bread, melted cheese, and creamy chicken salad filling stacked one above the other.

Chicken Salad Melt Sandwich

Abi Guna
This chicken salad melt sandwich is the perfect blend of crispy, golden-brown bread, creamy chicken salad, and gooey melted cheese. Packed with flavor and texture, it’s a quick and satisfying meal that’s great for lunch, brunch, or an easy weeknight dinner.
5 from 5 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Total Time 12 minutes
Course Dinner, lunch
Cuisine American
Servings 2 people
Calories 593 kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowls
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Skillet or Grill pan

Ingredients
  

  • 1 cup cooked and shredded chicken
  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoons red bell pepper chopped
  • 2 tablespoon celery chopped
  • 2 tablespoon red onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon pepper
  • 4 slices sourdough bread sourdough, whole wheat, or your choice
  • 4 slices pepper jack cheese
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter at room temperature

Instructions
 

  • In a bowl, mix shredded chicken, mayonnaise, Dijon mustard, bell pepper, celery, red onion, lemon juice, salt, and pepper until well combined.
  • Spread the chicken salad evenly onto one slice of bread.
  • Place cheese slices on top of the chicken salad, then cover with the second slice of bread.
  • Spread butter over the top of the bread.
  • Heat a skillet over medium-low heat.
  • Place the sandwich in the skillet and grill for 2-3 minutes per side, pressing lightly, until golden brown and the cheese is melted.
  • Remove from heat, slice the chicken salad melt sandwich in half, and serve warm!

Notes

  1. Freshly shredded chicken or rotisserie chicken gives the best texture and flavor to the sandwich. If you are using canned chicken, drain well before mixing.
  2. If you like a lighter version, swap mayonnaise for Greek yogurt or mashed avocado.
  3. Pressing the sandwich gently with a spatula helps the cheese melt evenly and gives that perfect crispy crust.
  4. Store the chicken salad mixture in the refrigerator for up to 3 days, making it easy to prep ahead.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 chicken sandwichCalories: 593kcalCarbohydrates: 38.6gProtein: 29gFat: 34.7gSaturated Fat: 16.2gCholesterol: 104mgSodium: 10525mgPotassium: 201mgFiber: 2.2gSugar: 6.9gCalcium: 285mg
Keyword Chicken, lunch, Salads, sandwich
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes

by 7 Comments

If you love sweet potatoes, you’re going to obsess over these Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes! Crispy on the outside, soft and tender on the inside, they make the perfect healthy side dish or quick snack. The best part is you only need 20 minutes and simple ingredients to make this dish! Whether you're meal prepping, looking for an easy side for dinner, this vegan, gluten-free sweet potato recipe is a total game-changer!

Crispy air-fried sweet potato cubes served in a bowl, garnished with fresh herbs.

These Air Fryer Sweet Potatoes Cubes are crispy, flavorful, and ridiculously easy to make! Tossed with olive oil, cumin, paprika, oregano, and a touch of salt, these seasoned sweet potato bites come out perfectly golden brown every time. The air fryer gives them a crispy texture without deep frying, making them a healthier alternative to traditional roasted potatoes. You won’t have to worry about excess oil or soggy fries. Trust me, once you try them, they’ll be on repeat in your kitchen!

This recipe was inspired by my Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges a favorite in my kitchen!

 If you love easy air fryer recipes, be sure to check out my Air Fryer Meatballs, Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs,and Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs for more quick and delicious meals! 

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Close-up of seasoned sweet potato cubes in a white bowl, ready to serve.

Why You’ll Love This Air Fryer Sweet Potatoes Cubes Recipe 

If you're a sweet potato lover, this recipe is about to become your new favorite! Here’s why:

  • Quick & Easy: This recipe is a breeze to make. All you need is just 20 minutes from prep to plate! Toss the cubes in a little olive oil and seasoning, air fry, and you’re done. It’s perfect for a quick snack, weeknight dinner, or meal prep.
  • Packed with Flavor: With a simple mix of cumin, paprika, oregano, and garlic powder, these sweet potatoes are bursting with flavor. 
  • Healthy & Nutritious: Sweet potatoes are rich in fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants. Making this a guilt-free, nutritious side dish or snack. Plus, they’re naturally gluten-free and vegan! Isn't it amazing!
  • Versatile: These crispy cubes go with anything, serve them alongside grilled chicken, toss them into salads, or dip them in your favorite sauce. They’re perfect for meal prep or a quick snack that keeps you full longer.
  • ​​Customizable: You can make them your own by adding extra seasonings, a sprinkle of parmesan, or even a drizzle of honey for a sweet twist. I love to play around with flavors!

If you’re looking for a quick and easy way to make crispy, flavorful sweet potatoes, this sweet potato air fryer recipe is a must-try! Whether you cut them into diced pieces, chunks, or wedges, the air fryer delivers that perfect crispy outside and tender inside every time.

A bowl of crispy air-fried sweet potato cubes in the side and a fork with a piece of sweet potato cubes and dipping sauce.

What to Serve with Cubed Sweet Potatoes in Air Fryer 

These crispy, flavorful sweet potato cubes in air fryer pair perfectly with a variety of meals and dips! Whether you’re serving them as a side dish, snack, or meal prep staple, here are some delicious pairing ideas:

  • A simple and healthy combo with juicy grilled or baked chicken pairs perfectly with crispy sweet potatoes.
  • The rich, buttery taste of salmon enhances the natural sweetness of the potatoes—try serving it with pesto butter salmon for a delicious combination!
  • For dipping, pair with a creamy, garlicky aioli or add a kick with spicy mayo for extra flavor.
  • For a hearty meal, served with brown rice or quinoa, you can even add it to a salmon quinoa salad for a nutritious twist!
  • Build a nourishing bowl with grilled chicken or tofu, quinoa, avocado, and a creamy dressing, topped with air-fried sweet potato cubes for a balanced and satisfying dish.

Ingredients and Substitutions

Each ingredient in this recipe is simple, flavorful, and easy to customize, making these Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes must-try!

Overhead view of air-fried sweet potato cubes recipe ingredients laid out on a warm neutral backdrop.
  • Sweet Potatoes – The main ingredient of the recipe! Sweet potatoes are naturally sweet, packed with fiber, and get deliciously crispy in the air fryer. You can swap them for regular potatoes for a similar texture. I peeled the skin and cut them into cubes, but if you prefer, you can leave the skin on, they’ll still be just as delicious!
  • Olive Oil – A little olive oil helps the sweet potatoes crisp up while adding a subtle richness. Feel free to use avocado oil  or coconut oil as an alternative option!
  • Ground Cumin – Adds a warm, earthy depth of flavor that pairs beautifully with sweet potatoes. 
  • Paprika – Brings a mild smokiness and enhances the golden color of the sweet potatoes. Substitution: You can also use red chili powder instead!
  • Oregano – A touch of oregano gives a herby note to the dish. You can use thyme or rosemary for a different aromatic twist.
  • Garlic Powder – Adds a rich, savory depth without overpowering the dish. 
  • Salt – Brings out overall flavors of the dish.

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make best Crispy Air fryer sweet potato cubes

If you love crispy, flavorful, and easy-to-make side dishes, these Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes are a must-try! Whether you're meal prepping, looking for a quick snack, or need a healthy side for dinner, this air fryer method is the fastest and easiest way to get perfectly roasted sweet potatoes without turning on the oven! Let’s get started with step-by step instructions.

A bowl of cubed sweet potatoes ready to be seasoned.
  1. Peel the skin and cut the sweet potatoes into uniform cubes. I recommend cutting the sweet potatoes into ½-inch thickness.
Toss the cubed sweet potatoes in olive oil and seasonings.
  1. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle in the cumin, paprika, oregano, garlic powder, and salt. Toss everything together.
Well seasoned sweet potatoes cubes are in the slicon lined air fryer basket ready to air fry.
  1. Spread the seasoned sweet potato cubes in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Air fry for 15-18 minutes.
Air fryer sweet potato cubes with a sprinkle of fresh parsley in the air fryer basket.
  1. Once done garnish the sweet potato cubes air fryer with parsley.

One of the best parts about this recipe is how versatile it is. You can switch up the seasoning for sweet potatoes to match your mood, go savory with garlic, paprika, and oregano, or try a sweet twist with cinnamon and maple syrup. I always love playing with the flavors! These roasted sweet potatoes in the air fryer are the perfect healthy side dish, snack, or meal prep addition. No matter how you serve them, these air-fried sweet potato chunks will quickly become a staple in your kitchen!

Hint: Add a pinch of chili flakes for a spicy kick or serve with garlic yogurt dip for extra deliciousness!

Variations

You can switch things up and play around with various flavors while making this crispy sweet potatoes!

  • Add smoked paprika, cayenne pepper, and garlic powder for a bold, smoky-spicy flavor.
  • Before serving the dish, drizzle some spicy honey or sriracha for extra heat!
  • Swap the savory seasonings for cinnamon, nutmeg, and a touch of brown sugar for a caramelized, slightly sweet twist. Perfect to enjoy on cozy evenings!
  • Toss with grated Parmesan, Italian seasoning, and a pinch of garlic powder for a cheesy, herby kick. My favorite version!
Overhead view of air-fried sweet potato cubes cooked in the air fryer.

Equipment

Air Fryer – A basket-style air fryer works best for even cooking, but a tray-style air fryer also does the job. The air fyer I used in the recipe in 6 quart size.

Silicone Air Fryer Liners (Optional) – I love using them for easy cleanup and to prevent sticking!

Mixing Bowl – Helps toss the sweet potatoes with seasonings and oil for even coating.

Measuring Spoons & Cups – For accurate measurement of spices, oil, and seasonings.

Storage

Refrigeration: Store the cooked sweet potato cubes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. The best option is meal prep!
Freezing: Freeze in a single layer on a baking sheet for 1-2 hours before transferring to a zip-top freezer bag. They last up to 3 months in the freezer.

Reheating for Best Crispiness

Air Fryer: Reheat at 350°F (175°C) for 3-5 minutes until crispy.
Oven: Bake at 400°F (200°C) for 8-10 minutes, flipping halfway.

Golden, crispy sweet potato cubes with a sprinkle of fresh parsley on a white serving bowl.

Top Tips for Perfect Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes

  1. The key to perfect sweet potatoes is cutting them into uniform ½-inch cubes. This ensures they cook evenly and crisp up without burning or staying undercooked.
  2. Always preheat your air fryer to 380°F (190°C) for 3-5 minutes before adding the potatoes. This helps them start crisping up immediately instead of steaming.
  3. For the best crispiness, spread the cubes in a single layer. If they’re piled on top of each other, they’ll steam instead of getting crispy. Work in batches if needed!
  4. Shake the basket at the halfway mark (about 8-9 minutes in) so the cubes cook evenly on all sides. This step is crucial for that crispy-on-the-outside, tender-on-the-inside texture.
  5. Air fryer times vary, so check at 15 minutes and add 2-3 extra minutes if you like them crispier.
  6. Air-fried sweet potatoes are best enjoyed fresh, as they may soften over time. If making ahead, reheat in the air fryer at 350°F (175°C) for 3-5 minutes to bring back the crispiness.

FAQ

How long does it take to cook sweet potato cubes in air fryer?

It typically takes 15-18 minutes at 380°F (190°C). But Air fryer time varies depending on the brand, so check at 15 minutes and add 2-3 extra minutes if you like them crispier.

Do I need to peel the sweet potatoes before air frying?

Not at all! Peeling is optional! Leaving the skin on adds extra fiber and nutrients while also giving a slightly crispier texture. Just make sure to wash and scrub them well.

Why aren’t my sweet potato cubes crispy?

There are few reasons for this, if you follow the below tips then you can avoid getting your sweet potatoes soggy!
- Don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket, cook in batches
- Always preheat for 3-5 minutes for even cooking.
- Shake the basket halfway through.

Can I make this sweet potato cubes recipe without oil?

Yes! You can air-fry sweet potato cubes without oil, but they won’t be as crispy. A light spritz of cooking spray can help achieve a golden exterior.

Can I store and reheat air-fried sweet potatoes?

Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. To reheat and crisp them back up, air fry at 350°F (175°C) for 3-5 minutes.

Can I use frozen sweet potatoes?

Yes, but frozen cubes may need a slightly longer cook time (18-20 minutes). No need to thaw, just air fry straight from frozen it comes handy!

Can I make these sweet potato cubes in the oven instead?

Yes you can! Spread the seasoned sweet potatoes in a baking tray and bake at 425°F (220°C) for 25-30 minutes, flipping halfway through for even crispiness. I love this method when I am doing in large quantity!

Air-fried sweet potato cubes on a white bowl with a side of dipping sauce.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this air fried sweet potato cubes recipe:

If you tried this Air fryer Sweet Potato Cubes or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Perfectly crispy sweet potato cubes sprinkled with parsley and sea salt in a white bowl along with dipping sauce, lemon wedges in the sides.

Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes

Abi Guna
Crispy and flavorful Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes made with simple ingredients! Ready in just 20 minutes, this easy recipe is perfect as a healthy side dish or snack. Learn how to get perfectly golden, seasoned sweet potato cubes every time! 
5 from 3 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Course Side Dish, Snack
Cuisine American
Servings 4 people
Calories 152 kcal

Equipment

  • Air Fryer
  • Mixing Bowls
  • Measuring cups and spoons

Ingredients
  

  • 3 medium sweet potatoes skin peeled and cut into ½-inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon oregano
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • Chopped parsley to garnish
  • Lemon wedges to serve

Instructions
 

  • Before you start, preheat your air fryer to 380°F (190°C) for 3-5 minutes. Line the airfryer basket with a liner if you are using it. Set it aside.
  • In a large mixing bowl, add the sweet potato cubes. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle in the cumin, paprika, oregano, garlic powder, and salt. Toss everything together until all the pieces are evenly coated with the seasoning.
  • Spread the seasoned sweet potato cubes in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Avoid overcrowding, so cook in batches to make sure they crisp up properly rather than steaming.
  • Set the air fryer to 380°F (190°C) and cook for 15-18 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through to ensure even cooking. The sweet potatoes should turn golden brown and crispy on the outside while staying soft and tender inside.
  • Once done, transfer the sweet potato cubes to a serving dish. Serve warm and garnish with fresh parsley for color or a squeeze of lemon juice for a fresh, zesty kick. Pair them with your favorite dipping sauce or enjoy them as a side with any meal!

Notes

  1. The most important point to remember is don’t overcrowd the basket. If the sweet potato cubes are too close together, they’ll steam instead of crisping. So I recommend cooking in batches if necessary for the best results.
  2. Tossing the air fryer basket at the 8-9 minute mark helps for even cooking and prevents burning.
  3. Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. Reheat in the air fryer at 350°F (175°C) for 3-5 minutes to bring back crispiness.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 servingCalories: 152kcalCarbohydrates: 21.6gProtein: 1.3gFat: 7.2gSaturated Fat: 1.2gSodium: 4852mgPotassium: 632mgFiber: 3.2gSugar: 0.5gCalcium: 20mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Air fryer recipes, Appetizers, Healthy, side dish, snacks, Sweet Potato
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Nutella Mousse

by 9 Comments

If you’re a chocolate lover, this rich, creamy, and utterly decadent Nutella Mousse is about to become your new favorite treat! Made with just a few simple ingredients, it’s the perfect dessert for any occasion. This recipe was inspired by the rave reviews of my Nutella-covered strawberries, a fan favorite that always steals the show! 

A glass cup filled with silky Nutella mousse, topped with whipped cream, chocolate shavings, and chopped hazelnuts.

After seeing how much everyone loved my Nutella covered strawberries, I knew I had to create something even more indulgent like my Nutella Waffles. And trust me, this silky-smooth chocolate hazelnut mousse does not disappoint! Don’t forget to check the recipe VIDEO added in the recipe card!

The best part? You only need FOUR ingredients to whip up this deliciously creamy dessert—no oven required!Whether you’re hosting a dinner party or just craving something sweet, this quick and easy treat is perfect for any occasion. And here’s the real magic, it takes just 10 minutes to prepare! Yes, you read that right! A rich, chocolatey, mini dessert that’s effortless yet so impressive. So grab your whisk and get ready to dive into a spoonful of Nutella bliss!

Craving more rich and chocolatey treats?  Don't stop at Nutella Chocolate Mousse—treat yourself to some of my other irresistible chocolate desserts! Check out the Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes, Mint Chocolate Brownies, Chocolate Almond Fudge, and Rocky Road recipes right here on the blog. Trust me, you won’t want to miss these heavenly desserts!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
A dessert plate featuring Nutella mousse beautiful garnished with whipped cream and nuts. In the behind featuring Nutella jar on a pink background.

Why You’ll Love This Nutella Mousse Recipe

  • Easy to make – As I mentioned earlier, this nutella chocolate mousse recipe needs jJust four ingredients and 10 minutes of prep—no baking, no fuss!
  • Rich & Creamy – A silky-smooth mousse with the perfect balance of chocolate and Nutella flavors. I love how light and airy the texture is!
  • No Oven Needed – This no-bake dessert is perfect for when you want something sweet without turning on the oven. Isn't it amazing?
  • Perfect for Any Occasion – Whether you’re hosting a dinner party or celebrating a special occasion like Mother’s Day, a birthday, an anniversary, Valentine’s Day, Easter, or any holiday treat, or simply indulging yourself, this mousse is always a hit!
  • Individual Servings – These adorable mousse cups may be small, but they deliver big, indulgent flavor in every bite! I love how easy it is to serve them in cute little cups for the perfect individual portions. Who doesn’t love mini desserts?
A beautifully styled Nutella mousse dessert topped with whipped cream, chocolate shavings, and chopped hazelnuts.

The Secret Behind the Perfect Chocolate Mousse With Nutella

I’ve personally tested countless Nutella mousse recipes—including the popular two-ingredient nutella mousse version, but let’s be honest, they just don’t hold up! While they might be easy to make, they deflate too quickly and lack that light, airy, and silky-smooth texture we all crave in a perfect mousse.

So, what’s the secret ingredient that makes this Nutella Mousse flawless every time? Melted chocolate! 

Adding melted dark chocolate not only helps the mousse set properly, but it also creates that luxurious, rich, and creamy consistency that stays stable, even at room temperature! Unlike the basic two-ingredient mousse, which loses its texture after sitting out, this recipe holds its shape beautifully for hours while staying light and airy.

So if you’ve been searching for that perfect Nutella Mousse, look no further! This recipe checks all the boxes—silky, smooth, rich, decadent, and stable enough to impress at any occasion. Give it a try, and I promise you’ll never go back to the basic version again! 

Rich and airy Nutella mousse served in a clear glass bowl, with a spoonful taken out, showing its smooth texture.

What to Serve with this Easy Nutella Mousse

Nutella Mousse is delicious on its own, with a rich Nutella cream base and an airy whipped cream mousse, every bite is silky-smooth and irresistibly indulgent. But pairing it with the right treats can take it to the next level! Here are some perfect accompaniments!

  • Toppings: For even more chocolatey goodness, add shaved chocolate. For extra crunch, sprinkle chopped hazelnuts, almonds, or macadamia nuts, just like I did in this recipe. You can make it even richer with a chocolate or caramel drizzle and if you’re feeling extra indulgent, a scoop of ice cream works too! 
  • Fresh fruits: Strawberries, raspberries, or blueberries add a refreshing contrast to the mousse. Banana slices will be a classic pairing! 
  • Cookies: The crisp texture of biscotti perfectly balances the smooth mousse. Sometimes, a chewy cookie like an oatmeal butterscotch chocolate cookie can also be a wonderful pairing!
  • Beverage Pairings: A bold espresso or coffee provides the perfect contrast to the sweet mousse. You can also pair it with a Salted Caramel Latte or a Vanilla Bean Latte for a deliciously cozy combination!

Ingredients & Substitutions

If you're looking for things to make with Nutella, this four ingredients chocolate mousse is an wonderful option! Whether you're making a decadent treat for a special occasion or just craving quick desserts with Nutella, this recipe is a must-try. 

Ingredients needed for nutella chocolate mousse being laid out on a pink background.
  • Heavy Cream – The base of the mousse, giving it a light and airy texture. Make sure it’s cold for the best whip! You can substitute coconut cream for a dairy-free option.
  • Powdered Sugar – Adds just the right amount of sweetness while keeping the mousse smooth. If you prefer less sweetness, you can reduce the amount or use a sugar-free alternative like powdered erythritol.
  • Nutella – The star ingredient that brings in rich chocolate-hazelnut flavor! You can swap it for any chocolate-hazelnut spread or even melted chocolate mixed with hazelnut butter for a homemade touch.
  • Dark Chocolate – The secret to a perfectly stable mousse! It helps set the mousse while adding extra depth of flavor. You can use semi-sweet chocolate for a slightly milder taste, but since I'm a big dark chocolate fan, I went with dark chocolate!
  • Hazelnuts (optional) – Adds a delicious crunchy contrast to the creamy mousse. Feel free to swap with macadamia nuts, almonds, or even crushed cookies for a different texture!

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make the Best Nutella Mousse

If you love whipped cream desserts, then this Nutella Mousse is a must-try! It's one of the best Nutella dessert recipes—rich, creamy, and packed with chocolate-hazelnut goodness. The best part? It’s one of the easiest Nutella recipes you’ll ever make! Check the step-by step instructions below or the recipe VIDEO added in the recipe card for easy understanding!

Melted dark chocolate in a bowl for nutella mousse recipe.
  1. Melt the chopped chocolate in a microwave safe bowl.
Nutella being added to the melted chocolate for making the best no bake chocolate mousse.
  1. Add the Nutella and mix with melted chocolate until everything comes together.
Beat the heavy cream until stiff peaks form for nutella mousse recipe.
  1. Beat the whipped cream and sugar until stiff peak is formed.
Nutella mixed to make no bake nutella mousse.
  1. Add the nutella and chocolate mixture to the whipped cream and fold it gently.
Nutella mousse piped into fancy serving cups.
  1. Pipe the nutella mousse beautifully into a serving glass.
Creamy Nutella mousse in an elegant dessert glass, garnished with a swirl of whipped cream.
  1. Garnish with whipped cream and top with chopped chocolate and hazelnuts.

Hint: If stacking multiple layers, pipe a border of frosting around the edges before adding the mousse filling to prevent it from spilling out.

Variations

No matter which variation you choose, this Nutella Mousse is always a hit! Here are some of my favourite variations!

  • Nutella Mocha Mousse – Add 1 teaspoon of instant espresso powder to the melted chocolate for a rich mocha twist. As a coffee lover I love this variation so much!
  • Nutella Peanut Butter Mousse – Fan of peanut butter? Then swap half of the Nutella with creamy peanut butter for a nutty, chocolatey combination.Dairy-Free Nutella Mousse – Replace the heavy cream with coconut cream for a creamy, dairy-free version with a hint of coconut flavor. It still tastes amazing!
Elegant Nutella mousse in a clear glass topped with whipped cream, chocolate shavings, and chopped hazelnuts.

Equipment

Mixing Bowls – You'll need at least two bowls. One for whipping the cream and another for melting the chocolate.

Hand Mixer or Stand Mixer – A hand mixer makes whipping the cream effortless, but a stand mixer works just as well for quick and even mixing.

Spatula – Perfect for gently folding the Nutella and melted chocolate into the whipped cream without deflating it.

Piping Bag (Optional) – Helps create a beautiful, mess-free presentation when transferring the mousse into serving glasses. A ziplock bag with the tip cut off works too!

Serving Glasses or Bowls – Choose mini dessert cups (4 ounce) or ramekins for a stylish presentation. I have linked mine already, I love them so much!

How to Store Mousse

Refrigeration: Store Nutella mousse in airtight containers or covered dessert cups in the fridge for up to 3 days. This keeps it fresh while maintaining its creamy texture.

Freezing: You can freeze Nutella chocolate mousse for up to 2 months. Store it in an airtight container and thaw in the fridge overnight before serving. For a frozen treat, enjoy it straight from the freezer like a chocolatey semifreddo!

Room Temperature: Unlike traditional two-ingredient mousse, this recipe holds its structure well at room temperature for a few hours, making it perfect for parties. However, it's best served chilled for the smoothest texture.

Close-up of Nutella mousse, highlighting its velvety, chocolate-hazelnut goodness.

Top Tips for Making the Perfect Nutella Mousse

  • Use chilled heavy cream, cold cream whips up faster and holds its structure better, giving you a light and fluffy mousse.
  • If using a microwave, heat in 15-second intervals, stirring in between to prevent burning. A double boiler works great too! But I used a microwave for my convenience.
  • When combining the whipped cream with Nutella and melted chocolate, gently fold the mixture to keep it light and airy. Stirring too hard can deflate the mousse.
  • Nutella is already sweet, so taste the mixture before adding powdered sugar. You might need less than you think!
  • Refrigerate the mousse for at least 1 hour before serving. This helps it set and enhances the flavors.

FAQ

Can I make this Nutella Mousse ahead of time?

Yes absolutely! You can prepare it up to 2 days in advance. Just store it covered in the fridge and add toppings right before serving for the best texture and flavor.

Can I freeze Nutella Mousse?

Yes absolutely, but the texture may change slightly. For a frozen dessert, freeze the mousse in individual cups, then let it sit at room temperature for 10–15 minutes before serving for a creamier consistency.

Why is my nutella mousse not fluffy?

This usually happens if the whipped cream is overmixed when folding in the Nutella and chocolate mixture. Use a spatula to fold it and make sure to gently fold to keep it light and airy!

How long should I chill the mousse before serving?

At least 1 hour in the fridge for the best texture, but if you have more time, 2-3 hours will make it even firmer and more decadent.

Can I use milk chocolate instead of dark chocolate?

Yes of course! Milk chocolate will make the mousse sweeter and creamier, while dark chocolate adds a deeper, more intense chocolate flavor. Choose based on your preference. 

Two clear glasses of no bake nutella chocolate mousse topped with whipped cream, chocolate shavings, and chopped hazelnuts on a pink background.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this no bake nutella mousse cups recipe:

If you tried this No-bake Nutella Mousse or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Nutella mousse piped into fancy serving cups, garnished with whipped cream and chocolate curls for a luxurious look.

Nutella Mousse (No Bake Recipe + VIDEO)

Abi Guna
A foolproof, no-bake Nutella Mousse recipe made with just four ingredients! This silky-smooth, rich, and decadent dessert is perfect for any occasion. These cute mini desserts are an absolute must-try!
5 from 5 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes
Chilling Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 6 servings
Calories 303 kcal

Equipment

  • Serving glass
  • Mixing Bowls
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Hand Mixer
  • Spatula

Ingredients
  

  • 2 ounces dark chocolate bar chopped
  • 1 ½ cups heavy cream chilled
  • ¼ cup powdered sugar
  • ½ cup Nutella
  • Chopped hazelnuts for garnish

Instructions
 

  • Place the chopped dark chocolate in a heatproof bowl and melt it using a double boiler or in the microwave in 15-second intervals, stirring until smooth.
  • Once melted, add the Nutella and mix until well combined. Set aside.
  • In a large mixing bowl, beat the heavy cream using a hand mixer or stand mixer on medium-high speed for 3–4 minutes until slightly thickened.
  • Add the powdered sugar and continue beating until soft peaks form. Set aside 2 tablespoons of the whipped cream for garnish.
  • To the remaining whipped cream, add the Nutella and melted chocolate mixture.
  • Gently fold the ingredients together until fully combined and smooth, be careful not to deflate the mixture.
  • Transfer the mousse to a piping bag, cut the tip, and pipe it into serving glasses or bowls. Refrigerate for at least 1 hour to set.
  • Before serving, top each mousse cup with a spoonful of whipped cream. Sprinkle with chopped hazelnuts for crunch and chopped chocolate for extra flavor.
  • Please take a moment to leave a comment & rating. It's appreciated and so helpful!

Video

Notes

  1. The recipe yields 6 servings, with each serving approximately 4 ounces.
  2. When folding in the Nutella and melted chocolate, use a gentle folding motion to keep the mousse light and airy.
  3. If using a microwave, melt in 15-second intervals, stirring in between. If using a double boiler, stir continuously to prevent burning.
  4. Unlike traditional two-ingredient mousse, this recipe holds its texture even at room temperature thanks to the addition of melted chocolate!
  5. For the make-ahead option,you can prepare this mousse up to 2 days in advance. Keep it covered in the fridge and add toppings just before serving.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 servingCalories: 303kcalCarbohydrates: 32.3gProtein: 3.2gFat: 20.6gSaturated Fat: 13.7gCholesterol: 34mgSodium: 13mgFiber: 0.5gSugar: 26.4gCalcium: 25mgIron: 1mg
Keyword chocolate, easy desserts, Holiday Desserts, no bake, nutella, Valentine's day dessert
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Vanilla Bean Latte

by 5 Comments

Say hello to my favorite homemade Vanilla Bean Latte! This cozy, creamy latte is infused with real vanilla bean, giving it a smooth, luxurious flavor in every sip. Made with bold espresso, steamed milk, and my homemade Vanilla bean coffee syrup, it’s a coffee shop favorite—only better and made right at home! 

Homemade vanilla bean latte in a glass mug. The vanilla beans are in the side and a homemade vanilla bean coffee syrup on the background.

Whether you enjoy it hot and frothy or iced and refreshing, this latte is the perfect treat to start your day or unwind in the afternoon. Skip the coffee shop and whip up this dreamy vanilla latte in minutes! I’ve always loved Starbucks’ Vanilla Bean Latte, but ever since I started making my own version at home, I’m never going back—homemade is just that good! 

If you're a latte lover, you should definitely try my Salted Caramel Latte recipe! It’s a reader favorite and absolutely delicious!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Tje best Starbucks vanilla bean latte in a glass mug. The vanilla beans are in the side and a homemade vanilla bean coffee syrup on the background.

Why You’ll Love This Vanilla Bean Latte Recipe 

If you’re a latte lover, this Vanilla Bean Latte is about to become your new favorite! Here’s why:

  • Better Than Coffee Shop Lattes – Made with real vanilla bean for an authentic, rich flavor that beats any store-bought version. Trust me this latte is too delicious!
  • Easy & Quick to Make – Skip the coffee run! This latte comes together in minutes with just a few simple ingredients. All you need is just 5 minutes!
  • Budget-Friendly - Save money by making this indulgent drink at home without sacrificing quality or flavor. If you add up what you spend on coffee in a year, trust me—you could probably treat yourself to a vacation with your family instead!
  • Minimal Equipment – No fancy equipment needed! Just brew, milk frother, mix, and enjoy a luxurious, café-style latte anytime.
The close shot of vanilla bean latte in a clear glass mug.

What to Serve with your Vanilla Bean Latte

A warm, creamy Vanilla Bean Latte pairs perfectly with a variety of sweet treats and light bites. But here are some of my favorite options to enjoy alongside with vanilla latte:

Ingredients and Substitutions

All you need is just three ingredients to make this latte! With these simple, customizable ingredients, you can create a barista-quality Vanilla Bean Latte at home, exactly the way you love it!

Ingredients laid out to make homemade best vanilla bean latte recipe on a marble countertop.
  • Strong brewed coffee – The bold, rich base of the latte that balances the sweetness of vanilla. If you don’t have an espresso machine, use strong brewed coffee, instant espresso, or even cold brew for a different twist. 
  • Milk  – The key to a smooth, creamy texture that blends beautifully with vanilla. Whole milk gives the richest flavor, while oat or almond milk offers a dairy-free alternative. Coconut milk adds a slight tropical touch! I have used whole milk in this recipe!
  • Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup – The main star ingredient of the recipe! Made with real vanilla bean, this syrup infuses deep, aromatic vanilla flavors into every sip. Don’t have vanilla beans? Use pure vanilla extract or vanilla bean paste for a similar effect.

See recipe card for quantities.

How To Make A Homemade Vanilla Latte

Below is the step-by-step instructions for easy understanding!

Milk frother being used to make vanilla bean latte recipe in a white creamer mug.
  1. Froth the warm milk using a milk frother.
Stron coffee being added to a glass mug to make best vanilla bean latte.
  1. Pour the freshly brewed strong coffee in a glass mug.
Homemade vanilla bean coffee syrup being added the vanilla bean latte recipe in a glass mug.
  1. Add the homemade vanilla bean syrup.
Frothed milk being added to a glass milk with espresso already on it.
  1. Pour the frothed milk into the latte.

Stir everything together to blend the rich espresso, warm frothed milk, and fragrant vanilla bean syrup into a perfectly balanced drink. Take a sip and enjoy the smooth, creamy, and velvety texture, with just the right touch of sweetness and warmth.

Hint: Make it iced! Pour everything over ice for a refreshing Vanilla Bean Iced Latte.

Variations

There are plenty of variations you can make using the base vanilla latte recipe, Here are some my favorite lists:

  • Iced Vanilla Bean Latte – Skip the steaming! Pour espresso, vanilla bean syrup, and cold milk over ice, then stir for a refreshing iced coffee treat.
  • Vanilla Caramel Latte – Add a drizzle of caramel sauce to the vanilla bean syrup for a rich, buttery sweetness!
  • Mocha Vanilla Bean Latte – Stir 1-2 teaspoons of cocoa powder into the espresso for a chocolate twist—like a cross between a latte and a mocha! I do this variation often!
  • Pumpkin Spice Vanilla Latte  – Add ½ teaspoon of pumpkin spice to the espresso for a fall-inspired drink with warm, cozy notes. Perfect during the fall season!
  • Vanilla Chai Latte – Replace espresso with strong brewed chai tea and mix in vanilla bean syrup for a creamy, spiced chai latte. They taste just amazing!
Best vanilla bean latte in a glass mug, vanilla bean on it. In background vanilla bean syrup in a glass jar.

Equipment

Coffee Maker or Espresso Machine - To brew strong coffee or espresso.

Milk Frother - To create creamy, frothed milk for your latte.

Microwave safe glass/mug - To warm the milk.

Measuring Spoons and Cups - For accurately measuring the coffee, syrup, and milk

Storage

A Vanilla Bean Latte is best enjoyed immediately, but if you need to store it, here’s how:

Refrigerate: If you have leftover latte, store it in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Shake or stir well before reheating.

Reheating: Warm it in the microwave for 30-45 seconds or on the stovetop over low heat while stirring.

Homemade vanilla bean latte in a glass mug, vanilla bean in the side.

Top Tips for making the Best Vanilla Bean Latte

  1. For the best flavor, use real vanilla bean, vanilla bean paste, or pure vanilla extract—skip artificial vanilla for a richer taste in your vanilla bean coffee syrup recipe.
  2. A strong, bold espresso balances the sweetness of vanilla. No espresso machine? Use strong brewed coffee or instant espresso instead.
  3. Use a milk frother, French press, or shake in a jar to create that creamy, foamy texture just like your favorite coffee shop.
  4. A dash of cinnamon, nutmeg, or even pumpkin spice can elevate the flavor and add warmth to your latte.
  5. Whole milk makes it extra creamy, but oat milk, almond milk, and coconut milk work great for a dairy-free version.
  6. Avoid storing a latte with frothed milk, as it will lose its texture. Instead, froth fresh milk when ready to serve
  7. Store the coffee and vanilla bean syrup mixture separately in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready, pour it over ice and add fresh cold milk for a quick iced vanilla latte!

FAQ

Can I make this vanilla latte without an espresso machine?

Yes absolutely! If you don’t have an espresso machine, you can use strong brewed coffee or instant espresso.

Can I use this same recipe and make latte iced?

Absolutely! For an Iced Vanilla Bean Latte, simply pour espresso and vanilla bean syrup over ice, then add cold milk and stir.

Whats the Best Coffee Beans for Lattes?

A great latte starts with high-quality coffee beans that complement the creamy, steamed milk. I love the Medium to Dark Roast Beans and I think it is the best choice for lattes.

How can I make my latte frothy without a frother?

No frother? No problem! Try:
- Shaking warm milk in a jar with the lid on until foamy.
- Using a French press—pump the plunger up and down to create foam.
- Whisking vigorously on the stovetop as the milk heats up. Best arm workout 😉

What’s the best milk to use for lattes?

Whole milk makes the creamiest latte, but for a dairy-free option, oat milk, almond milk, or coconut milk works great too!

Horizontal image homemade vanilla bean latte in a clear glass mug.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this homemade vanilla latte recipe:

If you tried this Homemade Vanilla Bean Latte or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Horizontal image homemade vanilla bean latte in a clear glass mug.

Vanilla Bean Latte

Abi Guna
This homemade Vanilla Bean Latte is rich, creamy, and infused with real vanilla bean flavor for a cozy, coffee shop-style drink at home. Made with bold espresso, steamed milk, and homemade vanilla bean coffee syrup, it’s perfect for both hot and iced versions. Ready in minutes, this smooth and velvety latte is an easy, budget-friendly, and customizable treat to enjoy any time of day!
5 from 3 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Course Drinks
Cuisine American
Servings 1
Calories 151 kcal

Equipment

  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Microwave safe mugs
  • Coffee Maker or Espresso Machine
  • Milk Frother

Ingredients
  

  • 1 shot espresso (½ cup strong brewed coffee)
  • ¾ cup steamed whole milk
  • 2 tablespoons vanilla bean coffee syrup, adjust to taste

Instructions
 

  • Start by brewing your favorite strong coffee or a shot of espresso. If using an espresso machine, pull one shot of espresso. If you don’t have an espresso machine, brew ½ cup of strong coffee using a French press, drip coffee maker, or instant espresso powder for a bold flavor.
  • In a small saucepan, warm ¾ cup of milk over medium heat until it’s hot but not boiling. If using a microwave, heat the milk for 30-45 seconds until warm. Once heated, use a milk frother to create a light and foamy texture.
  • In a mug, pour the brewed espresso or coffee. Stir in 2 tablespoons of vanilla bean coffee syrup, adjusting to taste for more or less sweetness.
  • Slowly pour the steamed and frothed milk over the coffee, holding back some foam with a spoon and then topping it at the end for a beautiful finish.
  • Stir, sip, and enjoy your homemade Vanilla Bean Latte—smooth, creamy, and delicious.
  • Please take a moment to leave a comment & rating. It's appreciated and so helpful!

Notes

  1. If you don't have espresso machine, use strong brewed coffee or instant espresso.
  2. Adjust sweetness by adding more or less vanilla bean syrup to taste.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 LatteCalories: 151kcalCarbohydrates: 18.2gProtein: 6.1gFat: 6.8gSaturated Fat: 3.7gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 201mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 8.2gCalcium: 226mgIron: 1mg
Keyword breakfast, coffee, drinks, latte
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Easter Rocky Road

by 7 Comments

When it comes to quick and easy Easter treats, my go-to is always Easter Rocky Road! This rich, crunchy, and chocolate-packed dessert is the perfect blend of sweet, crunchy, and chewy textures, making it absolutely irresistible. 

Rocky Road with easter themed fudge stacked one above the other beautifully loaded with mini marshmallows and mini eggs chocolate. With pink flowers behind.

It’s made with a mix of dark and milk chocolate, crunchy macadamia nuts, fluffy mini marshmallows, colorful Cadbury mini eggs, and crushed digestive biscuits—giving every bite the perfect balance of crunch and melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

Did you get a chance to check out other Easter treats loved by kids, like Easter Donuts?

Looking for more Easter recipes? Try my tasty side dishes Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower or Roasted Carrots and Asparagus —both make fantastic additions to your Easter dinner table!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Close up shot of homemade Easter Rocky Road beautifully decorated.

Why You’ll Love This Easter Rocky Road Recipe 

Whether you call it a Rocky Road Easter Egg or simply a Mini Egg Rocky Road Recipe, one thing’s for sure—it’s easy to make, no-bake, and totally irresistible!

  • No-Bake & Super Easy – All you need is to just melt, mix, and chill—this recipe comes together in minutes, making it perfect for busy Easter prep or last-minute treats. How easy it is!
  •  Rich, Crunchy & Chocolatey – A delicious mix of dark and milk chocolate, crunchy macadamia nuts, chewy mini marshmallows, and crispy digestive biscuits in every bite! Trust me even adults can’t resist from eating this delicious treat!
  • Festive & Fun – Colorful Cadbury Mini Eggs make this treat look as beautiful as it tastes—perfect for dessert platters, edible gifts, or Easter party snacks. It's an easy way to impress your guests and your kids!
  • Make-Ahead Friendly – Prepare in advance and store in the fridge—just slice and serve whenever you’re ready! No last minute tension!
  • Kid-Friendly & Customizable – A great recipe to use up leftover Easter or Halloween candies! Swap in your favorite nuts, cookies, or add white chocolate for a fun twist!
homemade Rocky Road with easter themed fudge beautifully loaded with mini marshmallows and mini eggs chocolate.

Delicious Ways to Serve and Enjoy Rocky Road

Pair your Easter Rocky Road with other delicious treats for a festive dessert spread or a well-balanced menu! Here are some of my favourite options:

  • Hot Chocolate or Coffee latte – A warm drink to enjoy alongside your rocky road for the ultimate cozy Easter treat. I always enjoy them with my Salted Caramel Latte or Vanilla Bean Latte.
  • Easter Baked Donuts – Light, fluffy, and decorated with pastel glaze, these donuts are a fun and colorful addition to your Easter treats.
  • Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes – The zesty, refreshing flavor of these mini lemon cakes balances out the richness of chocolate.
  • Roasted Carrot Hummus – A savory, creamy dip to contrast the sweetness—perfect for an appetizer before dessert!
  • Berry Chia Seed Pudding – A light, fruity option that adds a healthy, refreshing balance to your dessert table.

Ingredients & Substitutions

If you're looking for the ultimate Easter treat, this Mini Egg Rocky Road is a must-try! All you need is less than 10 ingredients to make this recipe! Packed with crunchy biscuits, gooey marshmallows, and colorful Cadbury Mini Eggs, this Easter Egg Rocky Road is the perfect balance of chocolatey, crunchy, and chewy goodness.

Easter Rocky Road Ingredients placed beautifully on a pink background.
  • Dark Chocolate Bar -  Adds a rich, slightly bitter depth to balance the sweetness. If you prefer a milder flavor, swap for semi-sweet chocolate or use all milk chocolate for a sweeter taste. 
  • Milk Chocolate Bar – Creates a smooth, creamy, and sweet chocolate base. If you love a deeper chocolate flavor, substitute with extra dark chocolate or even white chocolate for a fun twist!
  • Butter – Helps melt the chocolate smoothly and adds a silky texture to the rocky road. You can replace it with coconut oil for a dairy-free option.
  • Mini Marshmallows  – These soft, chewy bites create a pillowy texture in every bite! If you don’t have mini marshmallows, cut regular-sized marshmallows into small pieces or use vegan marshmallows for a plant-based version. I used the colorful ones for that spring vibes!
  • Roasted Macadamia Nuts – Adds a delicious crunch and buttery richness. Swap with almonds, walnuts, pecans, or hazelnuts if preferred, or leave them out for a nut-free version.
  • Digestive Biscuits – These crumbly, lightly sweet cookies add a nice crunch to balance the chocolate. Substitute with graham crackers, shortbread, or Biscoff biscuits for a different flavor.
  • Cadbury Mini Eggs – These colorful, candy-coated chocolates make the rocky road festive and extra fun! If you don’t have mini eggs, use M&Ms, chocolate chips, or chopped Easter chocolates.
  • Vanilla Extract  – Enhances all the flavors with a hint of warmth and sweetness. If you're out of vanilla, try using almond extract or just leave it out—your rocky road will still taste amazing!

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make Homemade Easter Rocky Road Recipe

Making Easter Rocky Road at home is as simple as melt, mix, and chill! No baking required—just a few easy steps, and you’ll have a rich, crunchy, and chocolatey treat perfect for Easter. Check out the step-by-step instructions below for easy guidance!

Chocolate combined in a bowl with butter to make rocky road recipe for easter.

In a microwave safe bowl, add the roughly chopped milk and dark chocolate along with the butter.

Melted chocolate in a white bowl.

Melt the chcocolate in a microwave until the chocolate is completely melted.

Mini eggs, mini marshmallows, nut, biscuits in a white bowl to make Easter rocky road recipe.

Add the mini eggs, mini marshamallows, nuts, digestive biscuits, in a large bowl and mix until just combined.

Melted chocolate added over the Easter chocolate addins in a white bowl for Easter Rocky road recipe.

Pour the melted chocolate over the add-ins. Mix until combined.

Prepared roaky road mixture is added to a square pan.

Transfer the rocky road mixture into the prepared pan.

The Rock Road was decored with cadbury mini eggs.

Decorate the top with Cadbury Mini Eggs.

For the best texture and easy slicing, chill your Easter Rocky Road for at least 2 hours in the fridge. This allows the chocolate to fully set, ensuring that each bite holds its delicious crunch and chewiness.

When it's time to slice, use this simple trick for perfectly smooth, clean cuts—run a sharp knife under hot water for a few seconds, wipe it dry, and then slice through the rocky road. The warmth helps glide through the chocolate without cracking, giving you beautiful, even squares every time!

Hint: Store slices with parchment paper in between to prevent them from sticking together!

Beautifully decorated Easter Rocky Road fudge placed in a white tray sourranded by Easter decorations in a pink background.

Variations

The best thing about Rocky Road? You can make it your own! Why settle for just one version when you can mix things up and make it even more exciting? Here are some fun, delicious, and easy ways to customize your Easter Rocky Road!

  • White Chocolate Rocky Road – Swap out the dark and milk chocolate for creamy white chocolate—perfect for a sweeter, more indulgent twist that pairs beautifully with mini eggs!
  • Peanut Butter Lovers’ Rocky Road – Stir a spoonful of peanut butter into the melted chocolate for a rich, nutty flavor. Add crushed peanuts or peanut butter cups for extra crunch!
  • Biscoff Cookie Rocky Road – Swap digestive biscuits for crushed Biscoff cookies to add a warm, spiced caramel flavor—you’ll love the difference!
  • Nut-Free Crunchy Rocky Road – No nuts? No problem! Replace them with crushed pretzels, crispy rice cereal, or extra mini marshmallows for the perfect crunch.
a piece of Easter Rocky Road placed in a white background decorated with mini eggs beautifully.

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowls – For combining the melted chocolate with all the delicious mix-ins.
  • Heatproof Bowl – Needed for melting chocolate over a double boiler or in the microwave.
  • Spatula or Wooden Spoon – For stirring everything together evenly without crushing the mix-ins too much.
  • Baking Dish or Square Pan – To spread the rocky road mixture into an even layer before chilling.
  • Parchment Paper – Makes removing and slicing the rocky road super easy (no sticking!).

Storage

 If your home isn’t too warm, rocky roads can stay out for a few hours when serving at parties. However, if it's warm, the chocolate may soften or melt, so refrigeration is best!

 In the Refrigerator – Store your Easter Rocky Road in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. This keeps it firm and fresh!

In the Freezer – Want to keep it longer? Freeze in an airtight container or ziplock bag for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, let it thaw in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Rocky Road with easter themed fudge stacked one above the other beautifully loaded with mini marshmallows and mini eggs chocolate.

Top Tips for Making the Best Easter Rocky Road

Follow these simple tips, and you’ll have the most irresistible, chocolatey, crunchy, and chewy Easter Rocky Road!

  1. To avoid burning, melt the chocolate gently using a double boiler or microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring in between. Smooth, silky chocolate = perfect rocky road!
  2. The best texture comes from a balance of chewiness and crunch! Use fresh nuts, crisp biscuits, and soft marshmallows for the perfect bite every time.
  3. Line your pan with parchment paper, this makes it super easy to lift out and slice your rocky road without any sticking or mess!
  4. Gently fold everything together to keep the mini eggs and biscuits from breaking too much—we want big, delicious chunks!
  5. Press it down evenly by using the back of a spoon to spread and gently press the mixture into the pan, ensuring an even layer before chilling.
  6. Chill for at least 2 hours in the fridge before slicing—this helps everything firm up perfectly for neat, clean squares.
  7. Run a sharp knife under hot water, wipe dry, and then slice for smooth, clean cuts without cracking the chocolate!

FAQ

Can I make Easter Rocky Road ahead of time?

Absolutely! Easter Rocky Road is a great make-ahead treat. Store it in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze it for up to 3 months—just thaw before serving!

How do I store Easter Rocky Road?

Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. Keep it chilled to prevent melting!

Can I use just one type of chocolate?

Yes! You can use all dark chocolate for a richer taste or all milk chocolate for a sweeter version. You can even try white chocolate for a fun twist!

What can I use instead of digestive biscuits?

If you don’t have digestive biscuits, you can use graham crackers, shortbread cookies, Biscoff biscuits, or even Rice Krispies for a crunchy texture.

Can I make this nut-free?

Yes! Simply leave out the macadamia nuts and add extra mini marshmallows, crushed pretzels, or crispy rice cereal for crunch instead.

Can I use leftover Easter candy in this recipe?

Yes! This is the perfect recipe to use up leftover Easter chocolates, mini eggs, or marshmallow candies—just mix them in for a fun, festive twist!

Horizontal image of homemade Easter Rocky road fudge filled a square tray beautifully decorated with easter items.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Rocky Road Fudge recipe:

If you tried this Homemade Easter Rocky Road or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Easter Rocky Road stacked one above the other with easter decorations around on a pink background.

Easter Rocky Road

Abi Guna
This Easter Rocky Road is a rich, crunchy, and chocolatey no-bake dessert made with milk and dark chocolate, macadamia nuts, mini marshmallows, crushed digestive biscuits, and Cadbury Mini Eggs. It’s quick, easy, and perfect for Easter celebrations! 
5 from 3 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes
Chilling Time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 10 minutes
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 16 bars
Calories 330 kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowls
  • Sharp Knife
  • Square pan
  • Measuring cups and spoons

Ingredients
  

  • 4 oz dark chocolate bar chopped
  • 4 oz milk chocolate bar chopped
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 cups mini marshmallows
  • ½ cup roasted macadamia nuts
  • 8-10 digestive biscuits broken into chunks
  • ¾ cup Cadbury mini eggs some whole, some crushed
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions
 

  • In a heatproof bowl, melt the dark and milk chocolate with butter using a microwave (30-second intervals) or double boiler, stirring until smooth. Add the vanilla extract to the melted chocolate and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, add the mini marshmallows, macadamia nuts, crushed digestive biscuits, and almost half of the mini eggs.
  • Pour the melted chocolate over the dry ingredients and gently mix until everything is well coated.
  • Line a baking tray with parchment paper and spread the mixture evenly. Sprinkle the remaining mini eggs on top for decoration.
  • Refrigerate for at least 2 hours until fully set. Once firm, cut into bite-sized squares and enjoy!

Notes

  1. Since chocolate is the star of this recipe, opt for high-quality dark and milk chocolate for the best flavor and texture.
  2. Let the rocky road set for at least 2 hours in the fridge to ensure firm, easy-to-slice pieces.
  3. Feel free to swap nuts, biscuits, or chocolates to suit your taste! Try using Biscoff cookies, pretzels, or dried fruits for a fun twist.
  4. Store in the fridge to prevent melting and maintain the perfect texture, especially in warmer weather.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 barCalories: 330kcalCarbohydrates: 34.9gProtein: 4.2gFat: 19.7gSaturated Fat: 12.3gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 66mgFiber: 2.1gSugar: 27.6gCalcium: 97mgIron: 1mg
Keyword chocolate, easter, easy desserts, no bake
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Easter Donuts With Pastel Glaze

by 9 Comments

The best Easter treat I make every year is these baked Easter Donuts! They are soft, fluffy, and beautifully decorated with pastel-colored glaze, Easter sprinkles, and mini eggs, making them the perfect springtime dessert. The best part? These donuts are easy to make and healthier than fried ones, making them a great choice for Easter brunch, dessert, or a fun baking activity with kids. I guarantee they’ll be a hit. Check out the VIDEO in the recipe card!

Beautifully decorated homeade baked easter donuts with patel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a pink plate with blue napkin underneath on a pink backgorund with festive sprinkles aorund.

These homemade Easter doughnuts are even better than the ones from Krispy Kreme, Dunkin', or Tim Hortons—I promise! Soft, fluffy, and perfectly glazed, they’re a must-try for your Easter celebrations! Topped with a pastel-colored glaze and festive sprinkles, they bring a fun and delicious touch to any Easter celebration. Don’t forget to check out the VIDEO tutorial in the recipe card!

Interested in more Easter recipes? Did you check this Easter no bake treat? Easter Rocky Road and also check out my Roasted Carrot Hummus—a perfect Easter party appetizer and crowd-pleaser! For delicious side dishes, try Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower or Roasted Carrots and Asparagus—both are amazing additions to your Easter dinner menu!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
CLose up shot of beautifully decorated homeade baked easter donuts with pastel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a pink plate with blue napkin underneath on a pink backgorund with festive sprinkles, mini eggs around.

Why You’ll Love This Easter Donut Recipe

Nothing says Easter celebration like a batch of festive Easter doughnuts! These soft, fluffy, and beautifully decorated Easter-themed donuts are the perfect sweet treat for spring. The main reasons why I love this recipe are:

  • Quick & Easy – These donuts come together in just 20 minutes, making them perfect for Easter brunch, dessert, or a fun baking activity with kids. My daughter loves glazing and decorating them with sprinkles—it’s so much fun!
  • Light & Airy Texture – These baked donuts are soft, fluffy, and healthier than traditional fried ones, with fewer calories but just as much deliciousness!
  • Fun & Festive – Topped with pastel-colored glaze, Easter sprinkles, and mini eggs, these donuts are a perfect springtime treat. After all, who doesn’t love sprinkles on their baked goodies?
  •  Customizable – Change up the glaze colors and toppings to match any holiday! Try red and green for Christmas, red for Valentine’s Day, or a simple white glaze with rainbow sprinkles for birthdays.
  •  Guaranteed Crowd-Pleaser – Whether for family gatherings, Easter parties, or gifting, these donuts are always a hit! Once you serve them, everyone will be asking for the recipe—no doubt!
Stacked baked easter donuts one above the other in a pink background on a blue plate. easter donuts with pastel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs.

What to Serve with Baked Donuts

Pair your baked Easter donuts with these delicious drinks and sides to create the ultimate Easter brunch or dessert spread! Below are my few favorite serving options!

  • Vanilla Bean Latte – A smooth and creamy latte that pairs beautifully with sweet donuts.
  • Salted Caramel Latte – The perfect balance of sweet and salty flavors to enjoy alongside your Easter treats.
  • Freshly Squeezed Juice – Orange juice, lemonade, or a citrus spritzer adds a refreshing balance.
  • Fruit Platter – Serve with sliced strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, and oranges for a fresh contrast.
  • Chia Seed Pudding - Layer Greek yogurt, chia seed pudding, and maple syrup with fresh mixed berries for a balanced addition.
  • Deviled Eggs – A classic Easter brunch staple for a protein-packed side.
  • Nutella-Covered Strawberries – A fresh and indulgent pairing with donuts.

Ingredients and SUBSTITUTIONS

The below mentioned simple pantry ingredients come together to make the most delightful, fluffy, and festive Easter donuts! Decorated with pastel glazes, Easter sprinkles, and topped with mini eggs, these Easter egg doughnuts are as fun to make as they are to eat! Customize them however you like and enjoy a fun holiday treat!

Easter donut recipe ingredients placed in a bowl on a pink background.
  • All-Purpose Flour – The base for soft, fluffy donuts! Want a gluten-free option? Swap with 1:1 gluten-free baking flour or oat flour for a healthier twist.
  • Baking Powder – The magic ingredient that makes your donuts light and airy. 
  • Granulated Sugar – Adds the right amount of sweetness to your donuts. The mentioned sugar is just the perfect amount of sweetness with the glaze. If you are not going to make glaze then I recommend adding ¼ cup more sugar in the donut batter to balance it. For a healthier option, try coconut sugar or a sugar substitute like monk fruit sweetener.
  • Egg – Helps bind everything together while adding richness. Need an egg-free version? Use a flaxseed egg (1 tablespoon ground flax + 3 tablespoon water) or unsweetened applesauce.
  • Milk – Keeps the donuts moist and tender. You can also use buttermilk instead.
  • Unsalted Butter – Adds richness and flavor. Swap it with coconut oil or a neutral oil like vegetable or avocado oil for a dairy-free option.
  •  Vanilla Extract – Enhances the flavor and aroma of the donuts. For a twist, you can also use almond or lemon extract for a different flavor profile!
  • Powdered Sugar (for the glaze) – Creates a smooth and glossy glaze. 
  • Milk (for the glaze) – Helps thin out the glaze to the perfect consistency. You can swap it with almond milk, oat milk, or coconut milk for a dairy-free option.
  • Food Coloring & Sprinkles – The secret to that festive Easter look! Use natural food dyes from beet juice or turmeric for a more natural option.

See recipe card for quantities.

Beautifully decorated homeade baked easter donuts with pastel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a pink and blue plates with blue napkin underneath on a pink backgorund with festive sprinkles, mini eggs around.

How to Make Homemade Easter Donuts Recipe

These Easter baked donuts are lighter than fried donuts but just as indulgent, making them perfect for brunch, dessert, or a kid-friendly baking activity. Decorate them with mini eggs for an extra festive touch, and you’ve got the cutest mini egg donuts that everyone will love! It takes just 8 simple steps:

Preheat & Prep – Preheat the oven and grease the donut pan.
Mix Dry Ingredients – Whisk together the flour, baking powder, salt, and sugar.
Mix Wet Ingredients – Combine the egg, milk, melted butter, and vanilla extract. Combine – Gently mix the wet and dry ingredients until just combined.
Fill the Donut Cavities – Pipe the batter into the donut pan.
Bake & Cool – Bake until golden, then let the donuts cool completely.
Make the Pastel Glaze – Mix powdered sugar, milk, and food coloring.
Dip & Decorate – Glaze the donuts and top with sprinkles or mini eggs.

Lets see them with step-by step instruction images below!

Dry ingredients are being mixed for making easter donuts recipe.

Step 1: Combine the dry ingredients in a bowl.

Wet ingredients being combined for making easter donuts recipe.

Step 2: In a seperate bowl combine the wet ingredients.

Fold the dry ingredients into the wet mixture for easter donuts recipe.

Step 3: Folding the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients mixture.

Donut pan cavity being filled with the batter using a piping bag.
  1. Step 4: Fill the donut pan cavities with the prepared batter.
The spoon being mixed into the bowl for making pastel glaze.

Step 5: Prepare the pastel colored glazing in 4 different small bowls.

A hand showing pastel blue glazed donuts.

Step 6: Dip the cooled donuts into the glaze and tap the excess glaze.

Let the glaze fully set for about 10-15 minutes, allowing it to form a smooth, glossy finish that holds the sprinkles and decorations beautifully. Once set, take a bite into these soft, fluffy, and perfectly baked Easter donuts, bursting with a light, airy texture and a sweet, pastel-colored glaze. Whether you’re enjoying them with a hot cup of coffee, serving them at Easter brunch, or sharing them with family and friends, these festive donuts are sure to bring joy and sweetness to your celebration! 

Hint: If making ahead, store unfrosted donuts separately and glaze them fresh for the best look and taste! 

Beautifully decorated homeade baked easter donuts with patel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a blue plate with blue napkin underneath on a pink backgorund.

Variations

  • Lemon Glazed Donuts – Add lemon zest and juice to the batter for a bright citrusy flavor, and glaze with a lemon-powdered sugar glaze.
  • Chocolate Easter Donuts – Replace ½ cup flour with cocoa powder for a rich, chocolatey twist. Drizzle with white chocolate glaze and top with sprinkles! It tastes amazing!
  • Carrot Cake Donuts – Mix in grated carrots, cinnamon, and nutmeg for a carrot cake-inspired treat! Top with cream cheese glaze for extra indulgence. Treat for cake cake lovers!
  • Gluten-Free Easter Donuts – Swap all-purpose flour with 1:1 gluten-free baking flour for a gluten-free version that’s just as fluffy and delicious!

Equipment

  • Donut Pan – Essential for getting that perfect donut shape! Use a silicone or nonstick metal pan. I have linked the donut pan I used for this recipe.
  • Mixing Bowls – You’ll need one for dry ingredients and one for wet ingredients to mix everything smoothly.
  • Whisk & Spatula – A whisk helps blend ingredients evenly, while a spatula is great for folding the batter.
  • Piping Bag – Makes it easy to fill the donut cavities neatly without a mess. Simply cut the tip and pipe!
  • Measuring Cups & Spoons – To measure the dry and wet ingredients accurately.
  • Cooling Rack – Helps the donuts cool evenly before glazing, preventing sogginess.
  • Small Bowls – For mixing different pastel-colored glazes to decorate your donuts.
Beautifully decorated single easter donuts with pastel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a blue plate on a pink backgorund with festive sprinkles, mini eggs around.

Storage

Room Temperature (1-2 Days) – Store unglazed donuts in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 days. If glazed, they are best enjoyed the same day.

Refrigerator (4-5 Days) – Keep glazed or unglazed donuts in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Let them come to room temperature before serving for the best texture.

Freezer (Up to 2 Months) – Freeze unglazed donuts in a single layer on a baking sheet until firm, then transfer them to a ziplock bag or airtight container. Thaw at room temperature and glaze before serving.

 Reheating – Warm stored donuts in the microwave for 10-15 seconds or in a 350°F oven for 5 minutes to refresh their softness.

Chef Tips for Making the Best Baked Easter Donuts

  1. Use Fresh Ingredients – Fresh baking powder, vanilla extract, and high-quality butter will give your donuts the best flavor and texture.
  2. Don’t Overmix the Batter - Stir until just combined! Overmixing leads to dense and chewy donuts instead of soft and fluffy ones.
  3. Use a Piping Bag – Spoon batter into a piping bag or ziplock bag, cut the tip, and neatly fill the donut pan for evenly shaped donuts.
  4. Fill Only ¾ Full – Avoid overfilling the donut cavities to prevent overflow and keep the classic donut shape.
  5.  Grease the Pan Well – Lightly coat your donut pan with baking spray or butter to prevent sticking.
  6. Check for Doneness – Insert a toothpick in the center—if it comes out clean, the donuts are ready! Overbaking can dry them out.
  7.  Cool Before Glazing – Allow the donuts cool completely on a wire rack before glazing. Warm donuts will melt the glaze and make a mess!
  8. Decorate Right Away – Add sprinkles, mini eggs, or toppings immediately after dipping in glaze so they stick perfectly.
Showing the inner texture of the beautifully decorated Easter donuts stacked one above the another on a blue plate in pink background.

FAQ

Can I make these donuts gluten-free?

Absolutely! Swap the all-purpose flour with 1:1 gluten-free baking flour for a gluten-free version that’s just as fluffy and delicious.

Can I make the batter ahead of time?

It’s best to bake the donuts fresh, but you can prepare the dry and wet ingredients separately and mix them just before baking.

Can I freeze these donuts?

Yes! You can freeze unglazed donuts for up to 2 months in an airtight container. Let them thaw at room temperature and glaze before serving.

Why are my donuts dense instead of fluffy?

Over Mixing the batter can cause dense donuts. Mix until just combined to keep them light and airy.

Can I air fry these Easter donuts?

Yes absolutely! Bake in an air fryer at 350°F  for 8-10 minutes until golden brown. Follw the rest of the instructions for making glaze according to the recipe.

Horizontal image of Beautifully decorated homeade baked easter donuts with pastel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a pink and blue plates with blue napkin underneath on a pink backgorund with festive sprinkles, mini eggs around.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this baked donut recipe:

If you tried this Easter Donuts Recipe or any other recipe from my blog, I’d love to hear your thoughts! ⭐ Please leave a STAR rating and share your experience in the COMMENTS below. Your support means so much and helps me continue creating delicious recipes. Thank you for being part of this journey!

Beautifully decorated homeade baked easter donuts with patel colored donut glaze topped with Easter festive sprinkles, mini eggs. The Easter are placed in a pink plate with blue napkin underneath on a pink backgorund with festive sprinkles, mini eggs around.

Easter Donuts Recipe + VIDEO

Abi Guna
These baked Easter Donuts are soft, fluffy, and perfectly festive with a pastel-colored glaze and fun sprinkles! Made with simple ingredients, these donuts are easy to bake, healthier than fried donuts, and ready in just 20 minutes. Perfect for Easter brunch, dessert, or a fun baking activity with kids!
5 from 5 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 12 Donuts
Calories 201 kcal

Equipment

  • Donut pan
  • Mixing Bowls
  • Cooling rack
  • Measuring cups and spoons

Ingredients
  

For the Easter Donuts:

  • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • 1 large egg at room temperature
  • 1 cup whole milk at room temperature
  • ¼ cup unsalted butter melted
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Easter sprinkles for decoration
  • Mini eggs for decoration
  • Baking spray to grease the donut pan

For the Glaze:

  • 1 cup powdered sugar
  • 2-3 tablespoons milk
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Food coloring pastel pink, blue, yellow, etc.

Instructions
 

  • Start by preheating your oven to 350°F (175°C). Lightly grease a donut pan with butter or nonstick spray to ensure your donuts release easily after baking. Set aside while you prepare the batter.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, salt, and sugar until well combined. This step ensures an even distribution of ingredients, giving you light and fluffy donuts.
  • In a separate medium bowl, whisk together the egg, milk, melted butter, and vanilla extract until smooth. This mixture brings richness and flavor to your donuts while keeping them soft and moist.
  • Gradually add the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients, stirring gently until just combined. Be careful not to overmix—a few lumps are fine! Overmixing can lead to dense donuts.
  • Transfer the batter to a piping bag or ziplock bag, cut the tip, and pipe the batter into each donut cavity, filling about ¾ full to allow room for rising.
  • Place the pan in the oven and bake for 12-15 minutes, or until the donuts are golden brown and spring back when lightly touched. A toothpick inserted should come out clean. Mine took exactly 12 minutes to bake but it really depends on the oven.
  • Let the donuts cool in the pan for a few minutes, then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely before glazing.
  • Meanwhile, in a small bowl, whisk together powdered sugar, milk, and vanilla extract until smooth. If the glaze is too thick, add a little more milk; if too thin, add more powdered sugar.
  • Divide the glaze into separate bowls, add a few drops of pastel food coloring to each, and mix well to create beautiful Easter-inspired shades. I used pink, orange, yellow and blue. A tiny drop goes a long way!
  • Dip the cooled donuts into the glaze, ensuring an even coat. Lift and let the excess drip off before placing the donuts back on the wire rack. While the glaze is still wet, sprinkle with Easter sprinkles or top with mini eggs for a festive touch. Let the glaze set for about 10-15 minutes.
  • The recipe yields exactly 12 donuts! Once the glaze is set, enjoy your beautifully decorated Easter donuts!

Video

Notes

  1. Stir the batter until just combined to keep the donuts light and fluffy. Overmixing can lead to dense, tough donuts.
  2. A slightly thicker glaze helps the colors stand out beautifully. If it's too thin, add more powdered sugar; if too thick, add a little milk.
  3. Lightly spray the donut cavities with baking spray to prevent sticking and ensure easy release.
  4. Want to skip store-bought food colors? Try beet powder, turmeric, matcha, or freeze-dried raspberry powder for beautiful, natural pastel shades!

Nutrition

Serving: 1 DonutCalories: 201kcalCarbohydrates: 37.9gProtein: 2.4gFat: 4.4gSaturated Fat: 2.6gCholesterol: 27mgSodium: 863mgPotassium: 6mgFiber: 0.5gSugar: 25.6gCalcium: 20mg
Keyword Baked, donuts, easter, holiday baking
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup

by 7 Comments

Tired of store-bought syrups? Try my homemade Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup, the perfect way to enhance your coffee, vanilla lattes, smoothies, and iced drinks with a touch of warm, sweet vanilla flavor that everyone loves!

Vanilla bean syrup in a air tight container. Vanilla bean pods near by.

This Vanilla Bean Syrup is made with real vanilla beans, sugar, and water, creating a smooth, aromatic, and flavorful homemade coffee syrup that’s far better than store-bought versions. Whether you enjoy hot coffee, cold brew, or flavored lattes, a splash of this rich vanilla syrup will make every sip extra special. Plus, it’s incredibly easy to make, requires just three simple ingredients, and can be stored for weeks! Trust me, your home will smell like a coffee shop every time you make a hot or cold beverage with this homemade Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup!

Try my favorite Vanilla Bean Latte recipe using this homemade coffee syrup! If you love lattes, don’t miss my other favorite—Salted Caramel Latte!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup Recipe

Making homemade vanilla syrup is easier than you think! This vanilla simple syrup is made with just three ingredients; sugar, water, and real vanilla beans—creating a smooth and flavorful sweetener.

  • Easy to Make & Store – This recipe comes together in minutes and stays fresh for weeks, making it a great coffee bar staple.
  • Better Than Store-Bought – No artificial flavors or preservatives added to this syrup —just pure, homemade goodness with three simple ingredients.
  • Rich & Aromatic Flavor – Made with real vanilla beans, this syrup adds a deep, warm, and sweet vanilla taste to any drink.
  • Versatile & Customizable – Perfect for hot coffee, cold brew, lattes, teas, smoothies, and even cocktails or desserts!

If you love coffeehouse-style drinks like me, this homemade vanilla bean syrup is a must-have, trust me!

Vanilla bean coffee syrup in a glass jar with spoon on it.

What to Serve with Vanilla Coffee Syrup

This homemade Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup isn’t just for coffee! Here are some delicious ways to use it:

  • Lattes & Cappuccinos – Stir into hot or iced lattes for a smooth, sweet vanilla flavor. Like I did in my Vanilla Bean Latte recipe!
  • Chai or Matcha Lattes – Enhances tea-based drinks with a hint of vanilla warmth.
  • Pancakes & Waffles – Drizzle over buttermilk pancakes, waffles like red velvet cake waffles, or French toast instead of maple syrup.
  • Oatmeal & Yogurt Bowls – Stir into warm oatmeal or Greek yogurt for natural sweetness. You can drizzle this syrup over oatmeal mug cake to enjoy or even in berry chia seed pudding for that extra sweet touch!
  • Muffins & Breads – Use as a glaze over banana bread, banana blackberry oatmeal muffins, banana chocolate chunks muffins or cinnamon rolls.
  • Cocktails & Mocktails – Use in espresso martinis, vanilla bourbon cocktails, or lemonades for a gourmet twist.
  • Milkshakes & Smoothies – Blend it into vanilla or chocolate shakes for extra depth.
  • Fruit Salads – A light drizzle enhances berries, peaches, or grilled pineapple.
  • Ice Cream Topping – Pour over vanilla or caramel ice cream for a gourmet drizzle.

Ingredients

This simple 3-ingredient vanilla syrup recipe is easy to make and perfect for elevating coffee, lattes, and more!

Ingredinets laid out for making vanilla bean coffee syrup
  • Water – The base for dissolving the sugar and creating a smooth syrup.
  • Granulated sugar – Adds sweetness and helps create the perfect syrup consistency.
  • Vanilla bean – The star ingredient! Scrape out the vanilla seeds and add the whole pod for a deep, rich flavor.

See recipe card for quantities.

How to make vanilla syrup for coffee

If you're wondering how to make vanilla syrup, the process is simple: simmer the ingredients together, let the flavors infuse, and store it for weeks of delicious use. Below step-by-step instructions helps you for better understanding!

Vanilla bean being scarped from the pod. The vanilla bean seeds in the knife.

Vanilla bean seeds scraped from the pod.

In a saucepan vanilla bean added along with the water and suagr.

In a saucepan add water, sugar and vanilla bean seeds along with the bean.

Vanilla bean syrup being simmered in the saucepan.

Simmer the sauce for 5-7 minutes on a medium heat.

Vanilla bean syrup in a glass jar with a spoon on it.

Once cooled down transfer the vanilla bean syrup in a glass jar to store.

Whether you’re making a vanilla bean simple syrup for your morning brew or a sweet drizzle for pancakes, this recipe is a must-try!

Substitutions

  • Sugar: Granulated white sugar is recommended for this recipe, but you can use brown sugar for a deeper, caramel-like flavor. For a natural sweetness, try maple syrup or honey, but keep in mind that the syrup will be slightly thinner compared to traditional simple syrup.
  • Vanilla Bean: I highly recommend using good-quality vanilla beans for the best flavor. However, if you can’t find one, you can substitute 1 tablespoon of vanilla bean paste. If using vanilla extract, increase the amount to 2 tablespoons for a strong, rich vanilla taste.

Variations

  • Brown Sugar Vanilla Syrup – Swap white sugar for brown sugar to create a deeper, caramel-like flavor.
  • Honey Vanilla Syrup – Use honey instead of sugar for a naturally sweet twist.
  • Maple Vanilla Syrup – Add pure maple syrup for a warm, rich flavor that pairs perfectly with coffee and lattes.
  • Cinnamon Vanilla Syrup – Stir in ½ teaspoon of ground cinnamon or add a cinnamon stick while simmering for a cozy spiced touch.
  • Lavender Vanilla Syrup – Infuse the syrup with dried lavender flowers for a floral, aromatic boost.
  • Salted Caramel Vanilla Syrup – Mix in a pinch of sea salt and a drizzle of caramel for a sweet-savory combination.

These fun variations make this homemade vanilla bean syrup even more versatile, perfect for coffee, lattes, teas, and desserts!

Vanilla bean syrup with seeds on the coffee syrp taken in a golden spoon.

Equipment

  • Saucepan - To make the syrup.
  • Sharp Knife – For slicing and scraping the vanilla bean seeds.
  • Measuring Cups & Spoons – For accurate ingredient measurements.
  • Glass Jar or Bottle – A sterilized container with a tight lid for storing the syrup and keeping it fresh.

Storage

Refrigeration: Store the vanilla bean syrup in an airtight glass jar or bottle in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks.

Sterilized Container for Longer Shelf Life: If stored in a sterilized glass bottle, the syrup may last up to 1 month in the fridge.

Freezing Option: If you want to keep it for longer, freeze the syrup in small ice cube trays and thaw as needed.

Close up shot of vanilla bean coffee syrup in a glass container with a vanilla bean in it.

Top Tips for Making the Best Vanilla Bean Syrup

  1. For the best flavor, choose plump, aromatic vanilla beans instead of dried-out ones. Madagascar, Tahitian, or Mexican vanilla beans work best. I have used madagascar vanilla bean for this recipe.
  2. Heat the syrup gently over medium-low heat to extract the best flavor without burning the sugar. A slow simmer for 5-7 minutes is ideal.
  3. Avoid grainy syrup by stirring continuously until the sugar completely melts. This step is crucial to get the smooth syrupy consistency.
  4. If you prefer a clearer syrup, strain out the vanilla bean pieces using a fine-mesh sieve or cheesecloth before storing.
  5. Adding a teaspoon of vanilla extract after removing from heat boosts the flavor even more! But I didn't do it in this recipe since the vanilla bean I used was so aromatic!

FAQ

Can I use vanilla extract instead of vanilla beans?

Ofcourse you can! If you don’t have vanilla beans, substitute 2 teaspoons of vanilla extract. However, vanilla beans provide a richer, deeper flavor compared to extract.

How long does homemade vanilla bean syrup last?

If it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it stays fresh for up to 2 weeks. If stored in a sterilized glass bottle, it may last up to a month.

Can I use brown sugar instead of white sugar?

Absolutely! Brown sugar adds a caramel-like depth to the syrup, making it even richer in flavor.

Why is my syrup is grainy?

This happens when the sugar isn’t fully dissolved. Make sure to stir constantly over medium-low heat until the sugar is completely melted. Remove the inner side of the saucepan with the help of a spoon constantly.

Can I freeze vanilla bean syrup?

Yes you can! Freeze it in a small portions using an ice cube tray, then thaw as needed.

How can I make it dairy-free or keto-friendly?

This recipe is already dairy-free! For a keto-friendly version, replace sugar with a low-carb sweetener like monk fruit or erythritol.

Whats the difference between vanilla bean syrup and vanilla bean extract?

Vanilla syrup is sweetened and used as a flavor-enhancing syrup, while vanilla extract is a pure flavoring agent without added sugar. If replacing one with the other, you’ll need to adjust for sweetness.

Vanilla bean syrup and vanilla coffee bean syrup placed in an airtight container and in a glass placed in a marble surface.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Vanilla bean coffee syrup recipe:

The BESt homemade vanilla bean syrup for coffee is stored in an airtight container with fresh vanilla beans along the sides.

Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup

Abi Guna
This homemade Vanilla Bean Coffee Syrup is smooth, aromatic, and perfect for sweetening coffee, lattes, and more. Made with just three simple ingredients, this syrup comes together in minutes and lasts for weeks!
5 from 4 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Total Time 12 minutes
Course Dessert, Drinks
Cuisine American
Servings 1 cup
Calories 47 kcal

Equipment

  • Saucepan
  • Measuring cups and spoons
  • Sharpe knife
  • Mason jar or airtight container

Ingredients
  

  • 1 cup water
  • 1 cup granulated white sugar
  • 1 vanilla bean split and seeds scraped

Instructions
 

  • Slice the vanilla bean lengthwise and scrape out the seeds with a knife.
  • In a small saucepan, combine water, sugar, vanilla bean seeds, and the whole pod. Bring to a gentle simmer over medium heat, stirring until the sugar dissolves.
  • Let the mixture simmer for 5-7 minutes, allowing the vanilla bean to release its deep flavor. The syrup starts to thicken a bit.
  • Remove from heat, discard the vanilla pod. Let the syrup cool, then transfer it to a sealed bottle or jar.

Notes

  1. Keep the vanilla bean coffee syrup in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks.
  2. Over time, natural vanilla particles may settle at the bottom, so give it a quick shake before adding it to your coffee or desserts.
  3.  Always use a clean, dry spoon to prevent contamination and extend freshness!

Nutrition

Serving: 2 tablespoonsCalories: 47kcalCarbohydrates: 12.5gSodium: 1mgSugar: 12.5gCalcium: 0.3mg
Keyword coffee, easy desserts, latte, syrup, vanilla
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad

by 9 Comments

This Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad is the ultimate combination of crunchy, juicy, and creamy textures that make every bite irresistible! The golden, crispy pan-fried chicken, fresh crisp romaine lettuce, and shaved parmesan cheese, this salad is tossed in a rich, homemade Caesar dressing that’s perfectly tangy and full of flavor.

Crispy Chicken caesar salad served in a white oval platter and caesar dressing is drizzled over.

The crispy chicken adds a delicious twist to the classic chicken Caesar salad, making it hearty enough to be a satisfying meal on its own. The savory, garlicky dressing coats every leaf, while the juicy, breaded chicken adds the perfect crunch. Whether you enjoy it as a hearty lunch, light dinner, or a crowd-pleasing side, this restaurant-quality Caesar salad is easy to make at home. Serve it with crunchy croutons, extra parmesan, and a squeeze of fresh lemon for a salad that’s fresh, flavorful, and satisfying! I use the remaining chicken from the salad to make our family’s favorite chicken salad melt sandwich for next day’s lunch. Win.Win.

Looking for more high-protein salads? Check out my Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Close up shot for crispy chicken and the caesar salad.

Why You’ll Love This Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad Recipe

You may think what makes this crispy chicken salad so special? The perfectly seasoned, breaded chicken is pan-fried to golden perfection, adding crunch to every bite.

  • Quick and Easy  – This salad can be made in under 30 minutes, this is a perfect weeknight meal, light lunch, or side dish.
  • High-Protein Meal – The crispy chicken and parmesan cheese make this salad hearty enough to enjoy as a main dish.
  • Amazing Texture & Flavor – A delicious balance of crispy, juicy, and creamy in every bite! The golden, crunchy chicken pairs beautifully with fresh romaine lettuce and rich, tangy Caesar dressing.
  • Better Than Restaurant Salads – Made with fresh ingredients and homemade dressing, this salad delivers restaurant-quality taste right at home.
  • Customizable – Swap the chicken for grilled shrimp, salmon, or tofu, or add extra toppings like avocado, bacon, or cherry tomatoes for a twist on the classic.
Black light shot of Crispy chicken caesar salad in a white bowl accompanied by a bowl homemade caesar salad dressing.

What to Serve with Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad 

While Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad is a satisfying meal on its own, pairing it with the right side dish can encourage your kids and family to enjoy dining experience! Whether you’re looking for something light, hearty, or refreshing, here are some great options I love to serve alongside:

Garlic bread or Dinner Rolls – Soft, fluffy, and delicious rolls alongside a crisp, fresh salad.

Soups - A rich, creamy tomato soup that pairs beautifully with the garlicky flavors of the salad. Even a spicy vegetable soup goes well with this crispy chicken salad.

Roasted Veggies – Hot honey Brussel sprouts, Roasted carrots and asparagus, Roasted cauliflower and carrots or zucchini bring a warm, hearty contrast.

Grilled Shrimp or Salmon – If you love seafood, adding grilled salmon or shrimp makes this a restaurant-worthy dish. (Check out my Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad for another great pairing!)

How to make CAESAR SALAD DRESSING WITHOUT ANCHOVIES

Caesar salad dressing ingredients added to the bowl.
Homemade caesar salad dressing without anchovies in a bowl with a spoon.

Love Caesar salad but not a fan of anchovies? This Caesar Salad Dressing Without Anchovies is just as creamy, tangy, and flavorful as the classic version—without the fishy taste! Made with mayonnaise, parmesan cheese, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, garlic, and olive oil, this dressing has a rich, velvety texture with the perfect balance of savory and zesty flavors. It’s quick to make, requires simple pantry ingredients, and is perfect for drizzling over Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad, wraps, or even as a dip! If you're looking for an easy, homemade alternative to store-bought dressing, this anchovy-free Caesar dressing is the way to go! —it’s a total game-changer!

Ingredients

The ingredients laid out for crispy chicken caesar salad with homemade caesar dressing.
  • Chicken Breasts- Boneless and skinless chicken breasts is the base of the crispy chicken, tender and juicy, slicing them horizontally ensures even cooking and a perfect crispy coating.
  • Paprika – Provides a mild smoky flavor and slight sweetness.
  • Salt – Enhances all the seasonings.
  • Ground Pepper – Adds a subtle heat and depth of flavor to the seasoning mix.
  • All-Purpose Flour – Helps create a base layer for the breading, allowing the egg and breadcrumbs to stick better for an extra crispy texture.
  • Large Egg  – Acts as a binding agent, helping the breadcrumbs adhere to the chicken while adding richness.
  •  Water – Thins the egg mixture slightly, making it easier to coat the chicken evenly.
  • Panko Breadcrumbs – Creates an extra crispy, airy coating, giving the chicken a light, crunchy texture when fried.
  •  Romaine Lettuce – The classic base of a Caesar salad, offering a crisp, refreshing crunch that holds up well to the rich dressing.
  •  Parmesan Cheese – Aged and salty, parmesan enhances the umami flavor of the dressing while adding richness and a slightly nutty taste.
  • Croutons – Golden, crispy bread cubes that add crunch and absorb the creamy dressing, making every bite extra satisfying.
  • Garlic – Infuses the dressing with a robust, aromatic kick.
  • Lemon Juice – Brightens up the dressing with a fresh, citrusy tang, balancing out the richness of the oil and cheese.
  • Dijon Mustard – Helps emulsify the dressing while adding a mild, tangy spice that enhances the overall flavor.
  •  Worcestershire Sauce – Adds depth and umami, its a key to the signature Caesar taste.
  •  Olive Oil – Creates a smooth, creamy consistency in the dressing while adding a slight fruitiness.
  • Mayonnaise - The creamy base of the dressing, replacing raw eggs in traditional Caesar dressing, making it rich and smooth.

See recipe card for quantities.

HOW TO MAKE BEST CRISPY CHICKEN CAESAR SALAD

Making Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad involves three main steps: first, preparing the panko and Parmesan-coated crispy chicken; second, making the Caesar salad dressing; and finally, assembling the salad with fresh ingredients and the homemade dressing. Lets see the step-by-step instructions process!

The Chicken breasts are sliced horizontally and placed in a wooden cutting board surrounded by the seasonings.

Cut the chicken breast horizontally and pound it if nesscary for even thickness.

Prepared breading station to make crispy chicken for crispy chicken caesar salad recipe.

Dredge the seasoned chicken breast in flour, and then egg mixture and then panko mixture.

In a large white skillet the crispy chicken is prepared in batches for caesar salad recipe.

Pan fry the chicken breasts until crispy and golden.

In a gray oval platter the crispy is sliced and placed.

Once done, slice the chicken breasts.

Prepared homemade Caesar Salad Dressing in a bowl with golden spoon.

Meanwhile, combine the Caesar Salad dressing ingredients in a bowl and mix until smooth and creamy.

Gathered prepared Caesar Salad ingredients arranged in a serving platter.

Gather all the prepared Caesar Salad ingredients and toss it.

Top the salad with crispy, golden-brown sliced chicken, ensuring even distribution for a perfect bite every time. Gently toss everything together, allowing the homemade Caesar dressing to coat the fresh romaine lettuce, crunchy croutons, and juicy chicken evenly. For the final touch, sprinkle freshly ground black pepper and a generous amount of grated Parmesan cheese over the salad, enhancing its savory depth. Serve immediately while the chicken is still warm and crispy, and enjoy this flavorful, satisfying dish! 

Crispy Chicken caesar salad served over a oval platter and garnished with grated parmesan cheese.

Substitutions for Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad

  • For a lighter option, swap crispy chicken with grilled, baked, or air-fried chicken.
  • Lettuce can be substituted with a heartier, nutrient-dense green like kale, which holds up well to dressing.
  • Toasted nuts are a great substitute for croutons, adding crunch without the extra carbs.
  • Greek yogurt dressing is a great alternative as it’s lighter and high in protein, making it a healthier swap for mayo-based dressing.

Variations

Looking to switch up your Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad? Try these delicious variations for a fresh twist on this classic dish!

  • Flavor Variations: Toss crispy chicken in buffalo sauce for a spicy kick. For a lighter option, swap crispy chicken for grilled, baked, or air-fried chicken.
  • Protein Variations: Replace chicken with grilled or crispy shrimp for a seafood twist. For a vegetarian version, use crispy pan-fried tofu or tempeh as a protein substitute.
  • Salad Variations: Swap romaine lettuce for chopped kale for a heartier, nutrient-dense alternative.
  • Extra Toppings for More Flavor: Bacon adds a smoky, crispy bite to your salad, while avocado brings creaminess and extra healthy fats.
Close up shot of crispy chicken interior of the caesar chicken salad recipe.

Equipment

Mixing Bowls – To mix the Caesar dressing and coat the chicken with panko and Parmesan.

Skillet or Frying Pan – To cook the crispy chicken to golden perfection.

Large Salad Bowl – For tossing and assembling the salad.

How to Store Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad

To keep your Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad fresh, store the components separately to prevent sogginess.

Crispy Chicken: Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

Caesar Dressing: Store homemade dressing in a sealed jar or airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

Romaine Lettuce & Toppings: Keep chopped romaine lettuce in a zip-top bag or airtight container with a paper towel to absorb moisture.

Assembled Salad: If already mixed with dressing, it’s best eaten immediately. Leftovers may become soggy after a few hours.

For the best texture and flavor, assemble the salad fresh before serving!

CLose up shot of crispy chicken caesar salad in a white bowl drizzled with salad dressing.

Top Tips for Making the Best Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad

  1. Panko breadcrumbs create a lighter, crispier coating compared to regular breadcrumbs, giving the chicken that perfect crunch. So don't miss this step for that extra crispiness!
  2. When frying, cook the chicken in batches to maintain crispiness instead of steaming. So don’t overcrowd the pan.
  3. Use fresh Romaine lettuce, for maximum crunch, wash and fully dry the romaine before tossing it in the dressing.
  4. Homemade caesar salad dressing is a game-changer. Making Caesar dressing from scratch gives you richer, fresher flavors compared to store-bought versions. So just spend 2-3 minutes making your own salad dressing!
  5. To prevent sogginess, mix the lettuce, croutons, and dressing right before serving.

FAQ

Can I air-fry the chicken breasts instead of frying?

Of Course you can! For a healthier option you can air-fry at 375°F for 12-15 minutes until crispy and golden.

How to keep the chicken crispy for a long time in a salad?

To maintain crispiness, let the cooked chicken rest on a wire rack instead of a plate to prevent sogginess. Avoid adding it to the salad until just before serving.

Can I make this salad ahead of time?

You can prep the components in advance; chop the lettuce, make the dressing, and cook the chicken. Store everything separately and assemble just before serving for the best texture.

What’s the best way to reheat crispy chicken?

Reheat in an air fryer at 375°F for 3-5 minutes or in the oven at 350°F for 10 minutes to keep it crispy. Avoid microwaving, as it can make the coating soggy.

Can I bake the chicken instead of frying it?

Yes absolutely! Bake at 400°F  for 20-25 minutes, flipping halfway, until golden and crispy. For extra crunch, spray with cooking oil before baking.

Crispy chicken caesar salad in a white bowl accompanied by a bowl homemade caesar salad dressing with parmesan cheese in a bowl on other side.

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this crispy caesar chicken salad recipe:

Crispy chicken caesar salad in a white bowl accompanied by a bowl homemade caesar salad dressing.

Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad

Abi Guna
Enjoy this Crispy Chicken Caesar Salad, a perfect mix of golden, crunchy chicken, crisp romaine lettuce, parmesan cheese, and a rich homemade Caesar dressing. This easy and satisfying salad recipe is great for lunch, dinner, or meal prep. Ready in under 30 minutes, it's a restaurant-quality dish you can make at home! 
5 from 5 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Course Main Course, Salad
Cuisine American
Servings 4 people
Calories 578 kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowls
  • Large Skillet
  • Measuring spoons and cups

Ingredients
  

For the Crispy Chicken

  • 1.5 pound boneless skinless chicken breasts, sliced horizontally
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 tablespoons water
  • 1 cup panko breadcrumbs
  • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil

For the Caesar Dressing

  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ¼ cup grated parmesan cheese
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground pepper

For the Caesar Salad

  • 4 cups romaine lettuce chopped
  • ½ cup parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 cup croutons
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions
 

  • Cut the chicken breasts horizontally. If needed, pound them to an even thickness.
  • Season with salt, pepper, garlic powder, and paprika. Set aside.
  • In the first bowl, add all-purpose flour.
  • In the second bowl, beat the egg and water.
  • In the third bowl, mix panko breadcrumbs and parmesan cheese.
  • Dredge the chicken in flour first, then dip it in the beaten egg, and finally coat it with the panko-parmesan mixture.
  • Shake off any excess coating.
  • Heat olive oil in a pan over medium heat and fry until golden brown and crispy about 3-4 minutes per side. Let rest for a few minutes before slicing.
  • Meanwhile prepare the caesar dressing; Whisk together mayonnaise, olive oil, lemon juice, Dijon mustard, Worcestershire sauce, garlic, and parmesan.Season with salt and pepper to taste. Set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, combine chopped romaine lettuce, croutons, parmesan, and Caesar dressing.
  • Top with crispy sliced chicken and toss gently.
  • Sprinkle with fresh black pepper, grated parmesan cheese, and serve immediately!

Notes

  1. If the chicken breasts are thick, pound them to an even thickness for faster, more even cooking.
  2. For a lighter dressing, replace mayonnaise with Greek yogurt or use a store-bought Caesar dressing for convenience.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 servingCalories: 578kcalCarbohydrates: 31.7gProtein: 22.9gFat: 40.5gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 123mgSodium: 1069mgFiber: 2.3gSugar: 2.8gCalcium: 244mgIron: 5mg
Keyword Chicken, Main Dish, Salads
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

If you love Caesar salad with crispy chicken, this Fried Chicken Caesar Salad is a must-try! It’s the perfect combination of crunchy, golden-breaded chicken, crisp romaine lettuce, parmesan cheese, and a rich, creamy Caesar dressing. If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice

by 7 Comments

Today, I made this flavor-packed, one-pan Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice for dinner, and it's always a huge hit in my home! This savory, protein-packed, and easy-to-make dish combines juicy chicken, tender shrimp, fluffy rice, crisp vegetables, and a rich, umami-filled sauce for a meal that's both delicious and satisfying.

Chicken and shrimp fried rice in a bowl garnished with green onions in a warm background. Soy sauce placed in a dipping plate.

When it comes to chicken and shrimp recipes with rice, this one stands out because of its savory garlic-ginger base, fluffy grains of rice, and rich umami flavors from soy sauce and sesame oil. The shrimp adds a light, slightly sweet seafood touch, while the chicken provides heartiness and depth. If you love chicken and shrimp dishes, this stir-fried classic is a perfect balance of textures and flavors. Whether served as a main course or alongside other Asian-inspired sides, this shrimp fried rice with chicken will satisfy your cravings for bold, comforting flavors in every bite, while the vibrant veggies add texture and nutrition. Ready in under 30 minutes, this one-pan fried rice recipe is a must-try for anyone who loves flavorful and comforting meals! 

Looking for more one-pan recipes ready in under 30 minutes? Check out my Ground Chicken Spaghetti, Glass Noodle Stir-Fry, Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine, and Pesto Ricotta Pasta!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]
Close up shot of shrimp, chicken pieces and other ingredients in Chicken and shrimp fried rice recipe.

Why You’ll Love This Easy Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice Recipe

  • Quick & Easy – Ready in under 30 minutes, making it perfect for busy weeknights!
  •  One-Pan Meal – Everything cooks in a single pan, meaning less cleanup and more convenience.
  • Protein-Packed – A delicious combination of juicy chicken and tender shrimp, making it hearty and satisfying.
  • Better Than Takeout – Loaded with bold, umami flavors, this homemade version is fresher and healthier than restaurant fried rice.
  • Customizable – Swap the protein, add more veggies, or make it spicy for a personalized touch!
  • Great for Meal Prep – Stores well in the fridge, so you can enjoy leftovers for a quick and tasty meal anytime.

Once you try it, this flavor-packed, one-pan fried rice will become a favorite in your home!

What to Serve with Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice

Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice is a complete meal on its own, packed with the perfect balance of carbs, protein, and fiber. However, you can elevate your meal by pairing it with crispy spring rolls, egg rolls, or dumplings for a delicious appetizer. Complement the dish with a warm bowl of egg drop soup, spicy vegetable soup, or miso soup. If you want extra protein, serve it with teriyaki chicken or blackened salmon bites for a well-rounded and satisfying meal! For a lighter side, try Asian cucumber salad, stir-fried bok choy, or sautéed green beans.

In a spoon Chicken and shrimp fried rice is being scooped from the serving bowl.

Best Rice for Fried Rice

The best rice for fried rice should be firm, non-sticky, and able to absorb flavors while maintaining its texture. Here are the top choices to make pick the best choice for making shrimp and chicken fried rice recipe: 

Day-Old Cooked Rice (Preferred)

Chilled, day-old rice is slightly dried out, preventing it from becoming mushy when stir-fried. If using freshly cooked rice, spread it on a tray and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to remove excess moisture.

Long-Grain Rice (Best Choice)

    Jasmine Rice – Light, fluffy, and slightly fragrant, making it the best option for fried rice.

    Basmati Rice – Less sticky, with long separate grains that absorb sauces well.

    For the best restaurant-style fried rice, jasmine rice is the top choice!

    Ingredients

    This dish delivers the best Chinese chicken fried rice experience right from your own kitchen. It needs only 10 main ingredients to create this flavorful fried rice recipe!

    Chicken and shrimp fried rice ingredients laid out on a pink background.
    • Chicken - Provides a hearty, protein-rich base that pairs well with the shrimp for a balanced dish. Using boneless, skinless chicken breasts or thighs ensures juicy and flavorful bites. 
    • Shrimp - Adds a sweet, delicate seafood flavor that enhances the dish. Cooking shrimp quickly over high heat keeps them tender and juicy. 
    • Cooked Rice - The main component of fried rice, day-old rice is ideal as it’s slightly dried out, preventing messiness and allowing each grain to absorb the sauce. I have used a day old jasmine rice for the recipe.
    • Carrots and Peas - Adds natural sweetness and a slight crunch, enhancing both the texture and flavor of the dish.
    • Onion - Provides a slightly sharp, sweet flavor when sautéed, helping to balance the richness of the dish.
    • Garlic - Enhances the umami flavors with its aromatic, I always use fresh garlic works since they are best for maximum flavor.
    • Ginger - Brings a warm, slightly peppery taste that pairs well with garlic and soy sauce, adding depth to the dish. You can either grate and mince them finely.
    • Soy Sauce - A key seasoning that adds a salty, umami depth to the dish while giving the rice a slightly darker color. If you are using low- sodium soy sauce, check the seasonings and adjust the salt.
    • Oyster Sauce - Adds a slightly sweet and savory richness, deepening the overall flavor profile of the fried rice.
    • Sesame Oil - Adds a distinct nutty aroma and flavor, enhancing the Asian-inspired taste of the dish. So don’t skip this!
    • Oil - Used to cook the chicken, shrimp, and vegetables while preventing sticking. Neutral oils like vegetable or canola oil work best.
    • Salt & Black Pepper - Enhances the flavors and balances the dish. 
    • Green Onions - Adds a fresh, mild onion flavor and a pop of color to the final dish.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make fried rice with chicken and shrimp 

    The combination of seafood and poultry makes it a flavor-packed, protein-rich meal that’s quick, easy, and better than takeout. The step-by-step instructions below can help you to create this amazing recipe!

    Cooked chicken pieces in a skillet for Chicken and shrimp fried rice recipe.

    In a large skillet, cook the chicken pieces for 4-5 minutes until its done.

    Cooked shrimp in a skillet for Chicken and shrimp fried rice recipe.

    In a same skillet, cook the shrimp for 4-5 minutes until its done.

    Vegetables cooked in the skillet for chicken and shrimp fried rice.

    Add onion, garlic, ginger and veggies and cook for 4-5 minutes.

    Cooked chicken, shrimp, rice and sauce in the skillet for Chicken and shrimp fried rice recipe.

    Stir in the sauces along with the cooked chicken, shrimp and rice.

    Continue mixing for 3-5 minutes, ensuring that the rice, chicken, shrimp, and vegetables are evenly coated with the flavorful sauce. Stir occasionally to prevent sticking and allow the ingredients to develop a slight crispiness for that authentic fried rice texture. If needed, adjust the seasoning with a little extra soy sauce or a pinch of salt to enhance the flavors.

    Once everything is well combined and heated through, sprinkle generously with chopped green onions for a fresh, aromatic finish. You can also add a dash of sesame seeds or red chili flakes for extra flavor. Serve the fried rice hot, straight from the pan, and enjoy this delicious, homemade Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice—perfect for a quick weeknight dinner or meal prep!

    Cooked Chicken and shrimp fried rice in a white skillet surrounded by a wooden bowl of green onions, soy sauce in a bowl, salt and pepper shakes in the bottom.

    Substitutions

    If you need to swap out ingredients, here are some great alternatives to keep your fried rice flavorful and balanced!

     Rice Substitutes:

    Brown Rice – A healthier alternative with more fiber; slightly chewy but works well.
    Cauliflower Rice – Low-carb and keto-friendly, great for a lighter version.
    Quinoa – Adds protein and a nutty flavor while keeping the dish gluten-free.

    Vegetarian Protein Substitute:

    Tofu – A great vegetarian option. Firm tofu works best when pan-fried first to maintain texture.

    Oyster Sauce Substitute:

    Hoisin Sauce – Slightly sweeter but works as a great replacement.
    Soy Sauce + Brown Sugar – A mix of soy sauce and a small amount of brown sugar mimics the depth of oyster sauce.

    These swaps will help you customize your fried rice while keeping it delicious and satisfying!

    CLose up shot of Chicken and shrimp fried rice recipe.

    Fried Rice Variations

    Looking to switch things up? Try these delicious variations for a unique twist on classic fried rice!

    • Beef Fried Rice – Use thinly sliced steak or ground beef for a hearty and savory version.
    • Egg Fried Rice – A simple yet delicious option with scrambled eggs as the main protein. My kids favorite one!
    • Pineapple Fried Rice – Adds a tropical, sweet-savory flavor with fresh or canned pineapple chunks. Perfect to make when pineapple is in season.
    • Spicy Fried Rice – Mix in Sriracha, red chili flakes, or Thai chili for an extra kick.
    • Quinoa Fried Rice – A high-protein, fiber-rich alternative with the same great stir-fried flavors. You dont want to worry about cards here!
    • Mexican Fried Rice – Toss in black beans, corn, and salsa for a Tex-Mex-inspired dish.
    Chicken and shrimp fried rice served in a bowl, wooden bowl has green onions and another bowl has soy sauce.

    Equipment

    • Large Skillet - All you need is a one skillet to make the entire recipe.
    • Serving bowls - To serve the shrimp fried rice.
    • Measuring spoons and cups - To measure the quantity of spices and other ingredients.

    Storage

    To keep your fried rice fresh and flavorful, follow these simple storage tips:

    • Refrigeration: Allow the fried rice to cool completely before storing to prevent excess moisture. Transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 3 days.
    • Freezing: For longer storage, place the cooled rice in a freezer-safe container or resealable bag. Freeze for up to 3 months. Flatten the rice in the bag for even freezing and easy thawing.
    • Reheating (Stovetop): Heat a pan over medium heat, add a splash of oil or water, and stir-fry until hot.
    • Reheating (Microwave): Place the rice in a bowl, cover with a damp paper towel, and heat in 30-second intervals, stirring in between to retain moisture.

    With proper storage, your fried rice stays delicious for quick and easy meals!

    In a spoon full of Chicken and shrimp fried rice over a serving bowl.

    Top Tips for Perfect homemade chicken shrimp fried rice everytime:

    1. Use cold, day-old rice for the best texture.
    2. If using fresh rice, let it cool completely before frying.
    3. Break up clumps before adding it to the pan to ensure even frying.
    4. Sear chicken, shrimp, or tofu separately, then set them aside to avoid overcooking. Add them back at the end.
    5. Cook on high heat to achieve that signature wok-fried aroma. It doesn’t mean you need to use only wok, any heavy bottom skillet should work.
    6. After adding rice to the pan, let it sit for 30-60 seconds before stirring to develop a crispy texture. Don’t skip this step!

    FAQ

    Can I use fresh rice instead of day-old rice?

    Yes, but for the best texture, spread freshly cooked rice on a tray and refrigerate it for at least 30 minutes before stir-frying. This helps remove excess moisture and prevents mushiness.

    Can I make fried rice without soy sauce?

    Yes! Substitute with coconut aminos, tamari (gluten-free option), or a mix of salt and sesame oil for flavor.

    Can I make fried rice vegetarian or vegan?

    Absolutely! Swap the chicken/shrimp for tofu, add more veggies, and use soy sauce or coconut aminos instead of oyster sauce.

    Can I add other proteins to fried rice?

    Yes! You can try it with beef, salmon, pork, or even scrambled eggs for extra protein and flavor.

    What’s the best type of rice for fried rice?

    Jasmine rice is the best choice for fluffy, non-sticky fried rice. Basmati rice also works well, while brown rice adds a healthier twist with a slightly chewy texture.

    Can I use frozen chicken or shrimp in this fried rice recipe?

    Yes, you can use frozen chicken or shrimp in this fried rice recipe! But make sure you thaw them completely before using them in the recipe. After thawing, use a paper towel to remove excess moisture to prevent the shrimp/chicken from becoming watery while stir-frying.

    Can I add any other vegetables to the fried rice?

    Yes! You can add a variety of vegetables to your fried rice for extra flavor, texture, and nutrition. Few examples are: corn, bell pepper, cabbage, broccoli, mushrooms, zucchini, etc.,

    Horizontal image of Chicken and shrimp fried rice recipe served in a warm bowl in a pink background.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with this chicken shrimp fried rice recipe:

    Chicken and shrimp fried rice is placed in a serving bowl, the skillet the fried rice is peeking. Soy sauce is placed in a dipping saucer along with the green onions in a wooden bowl.

    Chicken and Shrimp Fried Rice

    Abi Guna
    If you're craving a homemade, restaurant-quality meal, this chicken and shrimp fried rice is a must-try! The combination of seafood and poultry makes it a flavor-packed, protein-rich meal that’s quick, easy, and better than takeout.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes
    Course Dinner, lunch, Main Course
    Cuisine Asian, Chinese
    Servings 4 people
    Calories 413 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large Skillet
    • Serving Bowls
    • Measuring spoons and cups

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons oil divided
    • 1 cup chicken breast or thighs diced (approx 5 ounces)
    • 1 cup medium shrimp peeled and deveined (approx 4 ounces)
    • 1 teaspoon salt divided
    • 1 teaspoon black pepper divided
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 teaspoon ginger minced
    • ½ cup yellow onion chopped
    • ¾ cup fresh/frozen carrots and peas thawed
    • 3 cups cooked rice I used leftover Jasmine rice - a day old
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon oyster sauce
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • 2 green onions chopped (for garnish)

    Instructions
     

    • Heat 1 tablespoon of oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
    • Add the diced chicken, season with ½ teaspoon salt and pepper, and cook for 4-5 minutes, until fully cooked. Remove from the pan and set aside.
    • In the same pan, add the shrimp, season with ½ teaspoon salt and pepper, and cook for 1-2 minutes per side, until pink and opaque. Remove from the pan and set aside.
    • To the same pan, add the remaining 1 tablespoon of oil and sauté the garlic, ginger, and onion until fragrant.
    • Next, add the carrots and peas, stirring for 2-3 minutes until slightly tender.
    • Stir in the cooked rice along with the chicken, mixing well.
    • Pour in the soy sauce, oyster sauce, and sesame oil, stirring until everything is evenly coated. Continue mixing for 3-5 minutes until well combined.
    • Sprinkle with chopped green onions and serve hot. Enjoy!

    Notes

    1. For the best texture, use cold, day-old rice to prevent it from becoming mushy.
    2. Fry chicken and shrimp in batches if needed to ensure each of them cooks evenly and gets a good sear.
    3. Add cashews or peanuts for a nutty crunch, if desired.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 413kcalCarbohydrates: 39.3gProtein: 45.7gFat: 12.7gSaturated Fat: 1.2gCholesterol: 237mgSodium: 1087mgFiber: 1.1gSugar: 1.7gCalcium: 51mgIron: 4mg
    Keyword Chicken, Dinner, fried rice, one pan, Shrimp
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you're craving a homemade, restaurant-quality meal, this fried rice with shrimp and chicken is a must-try! If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins

    by 7 Comments

    Get ready for a delicious treat! These Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins are soft, moist, and naturally sweet from ripe bananas and juicy blackberries. They’re perfect for breakfast or a quick snack!

    Banana blackberry oatmeal muffins placed in a plate on a warm background with fresh blackberries behind.

    Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins provide a harmony of flavors and health benefits that are welcome in any home. Bananas help create wonderful moisture, while the whole berries offer a tangy zest. Serve these to children and friends and watch them want more. These fruit muffins are exquisitely irresistible.

    If you love banana muffins, you’ll want to try my family’s favorite Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins—rich, decadent, and perfect for any occasion!

    Looking for more oatmeal recipes? Try my Oatmeal Mug Cake or Oatmeal Chocolate Butterscotch Cookies for a delicious treat!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Close up shot of blackberry banana oatmeal muffins.

    Spring is the perfect time to find just-picked, aromatic blackberries at farmers' markets. Our bodies crave fresh fruit, and these muffins deliver! A cup of blackberries provides nearly 30% of the daily fiber requirement and is packed with essential vitamins and minerals. The fruit also helps keep the muffins moist, preventing them from drying out like many others.

    If you're looking for healthy blackberry muffins, this recipe is a great option, packed with fiber and fresh fruit. Whether you're meal prepping or craving a homemade baked good, this recipe for blackberry muffins is simple and easy to follow. The combination of bananas, oats, and juicy blackberries makes these banana oat muffins a nutritious and satisfying choice for any time of day!

    Why You’ll Love These Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins Recipe

    • Easy to Make – Simple ingredients and minimal prep time make this a no-fuss recipe for any day of the week.
    • Naturally Sweet & Moist – Ripe bananas add natural sweetness and keep the muffins soft and fluffy.
    • Wholesome – Made with rolled oats for added fiber, making them a satisfying snack or breakfast option.
    • Bursting with Juicy Blackberries – Fresh berries are a genuinely sweet indulgence. These fresh blackberries add a delicious tart contrast to the sweetness of bananas.
    • Great for Breakfast or Snacks – Enjoy with a cup of coffee. They not only make a great grab-and-go breakfast, but they are also a healthy snack. 
    • Freezer-Friendly – Make a batch ahead of time and store extras in the freezer for a quick snack anytime!
    Three Banana blackberry oatmeal muffins stacked with fresh blackberries arround and banana is the behind.

    What to Serve with Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins

    These muffins are delicious on their own, but pairing them with the right sides makes for an even better meal or snack! Here are some great options:

    Tea or Coffee or Latte – The warm, comforting flavors of these muffins go beautifully with a cup of fragrant tea or a strong coffee. My Salted Caramel Latte recipe is just perfect to enjoy with these banana blackberry oatmeal muffins! 

    Butter or Spreads – Enjoy them warm with a dab of butter, honey butter, or your favorite fruit jam for extra flavor.

    Fresh Fruits – Serve alongside a bowl of fresh berries, sliced bananas, or a refreshing fruit salad for a light and healthy touch.

    Yogurt or a Parfait – Pair with creamy pudding like my Berry chia seed pudding recipe!

    Smoothie – A fruit smoothie complements these muffins perfectly, adding extra nutrients and freshness to your meal.

    The banana blackberry oatmeal muffins sliced into halves to show the texture of the muffins.

    How to Quickly Ripen Bananas for Muffins

    You don’t have ripe bananas? No worries, I’ve got you covered! To quickly ripen bananas for muffins using the oven method, follow these steps:

    Preheat the Oven – Set your oven to 300°F (150°C).
    Place Bananas on a Baking Sheet – Keep them in their peels and arrange them on a parchment-lined baking sheet.
    Bake for 15-20 Minutes – Bake until the peels turn completely black or light black spots starts to appear and the bananas become soft.
    Cool & Use – Let them cool for a few minutes, then peel and mash for your muffins!

    This method enhances their natural sweetness, making them ideal for baking.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients laid out for banana blackberry oatmeal muffins in a warm backdrop.
    • Banana - Ripe bananas add natural sweetness and moisture, making the muffins soft and flavorful. The riper the banana, the better the flavor!
    • Oats - Rolled oats provides a hearty texture and a boost of fiber, giving the muffins a chewy and slightly nutty taste.
    • All-purpose flour - The main structure-building ingredient, ensuring the muffins hold their shape while staying soft and tender.
    • Brown sugar - Adds moisture and a rich caramel-like sweetness due to its molasses content, enhancing the overall flavor.
    • White sugar - Balances the sweetness and helps with browning, giving the muffins a slightly crisp top.
    • Cinnamon - A warm spice that complements the banana.
    • Baking powder - A leavening agent that helps the muffins rise, making them light and fluffy.
    • Baking soda - Works alongside the baking powder and the acidity of the bananas to create an even better rise.
    • Salt - Enhances the flavors of the other ingredients.
    • Eggs - Provides structure, moisture, and helps bind the ingredients together for a smooth batter.
    • Oil - Keeps the muffins moist and tender without adding extra flavor—vegetable or canola oil works well. I have used vegetable oil here.
    • Milk - Adds moisture and helps create a soft crumb, ensuring the muffins don’t turn out too dense. I have used whole milk (full fat) for this recipe.
    • Vanilla extract - Enhances the overall flavor with a subtle warmth and sweetness.
    • Blackberries - Adds bursts of juicy sweetness and a slight tartness, complementing the bananas and cinnamon beautifully. I have used fresh blackberries here.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to Make Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins

    Making Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins is simple! Mash the bananas, then mix the dry ingredients in one bowl and the wet ingredients in another. Combine everything, stirring gently to avoid overmixing, and fold in the blackberries. Scoop the batter into a lined or greased muffin tin and bake. The step-by-step images below help you for easy understanding to create these beautiful muffins!

    A hand is mashing the banana with a fork in a white bowl for making the muffins.
    In a bowl mash the bananas.
    A hand is mixing the dry ingredients using a whisk for making the banana oatmeal muffins recipe.

    Mix the dry ingredients in a medium bowl.

    In a large white bowl the wet ingredients are being mixed with a whisk for making Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins.

    The liquid ingredients are mixed in a large bowl.

    The wet and dry ingredients being mixed in white bowl for Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins recipe.

    Add the dry ingredients mixture to the wet ingredients mixture and mix them gently.

    The flour coated blackberries are added to the muffin batter for making Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins.

    Add the blackberries and gently fold them into the muffin batter.

    Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffin batter is poured in a muffin pan and ready to bake.

    Top the muffins with oats and fresh blackberries before baking.

    The muffins should be golden brown on top and slightly firm to the touch. Once baked, let them cool in the pan for a few minutes before transferring them to a wire rack to cool completely. This helps them set and keeps them from becoming too dense.

    Now, they’re ready to enjoy! These muffins are soft, moist, and packed with flavor—perfect for breakfast, snacks, or even dessert. For extra guidance, check out the step-by-step video in the recipe card to see exactly how they come together. That’s it! A quick and delicious treat with minimal effort.

    Group of banana blackberry oatmeal muffin placed in a warm backdrop with fresh blackberries arround and banana is the behind.

    Hint: Toss the sliced blackberries in a little flour before adding them to the batter. This helps prevent them from sinking to the bottom while baking.

    Variations and Substitutions

    These banana and blackberry muffins are a delicious and wholesome treat, perfect for breakfast or a snack, but these muffins can be tweaked to your specific tastes and needs:

    1. For a gluten-free treat, use gluten-free flour. Also, check to ensure that the oats you are using are gluten-friendly – not all of them are.
    2. Plant-based milk and substituting flax seeds for the eggs will keep these muffins vegan.
    3. Feel free to substitute maple syrup for sugar.
    4. Blackberries are a treasure, but if they are unavailable, strawberries, which ripen in April, and blueberries, which ripen in May, can easily be used.

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowls – For combining dry and wet ingredients separately before mixing them together.
    • Whisk & Spatula – A whisk helps blend the wet ingredients, while a spatula ensures everything is well mixed without overworking the batter.
    • Measuring Cups & Spoons – Essential for accurate ingredient measurements.
    • Muffin Pan – A standard 12-cup muffin pan is ideal for evenly sized muffins.
    • Muffin Liners– Use paper or silicone liners for easy removal and less cleanup.
    • Ice Cream Scoop  – For evenly filling the muffin cups.
    Single banana blackberry oatmeal muffin placed in a plate with fresh blackberries arround and banana is the behind.

    Storing Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins

    Room Temperature – These muffins stay fresh for up to 2 days when stored in an airtight container.

    Refrigeration – Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days to maintain freshness.

    Freezing – Freeze for up to 3 months in a freezer-safe bag or container. Thaw at room temperature or warm in the microwave for a quick treat. Thats why I say its BEST for meal prep!

     The banana in the muffins helps keep them moist, even when stored for later!

    Top Tips for Preparing the Best Banana Blackberry Muffins

    1. For the best-sized muffin, use an ice cream scoop to fill your muffin cup with batter.
    2. If you are a fan of large-domed muffin heads, here’s the secret:  Fill the muffin cup three-quarters to the top to get that large “muffin head” everyone loves. It also helps to fill only half the cups to release more heat into the muffin pan. That means making a second batch, but large muffin heads are desired by all.
    3. Bananas are at their sweetest when they are overripe. Even a few brown spots are fine.
    4. While this muffin is all about freshness, you can use frozen berries in an emergency. Ensure that they are completely thawed before incorporating them into the batter.
    5. If your muffins seem dry, take a few minutes off the baking time or lower the oven temperature a bit. These Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins should be brimming with moisture.
    Horizontal Image of banana blackberry oatmeal muffin placed in a plate with fresh blackberries arround and banana is the behind.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen blackberries instead of fresh?

    Yes you can! If using frozen blackberries, do not thaw them before adding to the batter to prevent excess moisture. Add them directly from the freezer to the muffin batter.

    How can I make these banana muffins healthier?

    Use whole wheat flour instead of all-purpose flour, replace sugar with honey or maple syrup, and opt for Greek yogurt instead of oil. These substitutions will help to create a healthier muffin version.

    Can I make these blackberry muffins gluten-free?

    Absolutely! Swap the all-purpose flour for a gluten-free flour blend and ensure your oats are labeled gluten-free.

    Can I use a different fruit instead of blackberries and follow the same recipe?

    Yes! Try blueberries, raspberries, chopped strawberries, or even diced apples for a tasty variation.

    Why are my oatmeal muffins turned dense?

    Over Mixing the batter can make muffins dense. Stir until just combined to keep them light and fluffy. Use a spatula to do this job!

    Flatlay image of banana blackberry oatmeal muffins in a warm background with fresh blackberries around.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffin recipe:

    Square image of Single banana blackberry oatmeal muffin placed in a plate with fresh blackberries arround and banana is the behind.

    Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins

    Abi Guna
    Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins are soft, moist, and naturally sweet, made with ripe bananas, juicy blackberries, and hearty oats. Perfect for breakfast or a wholesome snack! 
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 muffins
    Calories 201 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowls
    • Whisk
    • Spatula
    • Ice cream scoop
    • Muffin Pan
    • Cooling rack

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 medium ripe bananas mashed (about a cup)
    • 1 ½ cup rolled oats I have used whole grain rolled oats
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour + 2 tablespoons
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar packed
    • ⅓ cup granulated white sugar
    • 1 ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 2 medium eggs at room temperature
    • ⅓ cup oil any flavorless oil
    • ½ cup milk I have used whole milk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 cup fresh blackberries cut into halved

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F (190°C). Line a muffin tin with cupcake liners and set it aside.
    • In a medium bowl, mash the bananas with a fork until smooth. Set aside.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the oats, 1 cup of flour, brown sugar, white sugar, baking soda, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt.
    • In another bowl, beat the eggs using a whisk until just mixed. Add the oil, milk, and vanilla extract, and stir to combine.
    • Add the mashed bananas to the wet ingredients and mix until smooth.
    • Gradually add the dry ingredients into the wet mixture, stirring until just combined.
    • Meanwhile, toss the blackberries with the remaining 2 tablespoons of flour to prevent them from sinking in the batter.
    • Gently fold in the blackberries, being careful not to overmix.
    • Divide the batter evenly into the muffin cups, filling each almost to the top.
    • Place the muffin tray in the oven and bake for 20–22 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Allow the muffins to cool in the pan for 5 minutes, then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.
    • Enjoy warm or store in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

    Video

    Notes

    1. Lightly tossing blackberries in flour helps prevent them from sinking to the bottom of the muffins.
    2. Stir until just combined to keep the muffins light and fluffy. Overmixing can make them dense.
    3. The riper the bananas, the sweeter and more flavorful your muffins will be.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 muffinCalories: 201kcalCarbohydrates: 28gProtein: 5.3gFat: 5.6gSaturated Fat: 1.1gCholesterol: 62mgSodium: 1644mgPotassium: 177mgFiber: 2.6gSugar: 9.6g
    Keyword Baked, banana, blackberries, muffins, oatmeal
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins (Bakery style Recipe)

    by 5 Comments

    There’s nothing better than the smell of moist Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins baking in the oven—don’t you agree? These muffins are soft, moist, and packed with rich chocolate chunks in every bite. They make an absolutely delicious treat, perfect for breakfast or a snack any time of the day! Recipe includes how-to do VIDEO in the recipe card!

    Banana chocolate chunk muffins in a marble surface, banana in the background.

    No more wasting overripe brown bananas—turn them into something delicious! These best ever muffins, made with ripe bananas for natural sweetness, are the great way to use up leftover bananas while treating yourself to a tasty dessert. Enjoy them warm with melted chocolate oozing out or grab one on the go—they’re a simple, satisfying treat for breakfast, snack time, or whenever you need a sweet bite!

    Fan of banana muffins, have a look at my Banana Blackberries Oatmeal Muffins recipe!

    Do you love a sweet breakfast like these muffins? Then you should try Oatmeal Mug Cake, Oatmeal Chocolate Chip Butterscotch Cookies, and Berry Chia Seed Pudding next!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    I love the combination of dark chocolate and semi-sweet chocolate in my desserts, like my popular Dark Chocolate Almond Fudge. But if you don’t have both varieties, simply use 1 cup of semi-sweet chocolate chunks or 1 cup of dark chocolate or bittersweet chocolate  instead.

    Whether you call them banana & chocolate muffins or a chocoholic’s dream, they’re perfect for breakfast, snacks, or even dessert. Instead of regular chocolate chips, this recipe uses choc chip chunks for an extra gooey texture that melts beautifully into the muffins. Easy to make and full of flavor, these muffins will quickly become a favorite in your kitchen!

    Banana chocolate chunks muffins placed beautifully, banana placed in the side.

    Why You’ll Love This Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffin Recipes

    These banana and chocolate muffins are soft, moist, and loaded with rich chocolate chunks in every bite similar to chocolate chip banana bread. But that is not the only reason you will love the recipe, below are some more reasons to love this best muffin recipe you came across on the internet today!

    • Easy to Make – Simple ingredients and no fancy equipment needed—just a whisk to bring it all together to make fluffy muffins!
    • Naturally Sweetened – Ripe bananas add natural sweetness, reducing the need for extra sugar, which is always a plus!
    • Loaded with Chocolate – Rich chunks of chocolate that melt into every bite for a delicious treat—loved by both kids and adults!
    • Soft and Moist – These muffins are perfectly tender and stay fresh for days. A foolproof recipe every time!
    • Perfect Anytime – Enjoy them for breakfast, as a snack, or even as a dessert. Best way to use the overripped bananas.
    • Freezer-Friendly – Make a batch ahead and store them for a quick grab-and-go option. I do this all the time—it’s the BEST meal prep recipe for stress-free mornings!
    Showing the inner texture of the banana chocolate chunks muffins where chocolate oozing out.

    Chocolate Chunk Banana Muffins Are Best Served With

    • A Hot Cup of Coffee, Tea, or Latte – The rich chocolate and banana flavors pair perfectly with a warm drink. My Salted Caramel Latte recipe is a great match for these Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins!
    • Milk – Classic combination for a creamy, refreshing contrast. My daughter loves this combination.
    • Peanut Butter or Almond Butter – A spread of nut butter enhances the flavor and adds a satisfying richness. A perfect way to enjoy these bakery style muffins!
    • Fresh Berries – Strawberries, raspberries, or blueberries add a fresh, tart contrast.

    Why Use Chocolate Chunks Instead of Chocolate Chips in Muffins?

    While chocolate chips work well, chocolate chunks take these easy Banana Muffins to the next level! Here are some reasons.

    1. Chocolate chunks melt more evenly and create gooey chocolate pockets, while chocolate chips hold their shape due to stabilizers.
    2. Chunks provide a more intense chocolate experience in every bite since they are often made from higher-quality chocolate.
    3. The irregular shape of chunks gives muffins a more rustic, homemade, and bakery-style appearance.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients of banana chocolate chunks muffins placed in a marble surface.
    • All-purpose flour – Provides the structure and base for the muffins, giving them a soft yet sturdy texture.
    • Baking powder – Acts as a leavening agent to help the muffins rise and become light and fluffy.
    • Baking soda – Works alongside the baking powder to create an airy texture.
    • Salt – Enhances the overall flavor by balancing the sweetness and bringing out the richness of the chocolate.
    • Banana- Adds natural sweetness, moisture, and a rich banana flavor to the muffins.
    • White sugar – Sweetens the muffins while helping to create a tender crumb.
    • Greek yogurt - Provides moisture and a slight tang, making the muffins extra soft while also enhancing their structure.
    • Oil - Keeps the muffins moist and tender; options like vegetable oil, canola, or avocado oil work well. I haven't tried with olive oil.
    • Vanilla extract – Enhances the aroma and deepens the flavor of the muffins.
    • Eggs - Helps bind the ingredients together while contributing to the muffins' light and fluffy texture.
    • Dark chocolate chunks – Adds intense, slightly bitter chocolate flavor that balances the sweetness of the muffins.
    • Semi-sweet chocolate chunks - Creates melty chocolate pockets throughout the muffins, adding texture and extra chocolatey goodness.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Close up shot of chocolate oozing from the banana chocolate chunks muffins.

    Substitutions

    • Flour - Swap all-purpose flour with whole wheat flour for a healthier option or gluten-free flour blend for a gluten-free version.
    • Sugar - Use coconut sugar, honey, or maple syrup for a natural sweetener.
    • Greek Yogurt - Substitute with sour cream, regular yogurt for similar creamy texture.
    • Oil - Swap for melted butter, coconut oil, or applesauce for a lower-fat version.
    • Eggs - Use flax eggs (1 tablespoon flaxseed + 2.5 tablespoon water per egg) or unsweetened applesauce (¼ cup per egg) for an egg-free version.
    • Chocolate Chunks - Substitute with chocolate chips, white chocolate, or chopped nuts for variety.

    How to make Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins

    These Chocolate Chip Banana Muffins are the perfect mix of rich chocolate and naturally sweet bananas, creating a soft, moist, and flavorful treat. The combination of dark and semi-sweet chocolate chunks melts beautifully into the muffins, making every bite extra indulgent.

    Using overripe bananas not only enhances the sweetness but also adds moisture from the mashed bananas, ensuring a tender texture without needing extra butter or oil. Whether you’re a fan of chocolatey desserts or just looking for a way to use up those ripe bananas, this recipe is a must-try!

    What makes these muffins even better is how simple they are to prepare. With just a few basic ingredients and minimal prep time, you can whip up a batch in no time. The muffins rise beautifully in the oven, thanks to a quick temperature adjustment that gives them a bakery-style domed top.

    They’re perfect for breakfast, an afternoon snack, or a sweet treat after dinner. Plus, they store well, making them great for meal prep. Enjoy them fresh out of the oven or warm them up later for that just-baked goodness!

    The step-by-step instructions help you make perfectly moist chocolate chunk muffins every time! (Don't forget to checkout the banana chocolate chunk muffins recipe VIDEO in the recipe card)

    Dry ingredients added to a white bowl to make banana chocolate chunk muffins.

    Dry ingredients add the bow; flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt.

    Banna being mashed with a fork in a large bowl for Banana Chocolate Chunks Muffins

    In a large bowl add the bananas and mash it using a fork.

    Wet ingredients added and mixed with a whisk for Banana Chocolate Chunks Muffins recipe.

    Add Greek yogurt, oil, sugar and Vanilla extract. Mix well along with the eggs.

    Dry ingredients add the wet mixture for Banana Chocolate Chunks Muffins recipe.

    Dry ingredient mixture added the wet ingredients. Mix with a spatula.

    Chocolate chunks added to the muffin batter.

    Add the chocolate chunks to the muffin batter and fold them gently.

    Banana Chocolate Chunks Muffin batter added to the muffin panusing an ice cream scoop.

    Using an ice cream scoop divide the batter equally into the muffin pan cavities.

    (Optional: You can add turbinado sugar on muffin tops or extra chocolate chunks for that gooey part). Place the muffin tray in the preheated oven and bake at 425°F (218°C) for 5 minutes. This initial high heat helps the muffins rise quickly, creating a beautiful domed top. After 5 minutes, reduce the oven temperature to 350°F (177°C)and continue baking for another 13–15 minutes. The muffins are done when a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean or with just a few moist crumbs.

    Once baked, remove the tray from the oven and let the muffins cool in the pan for about 5 minutes—this helps them set and makes them easier to handle. Then, carefully transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely. This step ensures they don’t become soggy from trapped heat. Enjoy warm, or store them for later to enjoy a delicious treat anytime! 

    Banana Chocolate chunk Muffins baked in a muffin pan close up shot.

    Hint: If you don’t have cupcake liners, simply grease the muffin tin with baking spray or a light coat of butter to prevent sticking. This gives the muffins a slightly crispier edge while still making them easy to remove after baking! 

    Variations

    • For Gluten-Free Versions – Use a gluten-free flour blend instead of all-purpose flour for a gluten-free banana muffins version.
    • Nutty Variations - Add ½ cup chopped walnuts, pecans, or almonds for extra crunch. I love crunchy top muffins!
    • Peanut Butter Banana Muffins – Swirl in ¼ cup peanut butter for a rich, nutty flavor.
    • Double Chocolate Banana Muffins – Mix 2 tablespoons cocoa powder into the batter for an extra chocolatey treat. Who doesn't love extra chocolate!

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowls – One for dry ingredients and another for wet ingredients.
    • Fork – To mash the bananas until smooth.
    • Whisk – For mixing the wet ingredients.
    • Spatula  – To fold in the chocolate chunks and gently mix the batter.
    • Measuring Cup & Spoons – For accurate ingredient measurements.
    • Muffin Pan – A standard 12-cup muffin pan for baking.
    • Muffin Liners – To prevent sticking and make cleanup easier.
    • Ice Cream Scoop  – For evenly filling the muffin cups.
    Stack of banana chocolate chunks muffins one above the other in a marble surface.

    How to Store Banana Chocolate Chip Muffins

    Room Temperature - Store your delicious banana muffins in an airtight container and keep at room temperature for up to 3 days in a cool, dry place.

    Refrigerator - If storing longer, place muffins in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 1 week. Warm them in the microwave for 10–15 seconds before serving.

    Freezer  - Wrap each muffin individually in plastic wrap or freezer bag and place them in a freezer-safe bag. Freeze for up to 3 months. To reheat, microwave a frozen muffin for 30 seconds to 1 minute, or let it thaw at room temperature.

    My Top Tips for Preparing Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins

    These simple tips will help you achieve bakery-style, soft, and chocolate-packed banana muffin recipe every time! 

    1. Use Overripe Bananas – The riper the bananas, the sweeter and more flavorful your muffins will be. Look for bananas with brown spots!
    2. Mash Bananas Well – Mash until smooth to ensure even distribution in the batter for soft and moist muffins.
    3. Don’t Overmix the Batter – Stir just until combined; overmixing can lead to dense, tough muffins instead of light and fluffy ones.
    4. Room Temperature Ingredients – Use room-temperature eggs and Greek yogurt for a smoother batter and even baking.
    5. Start with a High Oven Temperature – Baking at 425°F (218°C) for the first 5 minutes helps create a bakery-style muffin top. Then, reduce the temperature for even baking.
    6. Fill Muffin Cups Almost to the Top – This gives the muffins a nice rise and a domed top.
    7. Let Muffins Cool Before Removing – Allow muffins to cool for 5 minutes in the pan, then transfer them to a wire rack. This helps them set properly.
    Horizontal image of banana chocolate chunk muffins placed beautifully on a marble surface, banana's in the background.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen bananas?

    I always prefer using fresh bananas. But, Yes frozen bananas work well too. Thaw frozen bananas completely, drain any excess liquid, and mash them before using.

    What type of chocolate works best?

    Dark, semi-sweet, or even milk chocolate chunks work great. For extra richness, use a combination of chocolate chips and chopped chocolate bars like I did in this recipe.

    Why did my banana muffins turn out dense?

    Over Mixing the batter can lead to dense muffins. Stir just until the ingredients are combined for a light, fluffy texture.

    Can I make these muffins without eggs?

    Yes! Substitute each egg with ¼ cup unsweetened applesauce or a flax egg (1 tablespoon flaxseed meal + 2.5 tablespoons water).

    Can I make these muffins gluten-free?

    Yes! Swap the all-purpose flour for a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend. Avoid almond or coconut flour, as they absorb moisture differently.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Banana Chocolate Chunks Muffins recipe:

    Banana chocolate chunk muffins stacked one above the other.

    Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins

    Abi Guna
    These Banana Chocolate Chunk Muffins are soft, moist, and packed with rich, melty chocolate in every bite. Easy to make and freezer-friendly, these muffins are a delicious way to use up overripe bananas while satisfying your sweet tooth!
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 Muffins
    Calories 237 kcal

    Equipment

    • Whisk
    • Muffin Pan
    • Cooling rack
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Measuring spoons and cups

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 2 medium ripe bananas mashed (about 1 cup)
    • ¾ cup granulated white sugar
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt at room temperature
    • ⅓ cup oil any flavorless oil
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 2 eggs at room temperature
    • ½ cup dark chocolate chunks
    • ½ cup semi- sweet chocolate bar roughly chopped into chunks

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 425°F (218°C). Line a muffin tin with cupcake liners and set it aside.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
    • In a large bowl, add the banana and mash it with a fork until smooth.
    • Add the sugar, Greek yogurt, oil, and vanilla extract to the mashed banana and mix well.
    • Add the eggs one at a time, whisking until just combined.
    • Gradually add the dry ingredients into the wet mixture, stirring until just combined.
    • Gently fold in the chocolate chunks, being careful not to overmix.
    • Divide the batter evenly into the muffin cups, filling each almost to the top.
    • Place the muffin tray in the oven and bake at 425°F (218°C) for 5 minutes. Then, reduce the oven temperature to 350°F (177°C) and bake for an additional 13–15 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Allow the muffins to cool in the pan for 5 minutes, then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.
    • Enjoy warm or store in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

    Video

    Notes

    1. Use overripe bananas for the best sweetness and moisture.
    2. Avoid overmixing the batter to keep the muffins light and fluffy.
    3. Starting at 425°F  for 5 minutes helps the muffins rise quickly, giving them a bakery-style dome.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 muffinCalories: 237kcalCarbohydrates: 33.5gProtein: 4gFat: 10.6gSaturated Fat: 4.5gCholesterol: 44mgSodium: 2448mgPotassium: 160mgFiber: 1.4gSugar: 23.2gCalcium: 33mg
    Keyword banana, breakfast, chocolate, easy desserts, muffins
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Pesto Butter Salmon

    by 3 Comments

    Pesto Butter Salmon is a dish full of rich and bold flavors. The salmon is tender and flaky, with a buttery smoothness that melts in your mouth. The homemade pesto adds a fresh, garlicky, and slightly nutty taste that perfectly complements the richness of the salmon. Together, the butter and pesto create a creamy, flavorful coating that makes every bite irresistible.

    Baked Pesto Salmon Butter in a baking dish close up shot ganrished with basil and lemon wedges.

    This Pesto Butter Salmon recipe is perfect for busy evenings or special dinners. It’s simple to make and tastes amazing. With just a few ingredients; fresh salmon, basil pesto, and butter—you can whip up a dish that feels fancy but is easy to prepare at home. The salmon cooks to perfection, blending beautifully with the fresh, garlicky pesto and the richness of butter. Whether you need a quick meal or something to impress your guests, this recipe is a great choice. It’s easy, versatile, and bound to become a favorite in your kitchen.

    If you've been following me for a while, you know I’m a big fan of pesto sauce. One of the most popular recipes on my blog is my Pesto sauce without pine nuts. Using that sauce, I created my kids' favorite, Pesto Ricotta Pasta, which is always a huge hit. Now, I’m excited to introduce my husband’s favorite dish featuring pesto sauce: Pesto Butter Salmon. It’s a simple dish that feels special and tastes amazing, perfect for any meal.

    Are you a fan of high-protein salmon recipes? Then you should definitely try my Blackened Salmon Bites and Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad recipes!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Pesto Butter Salmon served in a white oval platter garnished with basil and lemon wedges.

    Why You Will Love This Recipe for Baked Salmon with Pesto Sauce

    • Quick and Easy: The indulgent savoriness of salmon meets the rich indulgence of pesto butter for true baked goodness that can be prepared in 15 minutes.
    • Rich and Unique Flavor: It is extraordinary as it blends butter and pesto to create a unique and distinctive salmon topped with compound butter. 
    • Healthy and Delicious: Packed with omega-3 fatty acids and nutrients, balancing richness with health benefits. There's lots of rich butter here, and it’s all healthy.
    • Flavor-Infused Perfection: Garlicky pesto and butter cover the salmon while it bakes and infuses it with amazing flavor.
    •  Versatile Dinner Option: Salmon, the health-giving fish with its abundance of omega-3 fatty acids, is welcome at any dinner table.

    How to Make Pesto Butter

    Pesto butter recipe is so simple and easy to make, and all you need are just two ingredients: pesto sauce and butter. Place the softened butter in a small bowl and add the pesto sauce. Mix them together until smooth and well combined. Use the pesto butter right away to top salmon, pasta, bread, or vegetables. You can also wrap it in plastic wrap, roll it into a log, and refrigerate it for later use. This quick and flavorful mixture adds a burst of taste to any dish!

    Flaky pesto butter salmon in a serving plate with a fork.

    What to Serve with Pesto Salmon

    Salmon with Pesto Sauce is easily adaptable to many side dishes. 

    Salmon and Its Health Benefits

    Salmon isn't just delicious—it’s packed with health benefits for you and your family, thanks to its rich content of omega-3 fatty acids. Here's how salmon supports your health:

    Health Benefits

    • Lowers Cholesterol: Helps maintain healthy cholesterol levels.
    • Regulates Blood Pressure: Supports cardiovascular health.
    • Reduces Stroke Risk: Contributes to improved blood flow and vascular health.
    • Heart Health: Promotes overall heart function and reduces the risk of heart disease.
    • Healthy Skin: Omega-3s and essential nutrients nourish and protect your skin.
    • Stronger Bones: Provides vitamin D and other minerals essential for bone health.
    Salmon Pesto butter served in a plate with roasted carrots and asparagus in a orange plate.

    How to Make Homemade Pesto Sauce

    I’ve crafted a Pesto sauce recipe without pine nuts, using walnuts as a budget-friendly alternative. If you’re looking for a classic basil pesto sauce, follow the recipe below to create your own:

    Ingredients

    • 3 ½ cups fresh basil leaves
    • 2 cups toasted, chopped walnuts (or substitute with pine nuts or your favorite nuts)
    • 5 garlic cloves
    • ¼ cup grated Parmigiano-Reggiano (use genuine block cheese, not pre-grated packages; vegans can substitute with nutritional yeast)
    • ½ tsp lemon juice (or to taste)
    • 1 cup oil (coconut or olive oil works well)
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Directions

    1. Combine Ingredients: Puree the basil, nuts, and garlic in a food processor until finely chopped.
    2. Add Lemon Juice: Drizzle lemon juice over the mixture for a bright, fresh flavor.
    3. Incorporate Oil: Slowly add the oil while processing until the mixture achieves a smooth consistency.

    Season: Adjust salt and pepper to taste.

    Ingredients

    Pesto Butter Salmon Recipe Ingredients laid out.
    • Salmon fillets (cut into four portions)- Salmon is the star of the dish, providing a rich source of omega-3 fatty acids, protein, and a buttery texture that pairs perfectly with pesto. Cutting it into portions ensures even cooking and ease of serving.
    • Salt - Enhances the natural flavors of the salmon and balances the richness of the butter and pesto.
    • Black pepper - Adds a mild kick and earthy undertones to complement the savory profile of the dish.
    • Unsalted butter - Softened butter blends effortlessly with pesto, creating a creamy topping that infuses the salmon with richness and moisture.
    • Basil pesto - The vibrant, garlicky, and herbaceous flavor of pesto adds depth and complements the natural flavor of the salmon.
    • Lemon juice - Brightens the dish with a tangy note, balancing the richness of the butter and pesto.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make Salmon with pesto butter

    Looking for a delicious and easy recipe for salmon with pesto? This dish combines tender, flaky salmon with the rich, herby flavors of pesto and creamy butter. Check out the step-by-step instructions below to make it for perfect weeknight meal.

    Pesto sauce and butter in a bowl.

    In a small bowl combine pesto sauce and butter.

    Pesto butter in a bowl.

    Mix until well combined. Salmon Pesto Butter is ready , set it aside.

    Seasoned salmon filets with salt and pepper in a baking dish.

    Season the salmon with salt and pepper.

    Pesto butter added to the salmon and placed in a baking dish.

    Pesto butter added to the salmon generously on top.

    Bake the salmon in the preheated oven for 12–15 minutes, or until it is fully cooked and flakes easily with a fork. The cooking time may vary slightly depending on the thickness of the fillets, so keep an eye on them to ensure they are perfectly done. Once baked, carefully transfer the salmon to serving plates to maintain its shape and juices. Garnish with fresh lemon slices for a bright, tangy flavor and a sprinkle of fresh basil for added aroma and color. Serve it right away alongside your favorite side dishes, and enjoy a delicious, wholesome meal that’s sure to impress!

    Baked Pesto butter salmon in a baking dish. Garnished with basil. Lemon wedges in a bowl aside.

    Substitution and Variations for Pesto Butter Salmon

    • Fish Alternatives: Sure, you want to use salmon for your salmon with pesto butter, but why not try this recipe with trout, halibut, or cod, as well? Play with the different flavors and adjust the cooking time according to the fish’s thickness.
    • Seasoning Options:Experiment with the seasonings when preparing pesto and salmon. Italian seasoning or a bit of garlic powder can add some zest. 
    • Crunchy Topping:  For a bit of crunch, drizzle the salmon with panko crumbs before placing it in the oven.
    • Lighter Option: This is a very buttery recipe, but you can also prepare it with olive oil.
    • Pesto Butter Versatility: Pesto butter is heavenly on salmon, but it can also be used with pasta, over meat, and as a spread over rolls and bread.

    Equipment

    • Baking Dish: To bake the salmon evenly and retain its juices.
    • Measuring Cups and Spoons: Ensures accurate measurements of ingredients.
    • Mixing Bowl: To combine the pesto butter.
    • Silicone Brush or Spoon: To spread the pesto butter evenly over the salmon.

    How To Store Cooked Salmon

    Refrigeration: Place any leftover pesto butter salmon (you should be so lucky) in an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for two or three days. You don’t want to store any fish longer than that. 

    Freezing: If you are freezing your salmon, let it cool before you do, then wrap it in an airtight bag. It will freeze for three months, but its natural texture may change somewhat.

    Reheating: To reheat the salmon, thaw it overnight in the refrigerator. Place it in a baking dish and warm it in the oven for 10 minutes at 400 degrees.

    CLose up shot of pesto butter with salmon and garnished with lemon wedges in a baking dish.

    Tips For Preparing Pesto Butter Salmon

    1. Make sure the salmon is patted dry for crispier skin.
    2. Use the best pesto you can find. Quality matters. Try the homemade version listed below. It’s my favorite.
    3. Salmon, like most fish, dries easily. Keep an eye on it while it bakes and use a food thermometer to ensure it reaches 125 degrees.

    I probably don’t have to emphasize to my readers that homemade tends to be much tastier than store bought. While decent pesto sauce is readily available at any market, try making your own in just a few steps. This recipe will make approximately 16 servings. Basil is the main ingredient, of course, but the food police won’t come knocking if you run short and need to add a bit of spinach.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen salmon for this recipe?

    Yes, frozen salmon works well. Thaw it completely in the refrigerator before cooking for best results. Use a kitchen towel to remove the excess moisture before using it for the recipe.

    How do you know the salmon is cooked perfectly?

    Salmon is done when it flakes easily with a fork and has an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C).

    Can I substitute the butter with another option?

    Yes, olive oil is a great substitute for butter, offering a lighter and healthier alternative.

    What if I don’t have basil pesto?

    I have already shared my version of basil pesto without pine nuts, but you can make a quick substitute by blending fresh basil, garlic, olive oil, and Parmesan cheese, or try using store-bought pesto alternatives like sun-dried tomato or spinach pesto.

    Can I make this recipe dairy-free?

    Absolutely! Replace butter with a plant-based alternative and use nutritional yeast instead of Parmesan cheese in the pesto.

    Can I prepare this dish in advance?

    Yes, you can prepare the pesto butter mixture and coat the salmon ahead of time. Store it in the refrigerator and bake just before serving.

    How do I make the dish gluten-free?

    The recipe is naturally gluten-free, but double-check your pesto to ensure it doesn’t contain any gluten-based ingredients.

    Horizontal shot of pesto butter salmon served with roasted veggies. Pesto sauce placed in a bowl aside.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with this pesto butter salmon recipe:

    CLose up shot of pesto butter salmon garnished with basil and lemon wedges.

    Pesto Butter Salmon

    Abi Guna
    Pesto Butter Salmon is a quick and flavorful dish featuring tender salmon topped with a creamy blend of pesto and butter. It’s simple to make, rich in taste, and perfect for any meal.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4 people
    Calories 345 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking Dish
    • Mixing Bowl
    • Measuring Spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound salmon fillets cut into four portions
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter softened
    • 4 tablespoons basil pesto homemade or store-bought
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
    • Lemon slices for garnish
    • Fresh basil for garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C). Grease a baking dish with cooking spray and set it aside.
    • Pat the salmon fillets dry with a paper towel, then place them in the prepared baking dish. Season both sides of the salmon with salt and pepper.
    • In a small bowl, mix the softened butter, pesto, and lemon juice until well combined. Spread a generous layer of the pesto butter over the top of each fillet.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for 12-15 minutes, or until the salmon is fully cooked and flakes easily with a fork.
    • Carefully transfer the salmon to plates and garnish with lemon slices and fresh basil. Serve immediately with your favorite sides and enjoy!

    Notes

    • Fresh, wild-caught salmon works best for optimal flavor and texture, but frozen salmon is a great option if thawed properly.
    • Adjust baking time based on the thickness of the salmon fillets to avoid overcooking.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 portionCalories: 345kcalCarbohydrates: 5.2gProtein: 23.1gFat: 27.7gSaturated Fat: 9.5gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 4985mgPotassium: 7mgFiber: 1.1gCalcium: 117mgIron: 1mg
    Keyword Main Dish, Pesto, Salmon
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Blackened Salmon Bites

    by 5 Comments

    If you’re a fan of seafood recipes that are simple yet bursting with flavor, try this easy Blackened salmon bites recipe—it’s sure to become a favorite in your kitchen. Coated with a bold blend of spices and baked to perfection, each bite is smoky, crispy on the outside, and tender on the inside.

    Blackened salmon bites in a bowl with white rice, ganrished with parsley and served with lemon wedges on the sides.

    This dish brings a touch of Creole-inspired flair to your table, making it a fantastic option for weeknight dinners, appetizers, or even meal prep. Ready in just 15 minutes, these salmon bites are a quick, delicious, and healthy way to elevate your seafood game.

    What makes these Blackened Salmon Bites stand out is their bold seasoning. A blend of smoked paprika, garlic powder, and cayenne pepper creates a rich, savory crust that perfectly complements the natural sweetness of the salmon. The high-heat baking method ensures that the salmon stays juicy while achieving the crispy, caramelized exterior that makes blackened dishes so irresistible.

    If you’re looking for a flavorful and easy way to enjoy salmon, try my Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad and Pesto Butter Salmon —it’s perfect for meal prep!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Will Love This Blackened Salmon Bites Recipe

    • Quick and Easy: Ready in just 15 minutes, these salmon bites are perfect for a quick meal or an impressive appetizer.
    • Bold Flavors in Every Bite: Blackened Baked Salmon Bites are the epitome of bold flavors. Cayenne pepper and paprika are blended with other seasonings that blacken the salmon and caramelize the crust to develop a crisp, dark, and savory coating. 
    • Fiery Smoky Delight: These spicy salmon bites create a fiery smoky dance on your tongue. The gentle, sweet richness of the salmon and the heat generated by spices and herbs come together as a seafood masterpiece. Since these are small “bites” instead of fillets, the spices are stretched over a greater surface area for the best effect.
    • Inspired by Creole Cuisine: New Orleans is known for its spicy Creole offerings. It is the logical birthplace of the hot cubed salmon recipes which use a higher-than-usual temperature to achieve the delicious blackening.
    CLose up shot of blackened salmon bites.

    How Nutritious is Salmon?

    We know how delicious baked salmon bites are. Most people love it. Interestingly, it is also one of the healthiest foods available. A simple serving is a mere 200 calories, while wild salmon has even fewer calories – 180. Any salmon is a terrific source of vitamin 12, vitamin D, potassium, and iron. 

    Due to all these nutrients, and the amount of healthy omega-3 fatty acids salmon contains, this easy salmon bites recipe is good for any number of physical disorders, including artery inflammation, blood pressure, and cholesterol levels. It can protect against strokes, heart attacks, and dementia.

    It’s hard to argue against the power of salmon.

    In a oval platter the blackened salmon bites are arranged to serve.

    What to Serve with Your Baked Blackened Salmon Bites

    These salmon bites are versatile and pair well with a variety of dishes. Whether you serve them with roasted vegetables, creamy pasta, or use them as a topping for salads and tacos, these salmon bites are incredibly versatile. They’re also perfect for meal prepping, as they store well and reheat beautifully. Here are some great options to complement their bold, smoky flavor:

    • Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts: The sweet and spicy glaze on roasted Brussels sprouts perfectly complements the smoky blackened salmon, creating a harmonious balance on your plate.
    • Salad Topping: Add them to a fresh salad, like the Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad. This nutritious combination of kale, quinoa, and salmon gets an extra smoky kick with the blackened salmon bites.
    • Roasted Vegetables: Pair them with roasted vegetables like Roasted Carrots and Asparagus or Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower for a flavorful and wholesome side.
    • Cucumber and Avocado: A refreshing side of cucumber and avocado offers a cool contrast to the spiciness of the salmon bites.
    • Fish Tacos: Use the salmon bites as the main filling for delicious and easy fish tacos. Add your favorite toppings for an elevated taco night.
    • Creamy Pasta: Serve alongside a creamy pasta dish like the Pesto Ricotta Pasta for a comforting and indulgent pairing.

    Ingredients

    If you’re wondering how to cook blackened salmon, it’s easier than you might think! Simply prepare the seasoning, toss the salmon in it, and bake to perfection. Check out the ingredients below to create this fantastic recipe!

    Ingredients laid out for blackened salmon recipe.
    • Salmon fillet, skinless, cut into 1-inch cubes: The star of the dish, salmon provides a rich, buttery flavor and tender texture that works beautifully with the bold blackened seasoning. Cutting it into cubes ensures even cooking and maximizes the seasoning coverage.
    • Olive oil: Helps the spices adhere to the salmon and adds a subtle richness, ensuring the cubes stay moist during baking.
    • Smoked paprika: Brings a smoky depth of flavor and vibrant color, essential for achieving that classic blackened taste. If you don't have smoked paprika you can also use regular paprika instead.
    • Garlic powder: Adds a savory, aromatic flavor that enhances the overall seasoning blend.
    • Onion powder: Complements the garlic powder with a mild, slightly sweet flavor.
    • Thyme: Contributes an earthy, herbaceous note that balances the boldness of the spices.
    • Oregano: Adds a subtle, peppery warmth and enhances the complexity of the seasoning blend.
    • Brown sugar: Provides a hint of sweetness that contrasts beautifully with the smoky and spicy elements, helping with caramelization. 
    • Cayenne pepper: Delivers a touch of heat, giving the salmon bites their signature kick.
    • Salt: Enhances the natural flavors of the salmon and the spices, ensuring a well-balanced taste.
    • Black pepper: Adds a mild, earthy spice that complements the seasoning without overpowering it.
    • Lemon wedges: The fresh lemon juice adds a bright, zesty finish that cuts through the richness of the salmon and spices.
    • Parsley: Provides a fresh, vibrant pop of color and a mild herbaceous flavor to balance the bold seasoning.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make Blackened Salmon Bites Recipe

    These bites are also a fantastic option as a baked salmon appetizer, perfect for entertaining or serving at casual gatherings. Whether you’re preparing them for a dinner party or a quick snack, they’re sure to impress with their rich flavor and irresistible texture. Follow the step-by-step instructions below to make them in just a few simple steps!

    In a small white bowl the seasonings are combined for blackened salmon recipe.

    Combine all spices into a same bowl and combine thoroughly.

    Salmon cubes in a white bowl.

    Using a sharp knife cut the salmon into equal cubes and add it to bowl.

    Blackened seasoning added to the salmon cubes.

    Massage the salmon with olive oil and add the prepared seasonings. Toss it.

    Seasoned salmon bites ready to bake in a baking tray.

    Arrange the salmon bites in a baking tray and bake.

    Place the prepared salmon bites in the preheated oven and bake for 12-15 minutes. Keep an eye on them as they cook, and check for doneness by gently pressing with a fork—the salmon should flake easily and appear opaque throughout. Cooking times may vary slightly depending on the thickness of the salmon pieces, so it’s a good idea to check a few minutes early to avoid overcooking. For best results, ensure the edges are crisp and caramelized while the interior remains tender and juicy. Once done, remove the salmon from the oven and let it rest for a minute before serving.

    Baked blackened salmon bites in a baking tray.

    Substitutions and Variations for Baked Blackened Salmon Bites

    • Alternative Fish Options: This baked blackened salmon recipe can be quite flexible. If salmon is not available, try using steelhead trout, which is milder than salmon. 
    • Spice Substitutions: The spices are the key to creating salmon bites. However, don’t let the lack of appropriate spices prevent you from making this recipe with sriracha sauce or sweet chili sauce. Both are ready-to-buy sauces that bring a natural fire to any dish. Cooking a great meal is all about being flexible.
    •  Flexible Protein Choices: If you don’t have salmon, try cutting up leftover chicken and seasoning it with the same spices for a flavorful twist.

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowl: For combining the salmon cubes with olive oil and seasoning.
    • Baking Sheet: A large, rimmed baking sheet for evenly spreading the salmon cubes during baking.
    • Parchment Paper or Aluminum Foil: To line the baking sheet for easy cleanup and to prevent sticking.
    • Sharp Knife and Cutting Board: For trimming and cutting the salmon into evenly sized cubes.
    • Measuring Spoons: To accurately measure the spices and seasonings for the recipe.
    • Tongs or Spatula: For tossing the salmon cubes with seasoning and for flipping them.
    In a white bowl the blackened salmon bites served over white rice, garnish with parsley and lemon wedges.

    Storing Baked Blackened Salmon Bites

    Refrigeration: Salmon is far too delicious to waste a single bite. Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for four days.

    Freezing: If you wish to store the salmon longer, keep it in the freezer for 4 months.

    Reheating Tip: Reheat gently in the oven, air fryer, or skillet to maintain their flavor and texture.

    Key Tips for Blackened Salmon Bites:

    Crispy salmon bites will always be a flavor delight, but you can elevate even these to be their best with just a few simple guidelines.

    1. Fresh salmon will invariably taste better.
    2. Ensure the bites are cut evenly to achieve an even baking.
    3. Do not crowd the baking dish when cooking the salmon bites.
    4. Fish can dry out very quickly. Watch your cooking temperature carefully to get crispy on the outside and juicy and flaky on the inside.
    5. Serve the salmon bites with sauces such as an inviting remoulade, a garlic aioli, or a spicy mayonnaise (add some sriracha to the mayo).
    6. Herbs and spices are the key to a winning recipe for salmon bites. Experiment until you get the best combination for you. Since cayenne is a key spice, adjust it to your desired heat level. The heat can be countered by the brown sugar, and that, too, can be balanced according to taste.
    Blackened salmon bites in a close up shot ganrished with parsley.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen salmon for this recipe?

    Yes, you can use frozen salmon. Make sure to thaw it completely and pat it dry before cutting it into cubes and seasoning.

    What if I don’t have smoked paprika?

    Regular paprika can be used as a substitute, though it won’t have the same smoky flavor. You can add a small amount of chipotle powder for smokiness.

    Can I cook this blackened salmon on the stovetop instead of baking?

    Absolutely! Heat a non-stick skillet over medium-high heat, add a bit of oil, and sear the salmon bites for 2-3 minutes per side until cooked through.

    How to Make Blackened Salmon Bites in an Air Fryer?

    Follow the same instructions up to the seasoning step. Preheat your air fryer to 400°F (200°C) for 3-5 minutes. Place the seasoned salmon cubes in a single layer in the air fryer basket, ensuring they are not overcrowded to allow for even cooking. Air fry the salmon at 400°F (200°C) for 7-10 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through to ensure even browning. The salmon is ready when it flakes easily with a fork and has a crisp, caramelized exterior.

    How do I know when the salmon is done?

    The salmon is fully cooked when it flakes easily with a fork and reaches an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C).

    What are some good dipping sauces to serve with this?

    Try serving with creamy options like garlic aioli, lemon dill sauce, or a spicy sriracha mayo for added flavor when serving as an appetizer for a game day or potluck or any parties!

    What can I use instead of salmon?

    You can substitute salmon with other fish like cod, trout, or even shrimp. Adjust cooking times based on the thickness of the protein.

    Can I make these ahead of time?

    Yes, you can prepare and season the salmon cubes in advance, then bake them just before serving for the best texture and flavor. So I would say these blackened salmon bites are just perfect for weekend meal prep.

    horizontal image of balckened salmon bites in a oval plate with garnishes on the sides.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with this blackened salmon bites recipe:

    Blackened salmon bites in a oval platter arranged beautifully and garnished with parsley and lemon wedges in the side.

    Blackened Salmon Bites

    Abi Guna
    Bold and flavorful Blackened Salmon Bites, coated in a smoky spice blend and baked to perfection. Crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and ready in just 15 minutes—a quick, healthy, and delicious seafood dish!
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 people
    Calories 257 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking Tray 
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Measuring Spoons
    • Aluminium Foil or Parchment Paper

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound salmon fillet skinless, cut into 1-inch cubes
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon smoked paprika
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
    • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
    • 1 teaspoon brown sugar
    • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • Lemon wedges for serving
    • Fresh parsley for garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
    • Pat the salmon cubes dry with a paper towel to remove excess moisture. Place them in a large mixing bowl.
    • Drizzle the salmon cubes with olive oil and toss to coat evenly.
    • In a small bowl, mix together the smoked paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, thyme, oregano, brown sugar, cayenne pepper, salt, and black pepper.
    • Sprinkle the seasoning mix over the salmon and gently toss to coat all the pieces evenly.
    • Arrange the seasoned salmon bites on the prepared baking sheet in a single layer.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for 12-15 minutes, or until the salmon is cooked through and flakes easily with a fork.
    • Transfer the salmon bites to a serving plate. Garnish with fresh parsley and serve with lemon wedges on the sides.

    Notes

    1. Fresh salmon works best for this recipe, but if using frozen salmon, thaw it completely and pat it dry to remove excess moisture.
    2. If you prefer less heat, reduce or avoid the cayenne pepper. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 257kcalCarbohydrates: 0.5gProtein: 32gFat: 12.7gSaturated Fat: 1.8gCholesterol: 73mgSodium: 1836mgPotassium: 3mgSugar: 0.4g
    Keyword Appetizers, Baked, Healthy, Salmon
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this quick and easy blackened salmon bites recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Roasted Carrots and Asparagus

    by 3 Comments

    Looking for a simple yet delicious dish? Try my Roasted Carrots and Asparagus recipe! It combines the earthy sweetness of roasted carrots, the vibrant freshness of asparagus, and the creamy tang of goat cheese to create the perfect side dish.

    Roasted asparagus and carrots in a baking tray garnished with crumbled goat cheese and parsley.

    It's a versatile dish that pairs beautifully with roasted chicken, grilled salmon, or even a holiday feast like Easter or Thanksgiving dinner or for a romantic dinner. Whether you’re planning a quick weeknight meal or a special gathering, this roasted vegetable recipe is the perfect addition to your menu. Plus, it’s naturally gluten-free, vegetarian-friendly, and packed with nutrients, making it a wholesome choice for health-conscious foodies. Give this simple and flavorful dish a try today and elevate your next meal!

    Don’t forget to check out my family’s favorite side dishes too! Try Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower, Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts, or for a healthy twist, Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    CLose up shot of quick and easy roasted carrots and asparagus recipe.

    Why You’ll Love This Roasted Carrots and Asparagus Recipe

    • Delicious and Nutritious:Roasted asparagus and carrots are delicious and highly nutritious – a winning culinary combination and an easy vegetable side dish that goes with most main courses. 
    • Sweet Caramelization: Why roast? Oven-roasted vegetables have a sweet caramelization and crispness that is difficult to achieve with any other cooking method.
    • Customizable Flavors: Elevate that intense flavor with your favorite seasoning, such as paprika or garlic powder. 
    • Nutrient Retention: In addition, not cooking your vegetables in the usual way – boiled in water – helps keep them more nutritious and preserves their important antioxidants.
    • Year-Round Ingredients: Carrots are available in various colors throughout the year, so have a bit of artistic fun.
    • Perfect for Holidays:  Asparagus is a spring vegetable, which is when they are at their best.  This asparagus carrot recipe is your Easter meal ideas side dish. What a great way to surprise friends and family.

    We strongly encourage you to start roasting other vegetables.

    Roasted asparagus and carrots in a plate.

    Roasted Carrots and Asparagus are Best Served With

    The best part of a carrot and asparagus side dish is that it can be served with most roasted entrees ! Perfect alongside roasted entrees like salmon, chicken, beef, and pork.

    • Lemon Pepper Chicken Thighs: The zesty lemon flavor complements the natural sweetness of roasted vegetables. 
    • Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken: The savory teriyaki glaze pairs well with the earthy flavors of roasted carrots and asparagus.
    • Air Fryer BBQ Chicken: The smoky barbecue notes enhance the roasted vegetables' taste.
    • Ground Chicken Spaghetti: This hearty pasta dish is balanced by the lightness of the roasted veggies.
    • Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine: The garlicky shrimp and pasta are elevated when served alongside roasted carrots and asparagus.
    • Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad: This fresh and nutritious salad pairs well with the roasted vegetables for a complete meal.
    •  Vegetarian Option: Pair with a baked potato to turn this side dish into a complete vegetarian meal.
    • Withs Sauces: For adventurous foodies, try drizzling the roasted carrots and asparagus with a hollandaise sauce, which is a rich and delectable pairing for the asparagus. Or try a honey mustard sauce, which pairs well with both. 
    • Crumbled Bacon: Sprinkle with crispy bacon bits for an indulgent finishing touch.

    How to Get Your Kids to Love Roasted Vegetables

    Kids can be naturally fussy about vegetables, including roasted carrots and asparagus, before they have tasted them. You can help your kids overcome this innate inclination by allowing them to become more involved. Have them pick their own asparagus spears at the market. Let them arrange the carrots and asparagus on the baking sheet. Counting while they do so can improve their math. Make vegetables fun.

    Topping them with a bit of Goat Cheese adds a creamy, tangy twist that makes these veggies irresistible. Incorporating dishes like this into your family meals is a great way to introduce kids to healthy side dish recipes while ensuring they get the essential nutrients they need. With vibrant colors, delicious flavors, and nutritious benefits, this recipe is a win for the whole family! 

    Ingredients

    Ingredients laid out for roasting asparagus and carrots.
    • Carrots: Carrots add natural sweetness and a hearty texture to the dish. Cutting them into sticks ensures even cooking and better caramelization.
    • Asparagus: Asparagus provides a tender, slightly nutty flavor that balances well with the sweetness of carrots. Trimming removes the tough, woody ends for a pleasant bite.
    • Olive oil: Oil helps coat the vegetables, ensuring even roasting and enhancing their flavor.
    • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a mild, savory depth to the dish.
    • Salt: Essential for bringing out the natural sweetness of the vegetables and balancing the overall flavor.
    • Black pepper: Adds a mild heat and earthiness, complementing the roasted vegetables.
    • Paprika: Paprika enhances the dish with a warm and smoky flavor.
    • Goat cheese: The creamy, tangy goat cheese provides a luxurious contrast to the roasted veggies' texture and flavor.
    • Lemon juice: Lemon juice brightens the dish with a fresh, zesty acidity, balancing the richness of the goat cheese.
    • Parsley: Parsley adds a pop of color and a mild herbal freshness.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    CLose up shot of showing texture of simple roasted carrots and asparagus recipe.

    How to make Roasted Carrots and Asparagus with Goat Cheese

    Learn how to make oven roasted vegetables in a quick simple method. As always start by preheating your oven to 400°F (200°C) to ensure it reaches the perfect temperature for roasting. While the oven heats up, prepare your baking sheet by lining it with parchment paper. This step makes cleanup easier and prevents the vegetables from sticking, allowing them to roast evenly.

    Next, focus on prepping your vegetables. Begin by trimming the tough, woody ends of the asparagus, as these can be too fibrous to enjoy. Set the trimmed asparagus aside. Then, wash the carrots thoroughly under cold water to remove any dirt or residue. Depending on your preference, you can peel the carrots or leave the skin on for added texture and nutrients.

    Finally, slice the carrots into sticks roughly the same size as the asparagus to ensure they cook evenly. This simple prep work sets the stage for perfectly roasted vegetables!

    The carrots and asparagus cut into equal length and arranged on a baking sheet.

    The carrots and asparagus are cut into equal length and arranged on a baking sheet.

    The seasonings added to the carrots and asparagus recipe in a baking sheet.

    Seasonings added to the veggies and mixed well. Roast them in the oven for 15–18 minutes. 

    Once they are lightly browned and tender with a slight crisp, remove them from the oven. While the vegetables are still hot, sprinkle crumbled goat cheese generously over the top. The heat from the vegetables will soften the goat cheese slightly, creating a creamy and flavorful contrast.

    For an added burst of freshness, squeeze a bit of lemon juice over the roasted vegetables. Finally, garnish with a sprinkle of chopped fresh parsley to enhance the dish’s visual appeal and flavor. Serve immediately and enjoy this simple yet elegant side dish, perfect for any meal!

    Roasted carrots and asparagus resting after out from the oven. Garnished with goat cheese and parsley.

    Hint: Be sure to stir the vegetables halfway through the cooking time to ensure even caramelization and tenderness. 

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vegetable Swaps: Replace carrots and asparagus with other vegetables like sweet potatoes or turnips. Be sure to cut them into thin pieces, similar in size to asparagus, for even roasting. Even parsnips, green beans, or Brussels sprouts are great alternatives to carrots and asparagus.
    • Cheese Alternative: If goat cheese isn’t available, feta cheese is an excellent substitute, providing a similar savory touch to the dish. Parmesan, or even cream cheese for a similar creamy and tangy flavor.
    • Spices Swaps: Garlic powder can be replaced with fresh minced garlic for some bold flavors. Adding ½ teaspoon of curry powder would also enhance the total flavor of the dish. Experiment with spices like cumin, thyme, rosemary, or chili flakes for added flavor.

    Equipment

    • Baking Sheet: A large, rimmed baking sheet to spread the vegetables evenly for optimal roasting.
    • Parchment Paper or Aluminum Foil: For easy cleanup and to prevent the vegetables from sticking to the baking sheet.
    • Knife and Cutting Board: To trim and cut the carrots and asparagus into even sizes for consistent cooking.
    • Tongs or Spatula: For tossing the vegetables during roasting to make sure even caramelization.
    • Measuring Spoons: To accurately measure olive oil, salt, and seasonings.
    Roasted carrots and asparagus served ibuprofen a light orange plate and beautifully ganrished with goat cheese and parsley.

    Storing and Reheating Your Roasted Carrots and Asparagus

    Refrigeration: Keep your roasted carrots and asparagus for five days in the refrigerator while placed in an airtight container.

    Freezing: Freeze the vegetables in a tightly sealed container for up to 3 months.

    Reheating in the Microwave: Use the microwave for quick reheating, though it may not retain the crispiness.

    Reheating in the Air Fryer: Use an air fryer to reheat for a crispier texture.

    Reheating in the Oven: Place the vegetables on a sheet pan and reheat in the oven at 350°F for about 12 minutes.

    Top Tips on Preparing Roasted Carrots and Asparagus

    1. Whether you are roasting carrots, asparagus, or adding other vegetables, make sure they are sliced the same size for even roasting. The asparagus is thin, so ensure that carrots or other veggies match in size.
    2. Place them on the baking sheet in a single layer – again, for even roasting.
    3. Thin asparagus stalks will be crispier than their fatter counterparts. In this case, size will matter.
    4. You should use fresh vegetables for this recipe. In an emergency, however, you can use frozen veggies, but they will not crisp up. Trust me, you want the crisp.
    5. Be sure to trim the asparagus before roasting. Use a sharp knife to remove the tough end parts.
    6. Experiment with toppings. Chopped almonds or other nuts can add a crunchy interest.
    7. Don’t forget the goat cheese, which complements the sweetness of roasted vegetables.
    Horizontal shot of roasted carrots and asparagus recipe served in a plate.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen carrots or asparagus in this recipe?

    Yes, but it's best to thaw and pat them dry first to remove excess moisture. This ensures better caramelization during roasting.

    How do I prevent the vegetables from becoming soggy while roasting?

    Make sure to dry the vegetables thoroughly before roasting, and avoid overcrowding the baking sheet so they roast instead of steam.

    Can I make this dish ahead of time?

    Yes! Roast the vegetables, store them in an airtight container, and reheat in an oven or air fryer to restore crispness before serving.

    Is this roasted carrots and asparagus recipe suitable for meal prep?

    Yes, the roasted vegetables store well in the fridge and can be reheated for quick meals throughout the week. It's the perfect dish to prepare on Sundays for hassle-free weekday dinners.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with this oven roasted asparagus and carrots recipe:

    Roasted carrots and asparagus with goat cheese plated in a off white plate served with lemon wedges in the sides and garnished with parsley.

    Roasted Carrots and Asparagus

    Abi Guna
    A simple and delicious side dish, Roasted Carrots and Asparagus combines the natural sweetness of carrots, the tender crispness of asparagus, and the creamy tang of goat cheese. Perfectly seasoned and roasted to perfection, this dish is quick to prepare and pairs beautifully with any meal.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 18 minutes
    Total Time 28 minutes
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 People's
    Calories 117 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking Sheet
    • Parchment paper
    • Measuring Spoons
    • Knife
    • Cutting Board

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound carrots remove the top part and cut into sticks
    • 1 pound asparagus trimmed the bottom part
    • 2 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon paprika
    • ¼ cup goat cheese crumbled
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • Lemon wedges to serve
    • Chopped fresh parsley to garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Trim the woody ends of the asparagus and set them aside. Wash the carrots and cut them into sticks similar in size to the asparagus (peeling is optional).
    • Place the carrots and asparagus on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with olive oil and season with garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Toss to coat evenly.
    • Roast the vegetables in the preheated oven for 15–18 minutes, stirring halfway through, until tender and slightly caramelized.
    • Remove from the oven and immediately sprinkle crumbled goat cheese over the hot vegetables, allowing it to soften slightly. Add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice for an extra burst of flavor.
    • Garnish with chopped fresh parsley before serving and enjoy!

    Notes

    • For the best texture and flavor, serve the vegetables right after roasting.
    • Skip the goat cheese or use a plant-based alternative for a vegan-friendly version.
    • Use leftovers as a topping for salads, pasta, or grain bowls.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 ServingCalories: 117kcalCarbohydrates: 4.4gProtein: 3.6gFat: 10.1gSaturated Fat: 3.1gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 9760mgPotassium: 153mgFiber: 1.4gSugar: 2gCalcium: 42mg
    Keyword Asparagus, carrots, roasted vegetables, side dish
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Red Velvet Cake Waffles

    by 5 Comments

    Looking for an effortless breakfast that’s rich and decadent? These Red Velvet Cake Waffles are fluffy, flavorful, and bursting with that classic red velvet charm, all made effortlessly with red velvet cake mix. Take them to the next level with a smooth chocolate drizzle and a tangy, luscious cream cheese glaze, perfectly complementing the richness of the waffles for a beautiful balance of flavors. Garnish with whipped cream, chocolate chips, or chopped pecans for an added crunch and a touch of indulgence.

    Cream cheese drizzle over the stacked red velvet cake waffles in a plate and pecans in the behind.

    Perfect for special occasions like Valentine’s Day, Galentine’s Day, Mother’s Day, brunch parties, or simply treating yourself, these waffles are easy to make and absolutely irresistible—a luxurious treat you’ll never forget! They’re also perfect for birthdays, anniversaries, or any time you’re craving a festive and indulgent breakfast or dessert.

    If you’re a fan of red velvet, you must try this Red Velvet Cookie Cake—it’s a showstopper dessert that’s perfect for any occasion! More interesting waffles like my Nuella Waffles is the best breakfast ever!

    Looking for more Valentine’s Day recipes? Don’t miss my Nutella-Covered Strawberries, Valentine’s Day Cake Pops, Dark Chocolate Almond Fudge, Mini Chocolate Bundt Cake—they’re guaranteed to impress!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Cream cheese and chocolate ganache drizzled over the red velvet waffles and topped with pecans.

    Why You Will Love This Recipe for Red Velvet Cake Waffles

    Red velvet cake is high on most people’s sweet fantasies. They make an indulgent dessert, and the waffles can be used for sweet breakfast recipes. They offer an explosion of flavors in every bite. With a decadent cream cheese topping and a rich chocolate drizzle, they easily turn into romantic Valentine’s Day waffles. Of course, they are perfect for brunch get-togethers and Mother’s Day, as well. Any special occasion can fulfill the fantasy and satisfy the craving in less than 10 minutes.

    The wonderful cream cheese glaze is perfect for many other cakes and pastries. The glaze multitasks and is a dream come true on cinnamon rolls. It is thinner than a regular frosting and is easier to drizzle. 

    Are you raising a dubious eyebrow at the thought of using a prepared cake mix? Please don’t. There are several real advantages here. 

    1. All the measuring is done for you, making it much more difficult to mess up, and it saves you valuable time.
    2. One cake package will be more cost-effective than purchasing each ingredient separately.
    3. The quality and texture of the cake will be consistent each time you prepare it.
    4. It is beginning-chef friendly.
    5. It is simple to prepare a variety of flavored cakes.
    Backlit shot of red velvet waffles, drizzled chocolate ganache and cream cheese drizzle.

    Serving Options for Red Velvet Cake Waffles

    Classic Pairing: We already know how well red velvet cake waffles pair with a cream cheese glaze – pure heaven. But heaven is multi-dimensional. 

    Coffee or Latte: My famous Salted Caramel Latte recipe goes well with these waffles. A cup of coffee or espresso will blend nicely with the waffle’s natural sweetness. Consider this pairing for a sophisticated dessert. 

    Seasonal Berries: Try topping the waffles with luscious seasonal berries for some bright colors.

    Savory Twist: For the definitive breakfast waffle, serve them with crisp, yummy bacon.

    Mimosa: For an adult treat, pair the waffles with a mimosa to elevate your brunch game.

    Kid-Friendly Option: Kids will be thrilled with a cold glass of milk.

    These versatile serving ideas make red velvet cake waffles perfect for any occasion, from casual breakfasts to elegant desserts!

    Ingredients

    Ingredients laid out on a marble table for the red velvet cake waffles recipe.
    • Red Velvet Cake Mix - The base for these waffles, providing that classic red velvet flavor with its rich, cocoa-infused taste and vibrant red color.
    • Eggs  - They add structure and richness to the batter, helping the waffles stay fluffy and hold their shape.
    • Milk - Adds moisture to the batter, creating a smooth, pourable consistency.
    • Vegetable Oil - A neutral oil that keeps the waffles tender and prevents them from drying out during cooking.
    • Vanilla Extract -Enhances the flavor of the batter.
    • Cream Cheese - The star ingredient for the cream cheese glaze, adding a tangy, rich, and creamy element to balance the sweetness.
    • Confectioners’ Sugar - Used to sweeten the cream cheese glaze.
    • Dark or Semi-Sweet Chocolate Chips - Melted to create a decadent chocolate drizzle, adding richness and indulgence to the dish.
    • Heavy Cream - Combines with the chocolate chips to make a silky ganache.
    • Pecans: For that extra crunch.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make Red Velvet Waffles with Cake Mix

    Looking for the best recipe for red velvet waffles recipe? This one has it all! Made with cake mix waffles, these red velvet treats are fluffy, flavorful, and incredibly easy to prepare. The waffles are topped with a luscious cream cheese drizzle for waffles, adding a tangy sweetness that perfectly complements their rich cocoa flavor. For an extra indulgent touch, finish them with a decadent chocolate drizzle waffles topping. Below is the step by step instructions for the recipe.

    Red velvet waffles ingredients in a mixing bowl.

    Red Velvet cake mix, eggs, oil and milk added to a mixing bowl.

    Red Velvet cake mix waffles batter in a bowl.

    Waffle batter mixed until smooth.

    Red velvet cake waffles cooked in a waffle maker.

    Cook the waffles in a waffle maker.

    Cream cheese glaze and chocolate ganache in bowls.

    Prepare the cream cheese glaze and chocolate ganache(optional) for drizzling.

    Serve the easy red velvet waffles warm for the best flavor and texture, topped with a generous swirl of whipped cream for a light and airy touch. Add a drizzle of creamy, tangy cream cheese glaze and finish with a rich chocolate drizzle to elevate the indulgence. For a delightful crunch, garnish with chocolate chips and chopped pecans, which complement the soft and fluffy waffles perfectly. These toppings not only enhance the flavor but also add a visually stunning presentation, making the waffles as beautiful as they are delicious. Whether it’s for a special brunch or a cozy dessert, these waffles are sure to impress! 

    Red velvet cake waffles in a oval plate. Dark chocolate ganche and cream cheese drizzle topped with chopped pecans and chocolate chips.

    Substitutions and Variations for Red Velvet Cake Waffles Recipe

    • Flexible Cake Mix: These waffles with cream cheese are flexible and can be adapted to what is in your cupboard. Feel free to use any other flavor cake mix to achieve scrumptious results. Swap the red velvet cake mix with any other flavor, such as chocolate, vanilla, or funfetti, for equally delicious results.
    • Customize the Batter: Create a unique batter by adding special treats such as chocolate chips, toffee bits, flaked coconuts, or anything else your family craves.
    • Dairy-Free Option: Use a plant-based milk like almond or oat milk and a dairy-free cream cheese alternative for a vegan-friendly version.
    • Flavorful Glaze Variations: Replace the cream cheese glaze with a simple powdered sugar glaze or drizzle with caramel or strawberry sauce.

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowls: For mixing the waffle batter and preparing the cream cheese glaze or chocolate drizzle.
    • Whisk: Essential for blending the batter smoothly and whipping up the cream cheese glaze.
    • Measuring Cups and Spoons: For accurately measuring the ingredients
    • Waffle Maker: A key tool for cooking the waffles 
    • Microwave-Safe Bowl: For melting the chocolate chips and heavy cream into a silky ganache.
    Close up shot of red velvet cake mix waffles topped with pecans and chocolate chips with cream cheese drizzle and Chocolate ganache.

    Storing Red Velvet Cake Waffles

    Cool Completely Before Storing: Don’t refrigerate the easy red velvet cake waffles until they are completely cooled, otherwise, they will turn soggy.

    Refrigeration: Once they have cooled, transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate them for up to three days.

    Freezing: Cake waffles can be frozen. Store the waffles in a large freezer bag for about a month. 

    Reheating the frozen waffles

    Oven Method: When you are ready for them, place the waffles on a baking sheet, cover loosely with aluminum foil, and bake at 350°F for about 12 minutes.

    Toaster Oven Method: You can place them in a toaster oven for 3 minutes to get them nice and crunchy.

    These tips ensure your red velvet cake waffles stay fresh and delicious, whether refrigerated or frozen!

    Backlit shot of red velvet cake mix waffles topped with pecans and chocolate chips with cream cheese drizzle and Chocolate ganache.

    Top Tips for Preparing Red Velvet Cake Waffles

    1. For the perfect waffle, preheat the waffle maker. Be sure to coat it with a nonstick cooking spray.
    2. For an even richer red velvet waffle, use buttermilk instead of regular milk when preparing the batter.
    3. You want the cream cheese frosting to be truly smooth. To achieve genuine creaminess, ensure the cream cheese is at room temperature before using it.
    4. When you follow this recipe, you are already drizzling the waffles with chocolate. Take the chocolate craving a step further and add some chocolate chips to the batter. 
    5. Avoid over-combining the batter and simply gently mix the ingredients.
    6. To achieve the smoothest frosting, ensure that your cream cheese is at room temperature before using it.

    FAQ

    Can I use a homemade red velvet cake batter instead of a cake mix?

    Yes, absolutely! If you prefer homemade, you can use your favorite red velvet cake recipe instead of a boxed mix for a more personalized touch.

    Can I make these red Velvet cake ahead of time?

    Yes! Prepare the waffles in advance, let them cool completely, and store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. Reheat them in an oven or toaster for the best texture.

    What type of waffle maker should I use?

    You can use any waffle maker—round, square, or Belgian. I used square waffle maker for this recipe!

    Can I make these waffles gluten-free?

    Yes! Use a gluten-free red velvet cake mix and ensure all other ingredients, like the chocolate chips, are gluten-free.

    How do I thin the cream cheese glaze if it’s too thick?

    Add a small amount of milk, one teaspoon at a time, until the glaze reaches your desired drizzling consistency. Pouring consistency would be perfect!

    Can I add mix-ins to the waffle batter?

    Yes! Fold in chocolate chips, chopped nuts, or even crushed Oreos for added flavor and texture.

    In a white plate, red velvet cake mix waffles topped with pecans and chocolate chips with cream cheese drizzle and Chocolate ganache.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Red Velvet Cake Mix Waffles Recipe:

    Stacked red velvet ake waffles , whipped cream topped with pecans and chocolate chips. Cream cheese drizzled over.

    Red Velvet Cake Waffles

    Abi Guna
    Looking for an effortless breakfast that’s rich and decadent? These Red Velvet Cake Waffles are fluffy, flavorful, and bursting with that classic red velvet charm, all made effortlessly with red velvet cake mix.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 peoples
    Calories 379 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowl
    • Waffle Maker
    • Whisk
    • Microwave-safe bowl
    • Measuring cups and spoons

    Ingredients
      

    For the red velvet waffles

    • 1 box red velvet cake mix I used Betty Crocker Super Moist Red vlevet Cake Mix
    • 3 medium eggs at room temperature
    • 1 cup milk
    • ½ cup vegetable oil
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • Non-stick cooking spray
    • Optional toppings: whipped cream, fresh berries, chopped pecans or powdered sugar

    For the cream cheese glaze

    • 4 ounces cream cheese at room temperature
    • ¾ cup confectioners’ sugar
    • ⅓ cup milk
    • ¼ teaspoon vanilla extract

    For the chocolate drizzle (optional)

    • ½ cup dark or semi-sweet chocolate chips
    • 3 tablespoons heavy cream

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your waffle maker according to the manufacturer’s instructions and spray it with non-stick cooking spray.
In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the red velvet cake mix, eggs, milk, oil, and vanilla extract until smooth and well combined.
    • Pour the batter onto the preheated waffle maker, filling it to the recommended level. Close the lid and cook for 3–5 minutes, or until the waffles are cooked through and slightly crispy on the outside. Carefully remove the waffles and repeat with the remaining batter.
    • Meanwhile, prepare the cream cheese drizzle by mixing cream cheese, powdered sugar, vanilla, and milk in a bowl until smooth. Set it aside.
For the chocolate drizzle, combine chocolate chips and heavy cream in a microwave-safe bowl and microwave for 1 minute. Stir until the chocolate is fully melted and smooth.
    • Serve the waffles warm, topped with whipped cream, cream cheese drizzle, and chocolate drizzle. Garnish with chocolate chips and chopped pecans for an extra crunch.

    Notes

    1. Make sure to preheat the waffle maker and dont forget to coat it with a nonstick cooking spray.
    2. The recipe yield 10 square waffles.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 379kcalCarbohydrates: 27.8gProtein: 8.9gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 11.5gCholesterol: 160mgSodium: 251mgPotassium: 142mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 24.2gCalcium: 126mg
    Keyword breakfast, Cake Mix, red Velvet, Valentine's day dessert, waffles
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this red velvet cake mix waffles recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Valentine cake pops

    by 5 Comments

    Presenting my go-to recipe for Valentine Cake Pops—a showstopper treat that’s a hit in our home every year for Valentine’s Day! These easy and festive treats are made with crumbled cake from cake mix, mixed with rich cream cheese frosting, and coated in smooth white chocolate. Finished with adorable Valentine’s Day sprinkles, they’re the ultimate combination of fun, flavor, and celebration! 

    Valentine cake pops arranged in a glass jar filled with sprinkles.

    All you need is a box of cake mix, store-bought cream cheese frosting, white chocolate, and colorful sprinkles! Isn’t it amazing to create beautiful Valentine Cake Pops at home—better than Starbucks—using just these simple ingredients?

    Cake pops are a treat that everyone loves—kids and adults alike enjoy them, especially on special occasions like Valentine’s Day. These delicious desserts are perfect for your kids' Valentine’s Day treats at school, thoughtful gifts for college friends, or even to share at the office. They’re guaranteed to be the BEST treat to showcase on your dessert table or at any party, making every celebration extra sweet!

    This recipe is inspired by the famous Christmas Cake Pops recipe from my blog—don’t forget to check it out!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    More Valentine’s Day Dessert Ideas You’ll Love

    Homemade valentines day cake pops beautifully decorated with sprinkles.

    Why You’ll Love This Valentine Cake Pops Recipe

    • Simple and Easy: With just a few simple ingredients like cake mix, cream cheese frosting, and white chocolate, these cake pops come together effortlessly.
    • Festive and Fun: Decorated with colorful Valentine’s Day sprinkles, these cake pops are perfect for adding a festive touch to any celebration.
    • Loved by All Ages: Whether for kids, friends, or colleagues, these treats are a hit with everyone, making them ideal for school, office, potluck desserts or home parties.
    • Perfect for Gifting: These adorable, bite-sized desserts make thoughtful Valentine’s Day gifts packaged in cute wrappers or boxes.
    • Customizable: Switch up the flavors, colors, or decorations to suit your style and create a personalized treat. Like I did in my Christmas Cake pops recipe.
    • Better Than Store-Bought: Homemade and crafted with love, these cake pops rival even Starbucks valentine cake pop, trust me!

    What to Serve with this Valentine Day Cake Pops

    • Coffee or Latte: Pair your cake pops with a warm cup of coffee, a creamy latte, or even a decadent Salted Caramel Latte for a cozy treat.
    • Champagne or Sparkling Wine: Elevate your Valentine’s Day celebration by pairing cake pops with a glass of bubbly champagne or sparkling rosé.
    • Fresh Strawberries: Complement the sweetness of the cake pops with the refreshing juiciness of fresh strawberries or Nutella-covered strawberries.
    • Fruit Platter: Add a healthy touch by offering a vibrant fruit platter with berries, kiwi, and grapes to balance the sweetness of the cake pops. I would so any colorful fruits should work!
    • Cheese Board: Create a sweet-and-savory experience by serving cake pops with a charcuterie board featuring cheeses, nuts, and crackers. Our family loves these kinds of cute charcuterie boards.

    These pairings will make your Valentine’s Day dessert table even more special and memorable!

    Ingredients

    As I mentioned earlier, these Valentine cake pops recipe needs less than 5 ingredients to make!

    Ingredients laid out for Valentine's Day cake pop recipe in a marble table.
    • Yellow cake mix - This pre-packaged cake mix serves as the base for the cake pops, providing a soft, moist texture and a delicious vanilla flavor. I used Betty Crocker cake mix.
    • Eggs -  Add structure, moisture, and richness to the cake mix, helping it bake up fluffy and soft.
    • Oil - Oil keeps the cake moist and tender.
    • Cream cheese frosting - Creamy, tangy frosting binds the cake crumbs together to create the ideal consistency for shaping the cake pops. I used Betty Crocker Rich and Creamy Cream cheese frosting.
    • Vanilla almond bark or White Chocolate Chips - A coating that melts smoothly and hardens quickly, ideal for covering the cake pops.
    • Valentine's Day sprinkles -  Add a festive touch, enhancing both the look and texture of the cake pops.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make Valentines cake pops

    If you are looking to impress with a festive treat? Cake pops for Valentine’s are the ultimate way to celebrate! Whether you’re searching for creative cake pop ideas for Valentine’s Day or planning to make a batch of Valentine’s Day cake pops for loved ones, these delightful bites are sure to steal the show. Decorated with sprinkles, drizzles, or even shaped into hearts, they make the perfect sweet gift.

    Beautifully decorated valentines cake pops arranged in a marble table.

    Preparing the cake: While the oven warms up, grab a mixing bowl and combine yellow cake mix, eggs, oil, and water. Mix everything together until the batter is smooth and luscious—it only takes about two minutes! Just follow the cake mix box instructions. Pour the batter into your prepared pan to bake.

    Mix: Now comes the fun part—crumble the cake into fine crumbs. Add cream cheese frosting and mix until the crumbs are perfectly moist and stick together.

    Refrigerate: Scoop out portions (about the size of a golf ball) and roll them into smooth cake balls. Refrigerate for 10 minutes to firm them up.

    Dip and decorate: Time to dip! Coat each cake pop in melted white chocolate, gently tapping off the excess for an even finish. Before the chocolate sets, decorate with colorful Valentine’s Day sprinkles. Place the pops upright in a foam block or similar stand to let them set beautifully.

    For an alternative twist, try making Valentine’s cake balls without sticks—just as delicious and fun!

    Step-By-Step Instructions

    Baked cake from a cake mix.

    Bake the cake according to the package instructions and allow to cool down.

    Crumbled cake and cream cheese frosting in a white bowl.

    Crumbled cake and cream cheese frosting getting mixed.

    Cake balls arranged in a white plate.

    Shape into evenly shaped round balls.

    Dip the cake pops in white chocolate.

    Cake balls dipped in white chocolate.

    Once the chocolate hardens, your Valentine’s Cake Pops are ready to shine! Serve at room temperature and watch them disappear.

    Beautifully decorated valentines day cake pops in a jar on a pink background.

    Substitutions for Valentine’s Cake Pops Recipe

    • Yellow Cake Mix: Substitute the yellow cake mix with your favorite homemade cake recipe for a personal touch. This allows you to control the flavors and ingredients while skipping the boxed mix.
    • Cream Cheese Frosting: Replace cream cheese frosting with buttercream for a milder, sweeter taste. Homemade frosting works perfectly here, and for dietary needs, opt for dairy-free or vegan cream cheese frosting as an alternative.
    • White Chocolate Coating: Use milk or dark chocolate for a richer flavor or substitute with candy melts for easier melting and a wide range of colors. For a vegan-friendly option, choose dairy-free chocolate.
    • Sprinkles: Instead of sprinkles, try finely crushed almonds, pecans, or pistachios for a deliciously crunchy and nutty topping.

    Variations for Valentine’s Cake Pops

    Here are some creative ways to customize your Valentine’s Cake Pops:

    • Flavor Variations: Use chocolate cake mix and coat with milk or dark chocolate for a rich, indulgent treat. Swap red velvet with strawberry cake mix for a fruity twist and pink hue. The color will be just perfect for Valentine's Day!
    • Shape Variations: Use a heart-shaped mold or shape the cake balls by hand for a romantic touch.
    • Vegan or Gluten-Free Cake Pops: Use gluten-free cake mix and dairy-free frosting to make the recipe suitable for dietary restrictions. Coat with vegan chocolate for a complete allergen-friendly option.
    Pink heart decorated valentine cake pops placed in a marble table with red heart sprinkles in the side.

    Equipment

    Mixing Bowls: For mixing the cake, frosting, and coating ingredients.

    Hand Mixer: Used blend to make the cake batter. Even whisk will work.

    Baking Pan: To bake the cake.

    Cookie scoop: To make evenly-sized cake balls.

    Lollipop Sticks: For creating the iconic cake pop look.

    Storage

    Proper storage ensures your Valentine cake pops remain fresh and delicious, whether you’re making them ahead or saving leftovers. Here’s how to store them:

    Room Temperature: Place the cake pops in an airtight container, separating layers with parchment or wax paper to prevent sticking.They can last at room temperature for up to 5 days, provided the environment is cool and dry.

    Refrigerator: Arrange the cake pops in an airtight container with parchment or wax paper between layers. Keep them in the fridge to maintain freshness. Refrigerated cake pops can last up to 1 week

    Freezer: You can also freeze the cake pops for up to 2-3 months.

    Thawing: If frozen, allow the cake pops to thaw in the fridge or at room temperature for about 30 minutes before serving.

    Backlit shot of valentine cake pops with red heart sprinkles in the side.

    Top Tips for making the BEST cake pops using cake mix

    1. Crumble the cake finely to ensure a smooth texture that binds well with the frosting. 
    2. Add the frosting gradually, using just enough to hold the crumbs together. Too much frosting will make the mixture too soft and difficult to roll.
    3. Refrigerate or freeze the rolled cake balls for 15–30 minutes before inserting the sticks. This helps them firm up and prevents them from falling apart.
    4. Melt chocolate coating in short intervals, stirring frequently to prevent burning or seizing.
    5. Dip the end of each lollipop stick in melted chocolate coating before inserting it into the cake ball. This acts as “glue” to keep the stick secure. (It's an important step better not to skip this!)
    6. Dip the cake pops straight into the melted coating and gently tap off the excess while twirling the stick. Avoid stirring or shaking, as this may loosen the cake ball.
    7. Place the dipped cake pops in a styrofoam block or cake pop stand to set. This ensures a clean, round finish without smudges. I use a heavy bottom glass to place my cake pops in it, its strong and steady one.

    FAQ

    Can I use homemade cake instead of store bought cake mix?

    Of Course! You can use your favorite homemade cake recipe instead of a boxed mix. Just make sure the cake is fully cooled and crumbled finely for the best texture.

    Can I make cake pops without sticks?

    Yes! Simply roll the cake balls and serve them as cake truffles. I do this at times. They’re just as delicious and perfect for bite-sized treats.

    How do I prevent the cake balls from falling off the sticks?

    Dip the tip of each stick in melted chocolate before inserting it into the cake ball. Chill the cake balls before dipping to ensure they stay firm.

    What can I use instead of cream cheese frosting?

    You can substitute cream cheese frosting with homemade buttercream, ganache, or even a store-bought frosting of your choice.

    How many cake pops will this recipe yield?

    For a 9x13-inch cake using a standard box of cake mix and cream cheese frosting, you can expect to make about 30 cake pops if they are golf ball-sized (about 1.5 inches in diameter).

    Can I Make Cake Pops from Leftover Cake?

    Yes, you can absolutely make cake pops from leftover cake! It's a perfect way to repurpose leftover cake into a fun treat. Simply crumble the cake into fine crumbs, mix it with a small amount of frosting to bind it, and roll the mixture into balls. From there, follow my cake pop-making process: insert sticks, chill, dip in melted chocolate, and decorate.

    Horizontal Image of Valentines cake pops arranged in a glass jar with a pink linens on the saide.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Valentine Cake Pops Recipe:

    Homemade Valentine cake pops with cake mix arranged in a glass jar filled with sprinkles.

    Valentine cake pops

    Abi Guna
    Valentine Cake Pops—our go-to treat for Valentine’s Day! Made with crumbled cake, cream cheese frosting, and coated in smooth white chocolate, these festive pops are topped with adorable sprinkles for the perfect mix of fun and flavor!
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes
    Cook Time 11 minutes
    Chilling Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 1 day 30 minutes
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 30 Cake Pops
    Calories 188 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowl
    • Baking Pan
    • Hand Mixer
    • Lollipop sticks

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 13.25 oz box super moist yellow cake mix (such as Betty Crocker)
    • 3 medium eggs at room temperature
    • ⅓ cup unflavored oil such as vegetable oil
    • 1 cup water
    • ½ cup cream cheese frosting (such as Betty Crocker Rich and Creamy)
    • 12 oz vanilla almond bark or substitute white chocolate or candy melts
    • 30 Cake pop sticks
    • Valentine's Day sprinkles for decorating

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Grease a 9x13-inch baking pan with cooking spray and set it aside.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the yellow cake mix, eggs, oil, and water. Use a hand mixer or whisk to blend everything together until the cake batter is smooth and well-combined, about 2 minutes.
    • Transfer the cake batter to the prepared pan and spread it out evenly. Bake for 25-28 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center of the cake comes out clean.
    • Once baked, allow the cake to cool completely. After cooling, trim off the brown edges of the cake to create a clean surface.
    • Break the cake into 4-5 large pieces and crumble them into fine crumbs in a bowl.
    • Add the cream cheese frosting to the crumbled cake in the bowl. Mix it well until the frosting is evenly distributed.
    • Using an ice cream scoop or a tablespoon, take a portion of the cake mixture about the size of a golf ball and roll it into a smooth ball.
    • Place the formed cake balls on a plate. Refrigerate them for about 10 minutes to help them firm up.
    • Meanwhile, in a microwave-safe bowl, melt the white chocolate or almond bark in short intervals (20-30 seconds), stirring after each interval until smooth and fully melted.
    • Dip the tip of each cake pop stick into the melted chocolate, then insert it halfway into each cake pop to help it stay in place. Return the cake pops to the plate and refrigerate again for 10 minutes to set the sticks. (Don’t skip this step)
    • After the cake pops have chilled, dip each one into the melted white chocolate or almond bark until completely coated. Gently tap the stick to remove any excess chocolate and ensure an even coating.
    • Decorate the cake pops with valentine's day sprinkles immediately after coating. Once decorated, place the cake pops vertically, sticking the end of the stick into a foam block or a similar surface to keep them upright.
    • Allow the cake pops to come to room temperature and let the chocolate coating fully set. Once set, enjoy these delicious Valentine cake pops!

    Notes

    • Trim off the brown edges of the cake after baking and discard them for a smoother texture in your cake pops.
    • If the chocolate or candy coating is too thick, add a small amount of coconut oil or vegetable shortening to thin it out for a smooth, even coating.
    • Work in batches by keeping some cake balls chilled while coating others to prevent them from softening and losing their shape.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 cake popCalories: 188kcalCarbohydrates: 21.5gProtein: 2.6gFat: 10.5gSaturated Fat: 5.4gCholesterol: 29mgSodium: 84mgPotassium: 87mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 18.7gCalcium: 64mg
    Keyword Cake Mix, Cake Pops, easy desserts, Valentine's day dessert
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this homemade Valentine Cake pops recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Nutella Covered Strawberries

    by 5 Comments

    Looking for a sweet and indulgent treat with a twist on regular chocolate-covered strawberries? This Nutella Covered Strawberries recipe is the perfect choice! It combines the luscious creaminess of Nutella with the rich flavor of dark chocolate and the juicy sweetness of strawberries, creating a dessert that’s truly heavenly. Whether you’re planning a romantic dinner or simply treating yourself, these strawberries covered with Nutella are an easy, elegant, and irresistible option.

    In a plate full of Nutella covered strawberries with pink background. Nutella is placed in a bowl in the side.

    Perfect for Valentine’s Day dessert recipes, this treat is simple to make yet irresistibly delicious. Imagine the rich hazelnut and cocoa spread combined with dark chocolate draped over fresh, ripe berries—because who doesn’t love Nutella on strawberries? Ready in just minutes, this recipe is ideal for celebrations, gifting, or a quick indulgence. Make your Valentine’s Day extra special with this effortless yet impressive dessert!

    Looking for more Valentine’s Day recipes? Check out my Valentine Cake Pops, Red Velvet Cookie Cake , mini chocolate bundt cakes and Dark Chocolate Almond Fudge—perfect for celebrating the day of love!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    You may have this question: Should chocolate-covered strawberries be refrigerated? The answer is yes—refrigerating them is the best way to keep them fresh and prevent the chocolate from melting. Whether you're enjoying a classic chocolate-dipped treat or experimenting with a strawberry and Nutella twist, proper storage ensures the best flavor and texture. Just remember to store them in an airtight container and bring them to room temperature before serving for the ultimate indulgence! Love no bake desserts like these, its certainly an easy to make heavenly dessert!

    Strawberry covered in nutella and dark chocolate and bite taken to see inside.

    Why You’ll Love This Quick and Easy Nutella-Covered Strawberry Recipe 

    • Quick and Effortless: Ready in minutes with just 3 ingredients, perfect for any occasion.
    • Perfect Flavor Pairing: Strawberries and chocolate are a natural food pairing. The sweet and tart essence of the strawberry blends perfectly with the richness of Nutella and chocolate in taste and texture. They were destined for each other, a culinary romance such as Cleopatra and Marc Anthony.
    • Fun and Customizable: Add toppings like crushed nuts, sprinkles, or shredded coconut to make it your own.
    • Romantic Valentine’s Treat:  Impress your significant other by serving these Nutella-covered strawberries as a surprise Valentine’s Day strawberry treat. Don’t forget the champagne, which goes well with chocolate.
    Single nutella covered Strawberry n a orange plate.

    Why everyone loves Nutella? 

    The rich combination of creamy hazelnuts and smooth cocoa creates a unique, indulgent taste that’s hard to resist. Nutella pairs perfectly with everything—spread it on toast, drizzle it over pancakes, mix it into desserts, or enjoy it straight from the jar! Whether you’re a kid or an adult, Nutella appeals to everyone with its decadent and universally loved flavor profile.

    Nutella is an inspiration born in 1964 in Italy as a blend of hazelnuts and cocoa cream. It was a brilliant idea and has become the world’s most popular hazelnut spread. Everyone knows it is luscious, but few consider the health benefit of the “nut” part, namely the hazelnuts. Twenty-five percent of the world’s hazelnuts end up a part of Nutella. Hazelnuts have several health benefits. They can elevate a person’s mood with tryptophan, and they can boost heart health. Not bad qualities for a luxury chocolate spread. 

    Nutella coveres strawberries in a pink plate and pink background , nutella product in the behind along with the fresh strawberries.

    What to Serve with Nutella-Covered Strawberries

    Nutella and strawberries are a special occasion delicacy that can stand alone or be enriched with a good drink. The blending of Nutella and strawberries rises to perfection, so you want to be sure that your beverage is rich enough to stand up to this bit of luxury and let its flavors shine without overpowering it.

    • Champagne or Sparkling Wine: If you are serving milk chocolate-covered strawberries to an adult group, consider offering the treat with some ruby port, a sweet beverage, or a white ale, which has a lower alcohol content and is less sweet. The light, bubbly nature of champagne pairs beautifully with the richness of Nutella and the tartness of strawberries. The ruby port is especially welcome following dinner and is a well-known dessert wine. If you are serving Nutella-covered strawberries as an informal snack, offer a casual white ale. Dark chocolate-covered strawberries have a slightly more complex flavor, so you want a strong wine to match it. An earthy pinot noir is an excellent choice, as is a roasted malt porter. 
    • Coffee: Pair with a warm drink for a cozy treat—Nutella and coffee are a match made in heaven! Try my Salted Caramel Latte, which is the perfect complement to enjoy alongside. An ideal treat for Galentine’s Day celebrations!
    • Whipped Cream: Add a dollop of whipped cream for extra creaminess and a classic pairing. Just perfect for Kids Valentines day treat!
    • Ice Cream: Serve with a scoop of vanilla or chocolate ice cream for an indulgent dessert experience. This is kids friendly pairing option too!

    The right accompaniment elevates your Nutella-covered strawberries to an exquisite level.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients laid out for Strawberry covered Nutella recipe in a pink hue background.
    • Strawberries: Sweet, juicy strawberries serve as the perfect base for this recipe, offering a refreshing and slightly tart contrast to the rich Nutella and chocolate.
    • Nutella: This creamy hazelnut and cocoa spread adds a luscious, decadent layer of flavor, complementing the natural sweetness of the strawberries.
    • Dark Chocolate: The dark chocolate enhances the richness of the coating while balancing the sweetness of the Nutella with its slightly bitter notes. Semi-Sweet Chocolate also works here for this recipe!
    • White Chocolate Bar: Used for drizzling or decorating, white chocolate adds a touch of sweetness and visual contrast, making the strawberries look even more elegant. This is optional though for an extra decoration.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make Chocolate covered Strawberries with Nutella

    A Nutella strawberry creation perfectly combines the creamy richness of hazelnut spread with the sweet juiciness of strawberries, making it a dessert worth savoring. Lets see how to make this recipe with step by step instructions.

    Drying the fresh strawberries in a baking tray lined with parchment paper.

    Was and dry the fresh strawberries to remove the extra moisture.

    In a microwave safe bowl, added dark chocolate and nutella.

    In a microwave safe bowl combine dark chocolate and Nutella and microwave till its melts.

    Strawberry dipped in the nutella chocolate mixture.

    Dip the strawberries in the nutella chocolate mixture.

    Nutella covered strawberries placed in a baking tray.

    Arrange the nutella chocolate dipped strawberries in a baking tray lined with the parchment paper and refrigerate.

    For an elegant finish, drizzle melted white chocolate over the strawberries to create a beautiful decorative touch. The creamy white chocolate adds a contrasting sweetness and enhances the visual appeal of the dessert. Once decorated, place the strawberries back in the refrigerator to allow the chocolate to set completely. This step not only secures the design but also ensures the strawberries remain fresh and ready to impress when it’s time to serve. 

    White Chocolate Drizzle over the nutella covered strawberries.

    Substitutions and Variations to Nutella Covered Strawberries

    Nutella-covered strawberries are incredible. However, you may wish to include different fruit treats, as well. People are becoming very conscious of their eating habits, and a few variations will impress them. You can also cover other fruits with Nutella.

    • Instead of dipping your juicy strawberries in Nutella, try dipping them in plain or flavored yogurt. It’s a great way to offer a treat that is nutritious and provides an impressive supply of protein and antioxidants. Just freeze the strawberry yogurt treat for 30 minutes. If you absolutely must, you can add chocolate sprinkles. 
    • Peel and quarter a banana and stick each piece with a toothpick. Transfer the bananas to a parchment-lined baking sheet and generously spread each with Nutella. Freeze for at least one hour. 

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowl: A microwave-safe bowl for melting Nutella and chocolate.
    • Microwave: Use a microwave to melt the Nutella and chocolate quickly or a double boiler for a gentler melting process.
    • Spoon or Spatula: For stirring the Nutella and chocolate to ensure a smooth consistency.
    • Parchment Paper or Wax Paper: To line the baking sheet and prevent the strawberries from sticking as they set.
    • Baking Sheet: To place the dipped strawberries for setting.
    • Toothpicks or Skewers: Useful for holding the strawberries while dipping them into the melted mixture.
    Strawberry covered chocolate and nutella dessert placed in a pink plate.

    Storing Nutella-Covered Strawberries

    These are best enjoyed on the same day for optimal freshness, but they can be refrigerated for up to 24 hours.

    Line an airtight container with a paper towel and add the strawberries in a single layer. They will last in the fridge for up to three days.

    You can freeze your strawberries for up to three months; however, there is a chance they may become mushy.

    Tips on Preparing the Best Nutella-Covered Strawberries

    While it is difficult to improve on perfection, here are some tips to ensure that your Nutella-covered strawberry hits all the high notes.

    • Get the freshest, most perfect strawberries you can find. You can, of course, make Nutella-covered strawberries all year round, but remember that strawberry season is from February through June – fortunately, a long season. In February, they are the first fruits to ripen into bright red berries and announce the coming spring. That’s the best time to buy them.
    • Before you begin to prepare your strawberries, ensure that they are dry. Moisture and chocolate do not mix well. Use a paper towel to dry the berries, then let them air-dry on another sheet.
    • For a change, instead of covering your strawberry with Nutella, carefully remove the center and stuff the Nutella inside of the berry. Return the stuffed strawberries to an egg carton until you are ready to serve them.
    • Feel free to add chopped nuts or flavored sprinkles to your covered strawberries as soon as they are dipped. 
    Close up shot of Nutella covered strawberries in a pink plate.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen strawberries for this recipe?

    Fresh strawberries are best for this recipe as frozen ones tend to release moisture when thawed, making it difficult for the Nutella and chocolate to stick properly.

    Can you freeze chocolate covered strawberries?

    Yes, you can freeze chocolate-covered strawberries, but it’s not always recommended as freezing can affect their texture and appearance.

    How do I prevent the Nutella and chocolate from clumping?

    Melt the Nutella and chocolate in short microwave intervals (15–20 seconds) and stir between each interval to ensure a smooth consistency. Adding a teaspoon of coconut oil or butter can also help if you find it more clumpy.

    How long do Nutella-covered strawberries last?

    They are best enjoyed the same day but can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours.

    Can I use milk chocolate instead of dark chocolate?

    Yes! You can use milk chocolate if you prefer a sweeter flavor. It’s all about your taste preferences.

    Can I make this recipe vegan?

    Yes! Use dairy-free Nutella or a similar hazelnut spread and dairy-free chocolate for a vegan version.

    Do I need to refrigerate the strawberries after dipping?

    Yes, refrigerating them for 15–20 minutes helps the coating harden and set properly.

    Nutella covered strawberries in a pink plate with nutella in the side along with fresh strawberries.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Nutella covered strawberry recipe:

    Nutella covered strawberries in a pink plate with Nutella jar and fresh strawberries behind.

    Nutella Covered Strawberries

    Abi Guna
    Make these easy and indulgent Nutella Covered Strawberries for the perfect sweet treat! Juicy strawberries coated in creamy Nutella and dark chocolate, with an optional white chocolate drizzle for an elegant touch. Ideal for special occasions or a quick dessert!
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    15 minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 People's
    Calories 95 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowl
    • Spoon or spatula
    • Toothpick
    • Baking Sheet
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 lb. fresh strawberries
    • 1 cup Nutella
    • ¾ cup dark chocolate bar or chips chopped
    • 2 tablespoons chopped white chocolate bar or chips (optional)

    Instructions
     

    • Wash the fresh strawberries thoroughly and pat them completely dry.
    • To ensure no excess moisture remains, line a baking sheet with a paper towel and spread the strawberries out to air dry if needed.
    • In a microwave-safe bowl, combine the chopped chocolate and Nutella.
    • Heat in the microwave for 30 seconds to 1 minute, stirring at intervals, until the chocolate is melted and fully combined with the Nutella, forming a smooth mixture.
    • Hold each strawberry by the stem or insert a toothpick, then dip it into the melted Nutella chocolate mixture.
    • Gently swirl to coat the strawberry evenly and tap off any excess.
    • Place the dipped strawberries on a parchment-lined baking sheet.
    • Refrigerate the strawberries for about 15 minutes or until the Nutella hardens.
    • If using, drizzle melted white chocolate over the strawberries for decoration and refrigerate again until ready to serve.
    • Serve immediately or store the Nutella-covered strawberries in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours.

    Notes

    • Make sure the strawberries are thoroughly washed and completely dry before dipping; any moisture will prevent the Nutella from sticking properly.
    • Melt the Nutella and chocolate in short intervals (15–20 seconds) to avoid overheating or burning the mixture.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2 nutella covered strawberriesCalories: 95kcalCarbohydrates: 10.7gProtein: 1.2gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 2.7gSodium: 4mgPotassium: 15mgFiber: 1gSugar: 9.4gCalcium: 12mg
    Keyword chocolate, easy desserts, Strawberry, Valentine's day dessert
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Oatmeal Mug Cake

    by 5 Comments

    Healthy single-serving desserts are my go-to when I’m craving something just for me! This Oatmeal Mug Cake is a quick and satisfying treat that’s perfect for breakfast, a wholesome snack, or a cozy dessert. Its fluffy texture, combined with the delightful chewiness of oats and gooey chocolate in every bite, makes it an irresistibly delicious option you’ll want to make it on repeat!

    Healthy oatmeal mug cake toppedd with mini chocolate chips and fresh raspberries and fresh mint.

    All you need are 10 simple pantry ingredients to create this heavenly, healthy dessert! Oatmeal doesn’t have to be boring—try this Oatmeal Mug Cake Recipe, and I’m sure it will completely change your mind!

    Looking for something to snack on similare to this mug cake? How about some oatmeal? My Banana Blackberry Oatmeal Muffins and Butterscotch Oatmeal Cookies are a must-try for any oatmeal lover!

    Are you a fan of the breakfast and sweet combo? Then you should definitely try this Berry Chia Seed Pudding—perfect for an early morning breakfast or a late-night dessert!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Oatmeal Mug Cake

    Healthy Oatmeal mug cake is a single-serving dish in a mug that can be prepared as a healthy breakfast or sweet dessert in just a few seconds. The beauty of this oats mug cake is that it can be served gluten-free with the personal toppings of your choice.

    Creating a dessert like this oats cake microwave recipe couldn’t be easier. With minimal prep and just one dish, you’ll have a warm and comforting treat ready in minutes. Whether you’re enjoying it as a quick oatmeal in a mug breakfast or indulging in a post-dinner oatmeal mug cookie, this recipe is both satisfying and convenient. It’s easy to customize with your favorite toppings like fresh berries, chocolate chips, or a dollop of yogurt, making it a versatile option for any time of day.

    CLose up shot of oatmeal mug cake in a white mug.

    Why you’ll love this Quick and Easy Oatmeal Mug Cake Recipe 

    • Quick and Easy: The oatmeal mug cake is one of the most convenient treats or breakfasts you can prepare since the ingredients are all cupboard staples. 
    • Customizable Toppings: Using individualized toppings allows you to serve this mug cake to your unique specifications. You get exactly what you want, and so does everyone else. The sky is the limit as you experiment with nuts, fruits, chocolate, and more. Yogurt makes a perfect protein topping for breakfast. For dessert, go crazy with nuts and fresh, seasonal berries. Sweet chocolate chips work, as well. 
    • Healthy and Nutritious: The oats are a good source of fiber. The combination of scrumptious and healthy isn’t always easy to find. Here it is conveniently in a cup and ready in a few seconds.
    • Diet-Friendly Options: Easy Oatmeal mug cakes are easily adjustable (use plant-based milk such as almond or soy milk) to vegan. Fortunately, this is also a gluten-free oat cake recipe. It’s a win-win for all. You can check the label and ensure that your oats are gluten-free for a healthy dessert without flour. 
    • Adaptable: This mug cake recipe with oatmeal can be followed by using even flours. Check my “Substitution” section to prepare your mug cake with flour.

    This oatmeal mug cake is a win-win for all—a healthy, delicious dessert or breakfast option conveniently made in a cup!

    Oatmeal scooped from the mug cake in a spoon.

    What to Serve with Oatmeal Mug Cake

    Breakfast Toppings: A dollop of yogurt or some fresh berries can be the ideal topping for a breakfast mug cake. Don’t forget a refreshing glass of milk. 

    Dessert Pairings: If you enjoy the mug cake for dessert, savor it with a cup of aromatic coffee. My Salted Caramel Latte recipe goes well with this healthy treat. Try it! Have it with vanilla ice cream, honey, or chocolate sauce. 

    Fresh Fruits: And you cannot go wrong with fresh fruit. Serve with seasonal fruits for a burst of natural sweetness and flavor. I enjoyed mine with fresh raspberries!

    Spices: A sprinkle of spices such as cinnamon truly elevates the taste of your oats mug cake into something special. So don’t miss that spice!

    These pairings make your oatmeal mug cake versatile, whether for breakfast, dessert, or a quick snack!

    Ingredients

    These ingredients work together to create a perfectly balanced and satisfying oatmeal mug cake!

    Oatmeal mug cake ingredients laid out.
    • Milk: Provides moisture and helps bind the ingredients together, creating a soft and fluffy texture in the mug cake. You can use almond milk or oat milk or regular milk.
    • Maple Syrup: Acts as a natural sweetener, adding a rich, caramel-like flavor while keeping the cake refined sugar-free. You can also you brown or white sugar instead.
    • Egg: Adds structure and richness to the cake, helping it rise and stay fluffy during cooking.
    • Vegetable Oil: Helps the cake stays moist and tender, preventing it from drying out.
    • Vanilla Extract: Enhances the flavor with a subtle sweetness and aromatic depth.
    • Whole Grain Rolled Oats: Adds texture and fiber, making the cake hearty and nutritious while maintaining its dessert-like appeal.
    • Baking Powder: Helps the cake rise by creating air pockets, resulting in a light and fluffy texture.
    • Ground Cinnamon: Adds a warm, aromatic spice that complements the sweetness. So I strongly recommend this spice to be added.
    • Salt: Balances the sweetness and brings out the flavors of the other ingredients.
    • Mini Semi-Sweet Chocolate Chips: Adds bursts of chocolaty goodness throughout the cake. You can also you dark or white or butterscotch chocolate chips instead.
    • Raspberries: Provides a tart, juicy contrast to the sweetness of the cake, adding a refreshing and colorful garnish. Any type of berries, sliced bananas or nuts like walnuts, pecans., etc., goes well with this recipe.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make oatmeal mug cake in a microwave

    If you’re craving a quick and healthy treat, this gluten-free oat cake is the perfect solution! Made with wholesome ingredients, this recipe transforms everyday pantry staples into a delicious dessert or breakfast option. Cooked in the microwave, this oat cake recipe gluten-free variation is ideal for those with dietary restrictions or anyone looking for a naturally fiber-rich treat. Its simple preparation and rich flavor make it a must-try for anyone who loves quick, healthy desserts!

    In a small add the ingredients; egg, milk, oil, maple syrup and vanilla extract.

    Mixed oatmeal liquid mixture.

    Mix the wet ingredients together using a fork.

    Oats, baking powder and cinnamon added to the bowl.

    Add the dry ingredients; oats, salt, baking powder and ground cinnamon. Mix well.

    Mini chocolate chips added to the oatmeal mug cake batter in white mug.

    Transfer the prepared oatmeal cake batter into a mug and add the chocolate chips. Give a quick mix.

    Microwave the oatmeal mug cake on high for 2 minutes, then check for doneness. The mug cake is ready when it rises and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. If it’s not fully cooked, microwave for an additional 30-second intervals, checking each time to avoid overcooking.

    Once done, let the mug cake cool for 1–2 minutes to allow the flavors to settle and the cake to set properly. For a beautiful and flavorful finish, top with fresh fruits like raspberries, strawberries, or blueberries. Add a garnish of fresh mint for a pop of color and a refreshing aroma. You can also drizzle with honey, maple syrup, or a sprinkle of powdered sugar for extra sweetness. Sit back, savor each bite, and enjoy your perfectly cooked oatmeal mug cake! 

    Top angle of oatmeal mug cake topped with raspberries and chocolare chips.

    Substitutions/Variations for Oatmeal Mug Cake

    There are a multitude of variations to preparing an oatmeal mug cake. These below variations make your oatmeal mug cake versatile, nutritious, and a hit with the whole family!

    • Add Veggies: The first secret variation, to get more veggies into your kids, is adding grated carrots to the oats. It tastes great, and they will never know. Being a parent can involve a high level of sneakiness. 
    • Customizable Toppings: Toppings vary according to taste; people can choose their favorites, from chopped nuts, berries, and mini chocolate chips. 
    • Use Oat Flour: Oat flour makes an interesting addition to or substitution for the oats alone as it makes the texture more cake-like. It also adds a bit of a nutty flavor. Since oat flour has an abundance of fiber and is gluten-free, it makes for a healthy variation.
    • Peanut Butter Twist: To create a pleasant flavor surprise, add a bit of peanut butter to the recipe. Kids will love it. 

    Equipment

    Microwave-Safe Mug: Use a sturdy mug (10–12 oz capacity) to mix and cook your cake. I opted to mix the batter in a separate bowl and then transferred it to the mug—both methods work, and using one bowl can mean less cleanup!

    Small Bowl: If you prefer to mix ingredients in a separate bowl before pouring them into the mug. Like I did in the recipe.

    Fork: For mixing the ingredients directly in the mug.

    Measuring Spoons and Cups:  To ensure accurate measurements of ingredients like oats, milk, and sweeteners.

    Microwave: Essential for cooking the mug cake quickly and evenly.

    Toothpick: To check the cake is cooked.

    Oatmeal mug cake with raspoberries and chocolate chips in the sides.

    Storing an Oatmeal Mug Cake

    Room Temperature:The mug cake can be left unrefrigerated on the counter and covered for a day. 

    Refrigeration: If you wish to refrigerate it, allow it to cool, then place it in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to five days. 

    Make Extras: Making enough oatmeal mug cake for leftovers is a clever timesaver, especially if you are rushed in the morning or need a dessert in a hurry. 

    Reheating an Oatmeal Mug Cake on microwave : The quickest way to reheat your cake is by placing it in a microwave-safe bowl. To keep it moist, add approximately 3 tbsp. of liquid (such as milk) to each cup of mug cake you are microwaving. Cover your bowl and microwave for about 2 minutes. Remove the bowl and stir it well, then sit down and enjoy your breakfast.

    Reheating an Oatmeal Mug Cake on stovetop: You can also reheat your oatmeal on the stovetop. Place a cup of the refrigerated oats in a small pan and add about a quarter cup of liquid, either milk or water. Cover the pan and simmer the oatmeal for about 5 minutes. Stir gently and taste test to ensure it is warm enough. You should watch the pan as you reheat your meal to avoid burning it.

    Spoon getting scoop of oatmeal mug cake.

    Tips and Notes for Making the Best Oatmeal Mug Cake

    1. Be sure you use enough liquid for a good consistency when you microwave your mug cake for two minutes. Do not overcook them or they will dry out. You want a thick but pourable batter.
    2. If you prefer, prepare these cakes in an oven at 350 degrees. Just transfer the oven-safe bowl to a baking sheet and bake for about 12 minutes.
    3. Oatmeal mug cakes can also be baked like muffins in a muffin pan. Just watch them closely to prevent burning.
    4. These cakes are all about the oatmeal. However, to make them more cakelike, use oat flour as mentioned above or regular flour. 
    5. You can use the same amount of apple sauce to replace the oil.

    FAQ

    Can I make this oatmeal mug cake without an egg?

    Absolutely! Substitute the egg with 1 tablespoon of flaxseed meal mixed with 2.5 tablespoons of water (let it sit for 5 minutes). You can also use unsweetened applesauce or mashed banana as an alternative.

    Can I use instant oats instead of rolled oats?

    Yes, instant oats will work, but the texture will be softer and less hearty than with rolled oats. So I personally love rolled oats.

    What can I use instead of maple syrup?

    For healthier version you can opt for honey or agave syrup. But even brown sugar  and white sugar can be used as substitutes for maple syrup too.

    How do I make the mug cake vegan friendly?

    Use plant-based milk (like almond or soy), replace the egg with flaxseed meal or applesauce, and ensure your chocolate chips are dairy-free. Follow the same steps.

    Can I add protein powder to this recipe?

    Yes, you can! Add 1 tablespoon of your favorite protein powder to the mix for a protein-packed version. You may need to add a splash of extra milk to maintain the right consistency.

    Horizontal image of oatmeal mug cake with spoon getting scooped.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Oatmeal Mug Cake:

    Easy , quick and easy oatmeal mug cake with chocolate and raspberries .

    Oatmeal Mug Cake

    Abi Guna
    Make this quick and easy Oatmeal Mug Cake in just minutes! A healthy, single-serving dessert or breakfast option that’s customizable, gluten-free, and packed with flavor. Perfect for busy mornings or late-night cravings!
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 2 minutes
    Total Time 7 minutes
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 438 kcal

    Equipment

    • Microwave-Safe Mug
    • Measuring spoons and cups
    • Microwave
    • Toothpick
    • Mixing Bowl

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 tablespoons whole milk
    • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
    • 1 medium egg at room temperature
    • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup whole grain rolled oats
    • ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • 1 tablespoon mini semi-sweet chocolate chips divided
    • Fresh raspberries to serve

    Instructions
     

    • Grease a single-serving mug with baking spray and set it aside.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the milk, maple syrup, egg, oil, and vanilla extract using a fork until fully combined.
    • Add the rolled oats, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt to the wet mixture. Gently fold them in until just incorporated.
    • Fold in the mini chocolate chips, reserving some to sprinkle on top later.
    • Transfer the prepared oatmeal mixture into the greased mug and sprinkle the reserved chocolate chips on top for extra flavor.
    • Microwave on high for 2 minutes, checking for doneness after 2 minutes. The mug cake is done when it rises and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. If not fully cooked, microwave for an additional 30 seconds.
    • Let the oatmeal mug cake cool for 1–2 minutes before enjoying. For a beautiful finish, top with fresh fruits like raspberries and garnish with a sprig of fresh mint. Enjoy!

    Notes

    1. Greasing the mug before pouring the oatmeal batter makes it easier to enjoy and ensures a stick-free oatmeal experience.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 438kcalCarbohydrates: 49.4gProtein: 9.4gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 6.1gCholesterol: 167mgSodium: 248mgFiber: 2.4gSugar: 35.4gCalcium: 130mgIron: 3mg
    Keyword breakfast, easy desserts, Healthy, oatmeal
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Lemon Mini Bundt Cake

    by 3 Comments

    My love for individual desserts knows no bounds! These Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes with Lemon Icing are bright, zesty, and irresistibly delicious—a perfect treat for any occasion. Moist and tender, they’re infused with fresh lemon juice and zest for a burst of citrus flavor.

    Close up shot of lemon mini bundt cake.

     If you’re a fan of citrus desserts, these Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes are sure to become your new favorite. Perfectly portioned, they’re ideal for everything from casual gatherings to elegant tea parties. Each bundlet cake is topped with a sweet and tangy lemon glaze and garnished with a touch of lemon zest for a stunning, eye-catching finish. Whether you’re looking for an easy recipe to impress guests or a special celebration, these mini bundt cakes are guaranteed to be a showstopper for any season!

    These easy mini lemon bundt cakes were inspired by my decadent Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes. If you haven’t tried those yet, be sure to check them out!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Mini Lemon Bundt Cakes are Beyond Special

    These mini-bundt cakes are a treasure at any gathering. They bake up much quicker than the larger size, thus retaining more moisture. Of course, the lemon glaze adds a unique vibrancy. 

    Lemon mini budnt cakes in a white plate.

    Mini bundt cakes are as visually stunning as they are tasty. Bundtlet cakes gratify all the senses. They are easy to prepare, make perfect gifts for the office or for teachers, and are delightfully versatile to decorate. Small bundt cake desserts are easy to deal with at gatherings such as cookouts and picnics as they require no utensils and come with automatic portion control. And they are fun for kids to handle.

    It is easy to create your own hosting style by serving individual miniature bundt cakes as a dessert. There is an abundance of mini bundt cake recipes with which to experiment. This homemade lemon mini bundt cake recipe emphasizes the tangy pleasure of lemons.

    Why Fresh Lemons Are Essential for Perfectly Balanced Pastry Flavors

    Lemons are used for more than lemonade. The addition of lemon flavor to pastry adds complexity and a pleasant tartness. Despite their tartness, lemons contain sugar, allowing lemons and sugar to work together in tasty harmony while subtly contrasting each other. The pairing of these two ingredients is a successful culinary marriage that creates a new and unique flavor profile. (Consider what the addition of salt does to food.) To bring out the true flavor, a tinge of lemon works a similar magic to a tinge of salt.

    Mini lemon bundt cakes drizzled with lemon glaze on top and in sides lemon and milk.

    While cooking emergencies may compel you to reach for bottled lemon juice for your cake and lemon icing, it is emphatically not recommended. Fresh lemons are healthy and brighter due to the lack of preservatives. In a pinch, bottled may work, but chefs agree when flavor counts, only the vibrancy of true, fresh lemons will do. Fortunately, fresh lemons are easily obtained at any Market.

    Serving Suggestions for Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes

    • Pair these cakes with a hot cup of tea or coffee like my salted caramel latte for an afternoon treat or dessert.
    • Keep it simple with a light dusting of powdered sugar over the mini bundt cakes. This enhances the zesty lemon flavor while maintaining a clean, elegant presentation. I do this when I am running out of time!
    • Drizzle the lemond bundts with a sweet lemon glaze made from confectioners' sugar and fresh lemon juice. It adds extra tang and a glossy finish. As I suggested in this recipe.
    • Serve with fresh strawberries, raspberries, or blueberries for a burst of color and natural sweetness that complements the citrus flavor.

    These serving suggestions ensure your lemon mini bundt cakes shine as a star dessert for any occasion, whether it’s a casual snack or an elegant celebration!

    Ingredients

    These ingredients come together to create a moist, flavorful, and perfectly balanced mini lemon bundt cake recipe!

    Ingredients laid out for mini lemon bundt cakes.
    • All-Purpose Flour: Provides structure to the cake and it’s the base that balances the wet and dry ingredients.
    • Baking Powder: Acts as a leavening agent, helping the cake rise and achieve a light, fluffy texture.
    • Salt: Enhances the flavor by balancing the sweetness and intensifying the lemon and vanilla flavor.
    • Butter: Adds richness and moisture to the bundt cakes.
    • White Granulated Sugar: Sweetens the cake and helps retain moisture during baking.
    • Eggs: Provide structure, richness, and stability while binding the ingredients together for a smooth batter.
    • Sour Cream: Adds moisture and a slight tang, complementing the lemon flavor and ensuring a soft, moist crumb.
    • Oil: Contributes to the cake’s moisture, keeping it soft and tender even after cooling.
    • Fresh Lemon Juice:Infuses the cake with a bright, tangy citrus flavor.
    • Lemon Zest: Adds concentrated lemon aroma and citrusy burst.
    • Vanilla Extract: Complements the lemon flavor with a subtle sweetness and warmth
    • Confectioners’ Sugar: Used to create the sweetened lemon drizzle that adds the perfect touch of sweetness to the lemon bundt cakes.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to Make a Mini Lemon Bundt Cake with Sour Cream

    As with most baking jobs, start by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. And here comes the main job, greasing your mini bundt pans. I recommend dusting it with flour after greasing as it is critical to prevent the cakes from sticking. Then in a medium bowl, combine the flour, baking powder, and salt. Mix well and set aside.

    Lemon mini bundt cake in a cooling rack.

    In a separate bowl start whipping the butter and sugar with a hand mixer to ensure light cakes until the mixture is smooth and fluffy. Start from low speed and gradually increase the speed and beat for 4-5 minutes.

    Keep whipping as you add an egg at a time and whip after each addition. Then stir in the remaining wet ingredients, the sour cream, oil, lemon juice, lemon zest, and the vanilla extract. Combine well. 

    The sour cream is an important part of the cake batter as it adds moisture and prevents dryness. It also adds just enough tanginess to work with the lemon. 

    Gradually stir the flour mix into the wet mix. At this point, it is time to transfer the batter to the mini bundt cake pan. You can use individual bundt pans (six for this mini lemon bundt cakes recipe) or a single six-cup bundt pan. The latter may be more convenient.

    Fill each up about two-thirds to the top and bake for 20 minutes – until you can insert a toothpick in the center of one of the cakes, and it comes out clean. Toothpick test always works great.

    When the cakes are done, allow them to cool. Use this time to combine the icing ingredients in a bowl until the consistency is smooth. Drizzle the icing over the cooled mini bundt cakes and enjoy. 

    STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS

    In a white bowl butter and sugar for mini lemon mini bundt cakes.

    Beat the butter and sugar until pale and light.

    Sour cream and wet mixture in a white bowl for making mini bundt cakes.

    Sour cream, lemon zest, oil added to the wet mixture.

    Dry mix combined for making the mini bundt cake batter.

    Mix wet and dry mixture together gently.

    Mini lemon bundt cake batter filled in the mini bundt cake pan.

    Fill ⅔ of the bundt cake batter into the mini bundt cake pan.

    Baked mini bundt cakes cooled in the wire rack.

    Once done allow the mini bundt cakes to cool down.

    lemon icing prepared in a bowl for mini lemon bundt cakes.

    Mix confectioners sugar, lemon juice and milk to make lemon icing.

    Drizzle the amzing lemon icing over the lemon mini bundt cakes to enjoy with your cup of latte!

    Lemon glaze drizzled over lemon mini bundt cake in a white plate.

    Substitutions for Lemon bundt Cake Ingredients

    • All-Purpose Flour: Substitute with gluten-free all-purpose flour for a gluten-free option.
    • White Granulated Sugar: Use coconut sugar for a natural sweetener or light brown sugar for a deeper flavor (may slightly alter the color).
    • Sour Cream: Substitute with plain Greek yogurt, buttermilk, or coconut cream for a dairy-free alternative.
    • Fresh Lemon Juice: Replace with bottled lemon juice (in a pinch) or an equal amount of lime juice for a different citrus twist.

    Variations for Mini Lemon Bundt Cake Recipe

    These variations let you customize your lemon bundt cakes to suit different tastes and occasions!

    • Lemon Bundt Cake: Pour the batter into a regular bundt pan and bake for a show-stopping presentation. Drizzle with a lemon glaze or dust with powdered sugar. You can double the recipe and follow this same recipe to create a single lemon bundt cake.
    • Add Blueberries: Fold in 1 cup of fresh or frozen blueberries into the batter. Toss the blueberries in a little flour before adding to prevent them from sinking to make Lemon Blueberry Bundt cake recipe.
    • Lemon Poppy Seed Cake: Add 1–2 tablespoons of poppy seeds to the batter for a delightful crunch and a classic pairing with lemon.
    • Add Raspberries: Swirl in raspberry jam or fold fresh raspberries into the batter for a tangy-sweet flavor contrast. The color contrast of the cake will be amazing.
    • Lemon Coconut Cake: Replace the sour cream with coconut cream and sprinkle shredded coconut on top of the glaze for a tropical twist.
    lemon icing over the lemon mini bundt cake.

    Equipment

    • ​​Mixing bowls - To mix the wet and dry ingredients separately.
    • Mini Bundt Cake Pan - Essential for creating the signature bundt cake shape. Use a silicone or metal mini bundt pan with 6 cavities.
    • Baking Spray - To grease the bundt pan cavities for easy release of cakes.
    • Whisk and spatula - To mix the ingredients.
    • Cooling rack - To allow the cakes to cool evenly after baking.
    • Hand mixer or stand mixer - A handheld or stand mixer makes creaming butter and sugar easier, but you can also use a whisk or spatula.

    Storage Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes

    These easy, moist, and zesty lemon mini bundt cakes are perfect for making ahead and storing for later enjoyment. To keep them fresh and flavorful, here’s how you can store them:

    Room Temperature: You can store your lemon mini bundt cakes at room temperature for up to three days. Simply place them in an airtight container to prevent them from drying out. This is ideal if you plan to enjoy them within a few days.

    Refrigeration: For longer storage, refrigerate the cakes. Wrap them individually or layer them in an airtight container to lock in moisture. They’ll stay fresh for up to four days in the fridge. Allow them to come to room temperature before serving for the best texture and flavor.

    Freezing: If you need to store them for a more extended period, these cakes freeze beautifully. Wrap each cake securely in plastic wrap to protect against freezer burn, then place them in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag. They can be frozen for up to three months. Thaw them at room temperature or in the refrigerator when ready to enjoy.

    By following these storage tips, you can ensure your lemon mini bundt cakes retain their deliciously moist and zesty flavor, whether you’re saving them for a quick snack or a future celebration. Perfect for prepping ahead!

    Back light shot of lemon mini bundt cake in a white plate.

    Top Tips for Preparing Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes

    • Your bundt pans should be five inches in size. If you are using smaller pans, reduce the baking time.
    • If you are out of sour cream, plain Greek yogurt can be substituted in a pinch.
    • You can adjust the strength of the lemon flavor by adjusting the sugar and lemon quantities.
    • Ovens vary, and you don’t want your mini bundts to burn. Check on them during the baking time.

    FAQ

    How Long to Bake Mini Bundt Cakes?

    Mini bundt cakes typically take about 18–25 minutes to bake at 350°F (175°C). However, the exact time may vary depending on cake pan size and oven variations.

    Can I make these mini bundt cakes dairy-free and gluten-free?

    Yes! Replace the butter with plant-based butter, the sour cream with dairy-free yogurt, and the milk in the icing with almond milk or oat milk for the dairy-free version. Replace the all-purpose flour with a gluten-free 1:1 baking flour blend. Ensure all other ingredients are gluten-free as well for a gluten-free version.

    Can I freeze the mini lemon bundt cakes?

    Yes, these cakes freeze well. Wrap them individually in plastic wrap and store in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    How do I prevent the cakes from sticking to the pan?

    Grease the pan thoroughly with oil or butter, then dust with flour. Tap out any excess flour. You can also use a non-stick baking spray designed for bundt pans.

    Will bottled lemon juice work instead of fresh?

    While bottled lemon juice works in a pinch, fresh lemon juice is highly recommended for the best flavor. Fresh lemons also provide zest, which adds a fragrant citrus punch.

    Can I make this recipe in a regular-sized bundt pan?

    Absolutely! Double the recipe and adjust the baking time to about 40-50 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.

    What's the secret to creating a perfectly moist mini lemon bundt cake recipe?

    Use ingredients like sour cream or yogurt, don’t overmix the batter, and avoid overbaking. The glaze also helps seal in moisture and adds extra flavor.

    Horizontal shot of lemon mini bundt cake.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with this lemon mini bundt cake recipe:

    mini lemon bundt cake in a white plate.

    Lemon Mini Bundt Cake

    Abi Guna
    Lemon Mini Bundt Cakes with Lemon Icing are bright, zesty, and irresistibly delicious—a perfect treat for any occasion. Moist and tender, they’re infused with fresh lemon juice and zest for a burst of citrus flavor.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 mini bundt cakes
    Calories 423 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mini Bundt Pan
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Hand Mixer
    • Cooling rack
    • Non-Stick Spray
    • Measuring cups and spoons

    Ingredients
      

    For lemon mini bundt cake

    • 1 ⅓ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter at room temperature
    • ¾ cup white granulated sugar
    • 2 eggs at room temperature
    • ½ cup sour cream at room temperature
    • ¼ cup flavorless oil
    • 3 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
    • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • Lemon zest for garnish

    For Lemon Icing

    • 1 cup confectioners sugar
    • 1 - 2 tablespoons milk
    • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Grease the mini bundt cake pan with oil and dust it with flour. Tap out any excess flour by inverting the pan. Set aside.
    • In a medium bowl, combine the flour, baking powder, and salt. Mix well and set aside.
    • In another bowl, use a hand mixer to beat the butter and sugar for 2-3 minutes until light and creamy using a hand mixer or stand mixer.
    • Add the eggs, one at a time, beating well after each addition. Then, add the sour cream, oil, lemon juice, lemon zest, and vanilla extract, mixing until fully combined.
    • Slowly add the flour mixture to the wet ingredients, mixing until everything is well incorporated.
    • Use a piping bag or spoon to fill each cavity of the prepared mini bundt cake pan up to ⅔ full. Smooth the tops if needed.
    • Bake for 18-20 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
    • Remove the pan from the oven and let the mini bundt cakes cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Then, carefully invert the pan onto a wire rack to release the cakes. Allow them to cool completely for another 10 minutes.
    • While the cakes cool, prepare the icing by combining confectioners' sugar, lemon juice, and milk in a bowl. Stir until the mixture reaches a smooth, pourable consistency.
    • Once the cakes are cool, drizzle the lemon icing over the top and garnish with lemon zest. Enjoy these delightful mini bundt cakes!

    Notes

    1. If you're looking to make a gluten-free version of lemon mini bundts, simply substitute gluten-free flour for the all-purpose flour (1:1 gluten-free baking flour)
    2. Store the bundt cakes at room temperature for up to 2 days, or in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 mini bundt cakeCalories: 423kcalCarbohydrates: 63gProtein: 7.8gFat: 18.9gSaturated Fat: 8.6gCholesterol: 152mgPotassium: 2634mgFiber: 1.2gSugar: 33.2gCalcium: 1150mgIron: 4mg
    Keyword bundt cakes, easy desserts, lemon
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs

    by 5 Comments

    Looking for a quick and delicious snack or appetizer? These Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs are just what you need—and they come together in only 20 minutes! This recipe is incredibly easy to make and delivers perfectly healthy air-fried meatballs that are moist, juicy, and bursting with flavor. Serve them as an appetizer with your favorite dip, or enjoy them as a satisfying snack. Either way, they’re sure to be a hit!

    Chicken meatballs served as a appetizer along with the marinara sauce.

    As I mentioned if you’re looking to switch up your dinner routine, ground chicken meatball recipes are a versatile and delicious option to try. These easy-to-make chicken mince meatballs recipes are perfect for busy weeknights, meal prep, or even as a party appetizer. The real magic, however, lies in pairing them with the best sauce for chicken meatballs—whether it’s a tangy marinara, creamy Alfredo, spicy buffalo sauce, or a sweet and savory teriyaki glaze. No matter your preference, these meatballs are sure to impress with their juicy texture and mouthwatering flavor combinations.

    Looking for more healthy air-fried recipes? Check out my Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs, Air Fryer BBQ Chicken, and Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Close up shot of chicken Meatballs in the air fryer.

    Why You’ll Love This Quick and Healthy Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs Recipe

    • Quick and Easy: Ready in just 20 minutes, this recipe is perfect for busy weeknights or last-minute appetizers.
    • Healthy: Made with lean ground chicken breast and cooked in the air fryer, these meatballs are a lighter alternative to traditional fried versions.I’m always excited to try healthier twists!
    • Juicy and Flavorful: These air-fried meatballs remain perfectly moist and tender, thanks to the ideal blend of ingredients. Every bite is packed with irresistible deliciousness!
    • Versatile: Serve them as a snack, appetizer, or even as part of a main dish with pasta, salad, or veggies.
    • Family-Friendly: Both kids and adults will love these meatballs, especially when paired with their favorite dips like marinara, ranch, or honey mustard.
    • Minimal Cleanup: Cooking in the air fryer means less mess in the kitchen and no oil splatter to deal with. For an even easier cleanup, line the air fryer basket with foil or parchment paper before cooking!

    If you’re looking for more ground chicken recipes, you’re going to love these:

    Stacked meatballs in one above the another in a white plate.

    What to Serve with Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs

    If you’re wondering what to serve with Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs, don’t worry—I’ve got you covered! These ground chicken meatballs are incredibly versatile and pair perfectly with a variety of sides and accompaniments. Here are some delicious ideas to complete your meal:

    1. Serve the chicken meatballs with marinara sauce, ranch, garlic aioli, honey mustard, or barbecue sauce for a flavorful dipping experience. Arrange the meatballs on a platter with toothpicks and a side of dipping sauces—perfect for parties and gatherings as I did here in this recipe.
    2. Pair the meatballs with spaghetti or any pasta tossed in marinara or Alfredo sauce for a comforting and satisfying meal. For inspiration, check out some of my favorite recipes: Ricotta Pesto Pasta and Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine.
    3. Serve the meatballs over a fresh salad with mixed greens, cucumbers, and your favorite dressing like my Kale Quinoa Salad.
    4. Pair the meatballs with creamy mashed potatoes and roasted vegetables such as Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower or roasted Hot Honey Brussels sprouts for a delicious and well-rounded meal.
    5. Make meatball subs with toasted rolls, marinara sauce, and melted mozzarella or Parmesan cheese.

    Ingredients

    These ingredients come together to create flavorful, juicy, and perfectly seasoned chicken meatballs!

    Ingredients laid out for creating Best Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs Recipe.
    • Ground Chicken: The base of the meatballs, ground chicken provides a lean and protein-packed alternative to traditional ground meats.
    • Medium Egg: Acts as a binding agent, holding the ingredients together for perfectly shaped meatballs.
    • Olive Oil: The secret ingredient that adds moisture and richness, ensuring the meatballs stay tender even when air-fried.
    • Worcestershire Sauce: Enhances the flavor with a savory, umami kick that complements the chicken.
    • Plain Breadcrumbs: Helps absorb moisture and adds structure, creating a soft and cohesive texture.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Adds a touch of saltiness and a rich, cheesy flavor to the meatballs.
    • Garlic Powder: Infuses the meatballs with a mild, aromatic garlic flavor.
    • Onion Powder: Provides a subtle, sweet onion flavor without the need for fresh onions.
    • Dried Parsley: Adds a pop of color and a light, herbaceous flavor to balance the seasonings.
    • Salt: Enhances all the flavors and ensures the seasoning is well-rounded.
    • Ground Pepper: Adds a hint of heat and spice, giving the meatballs a touch of depth.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make chicken meatballs in air fryer

    Juicy Chicken Meatballs in Air Fryer texture.

    Making chicken meatballs in an air fryer is quick, easy, and results in perfectly juicy and flavorful meatballs every time. Start by combining all the mentioned ingredients in the recipe card: ground chicken, breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, egg, olive oil, Worcestershire sauce, and seasonings like garlic powder, onion powder, parsley, salt, and pepper. Remember not to overmix and all you need is just your hands for that even mixing.

    Mix everything just until combined, then shape the mixture into even-sized balls using an ice cream scoop or your hands. I used my 1 tablespoon measurement ice scream scoop which is just perfect size for a meatball.

     Preheat your air fryer to 390°F and arrange the meatballs in a single layer in the basket, leaving space between them for air circulation. Remember the easy clean up option I mentioned, use a parchment paper or aluminum foil to cover the basket.

    Cook the ground chicken meatballs in air fryer for about 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through to achieve a golden, crispy exterior. 

    STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS

    Ingredients mixed in a bowl for air fryer chicken meatballs.

    Combine all the ingredients into a large bowl.

    Chicken mixture in a white bowl for the BEST moist chicken meatball recipe.

    Mix it thoroughly.

    Chicken meatballs shaped into balls placed in a white plate.

    Shaped chicken meatballs.

    Chicken Meatballs ready to air fry in the air fryer basket.

    Air fry the chicken meatballs for 10-12 minutes.

    Garnish the air fryer chicken meatballs with chopped parsley and freshly grated parmesan cheese once done.

    These air fried chicken meatballs are versatile and can be served with marinara sauce, over pasta, or alongside roasted vegetables for a wholesome meal. Whether you're prepping a quick dinner or creating an appetizer for a crowd, this method guarantees delicious and effortless results every time!

    Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs with Parmesan in an air fryer basket.

    Ingredient Substitutions for AirFryer Chicken Meatballs

    • Ground Chicken: Substitute with ground turkey for a similar lean option, or use ground beef or pork for a richer flavor. Follow the rest of the same steps.
    • Olive Oil: Use avocado oil, melted butter, or any neutral-flavored oil like canola oil.
    • Worcestershire Sauce: Swap with soy sauce, tamari (for gluten-free), or coconut aminos for a similar umami flavor. I have used soy sauce at times and still these meatballs have turned out so great.
    • Plain Breadcrumbs: Use panko breadcrumbs instead of regular breadcrumbs for a lighter texture.

    Variations for Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs Recipe

    • Cheese-Stuffed Chicken Meatballs: My daughter loves this version. Add a small cube of mozzarella or cheddar cheese in the center of each meatball for a gooey surprise when you bite into it.
    • Spicy Meatballs: Add ½ teaspoon of cayenne pepper, crushed red pepper flakes, or a splash of hot sauce to the mixture for a kick of heat. Spice lovers would love this version of meatballs.
    • Asian Chicken Meatballs: Replace Worcestershire sauce with soy sauce, add 1 teaspoon of grated ginger, and serve with a sesame glaze or teriyaki sauce. The meatballs will turn better than the take outs!
    • BBQ Meatballs: Swap Worcestershire sauce for 1 tablespoon of barbecue sauce and serve with extra sauce for dipping. Best to create during the grilling season!
    Air fried chicken meatballs dipped in the marinara sauce.

    Equipment

    Air Fryer: The essential tool for cooking the meatballs to golden perfection without deep frying.

    Mixing Bowl: A large bowl for combining all the ingredients evenly.

    Measuring Cups and Spoons: For accurately measuring ingredients.

    Ice Cream Scoop or Cookie Scoop: To make uniform meatball sizes for even cooking.

    Foil or Parchment Paper: Used to line the air fryer basket for easy cleanup and to prevent sticking.

    Meat Thermometer: To check that the internal temperature of the meatballs reaches 165°F for safe consumption.

    How to Store Easy Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs

    1. Refrigerating Leftovers: Place leftover meatballs in an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator. These air-fried meatballs will stay fresh for up to 3 days, making them a convenient option for meal prepping.
    2. Freezing Meatballs: Allow the cooked meatballs to cool completely, then arrange them in a single layer on a baking sheet and freeze until firm (about 1-2 hours). Once frozen, transfer them to a freezer-safe zip-top bag or container. They can be frozen for up to 3 months, making them a handy solution for quick and easy dinners on busy weekdays.

    By storing your Moist Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs properly, you can enjoy them anytime as a quick snack, meal, or appetizer!

    How to Reheat these frozen Homemade Chicken Meatballs

    •  Air Fryer Method: Reheat refrigerated or frozen chicken meatballs in the air fryer at 350°F for 3-5 minutes or until heated through.
    • Oven Method: Place meatballs on a baking sheet and reheat at 350°F for 10 minutes. 
    • Stovetop Method: Warm meatballs in a skillet over medium heat with a little marinara sauce for added moisture and flavor.
    CLose up shot of chicken Meatballs near marinara sauce.

    Top Tips to make the perfect air fryer chicken meatballs recipe

    Follow these below tips for perfectly juicy, flavorful, and golden air fryer chicken meatballs every time!

    1. Always preheat your air fryer to ensure even cooking and a perfect golden exterior.
    2. Mix the chicken meatball ingredients until just combined. Overmixing can make the meatballs dense and tough. We don't want that!
    3. Use a cookie or ice cream scoop to ensure all meatballs are the same size. This helps them cook evenly. I used my 1 tablespoon measurement ice cream scoop.
    4. Use a meat thermometer to ensure the meatballs reach an internal temperature of 165°F for safe consumption.

    FAQ

    How Long to Cook Chicken Meatballs in an Air Fryer?

    Chicken meatballs typically take about 10–12 minutes to cook in an air fryer at 390°F (200°C). Turn the meatballs over around the 5–6 minute mark to ensure they cook evenly on all sides. Adjust cooking times slightly based on the size of your meatballs and the type of air fryer you're using, as models may vary.

    Can I use the same recipe to create Air fryer ground turkey meatballs?

    Yes, you can easily substitute ground turkey for ground chicken. Just follow the same recipe and cooking instructions. Ground turkey may be slightly leaner, so be sure to include the egg and olive oil to maintain moisture.

    How do I prevent the meatballs from sticking to the air fryer basket?

    Line the air fryer basket with parchment paper or aluminum foil or lightly spray it with non-stick cooking spray. This prevents sticking and makes cleanup easier.

    Can I freeze uncooked air fryer chicken meatballs?

    Yes, you can freeze uncooked air fryer chicken meatballs! Freezing them before cooking is a great option for meal prep or making a batch ahead of time as it saves a lot of time. Prepare the meatball mixture as directed and shape it into evenly sized balls. Place the uncooked meatballs on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper in a single layer. Make sure they aren’t touching.
    Freeze for 1-2 hours or until the meatballs are firm to touch. Transfer the frozen meatballs to a zip-top freezer bag or airtight container. Label the bag with the date. Freeze for up to 3 months.

    Can I make these meatballs gluten-free?

    Yes! Swap the breadcrumbs for gluten-free breadcrumbs or almond flour to make the recipe gluten-free. This is also a option for creating a Low-Carb Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs.

    Can I use this recipe for baking the meatballs in the oven?

    Yes, you can bake the meatballs at 400°F (200°C) for 15-20 minutes, flipping halfway through. However, the air fryer gives them a crispier texture.

    horizontal image of air fryer chicken meatballs in a white plate with sauce.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Air Fry Chicken Meatballs Recipe:

    Juicy Chicken Meatballs in a white plate with marinara sauce on the sides.

    Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs

    Abi Guna
    These easy-to-make healthy Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs recipe is just perfect for busy weeknights, meal prep, or even as a party appetizer packed with flavors!
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes
    Total Time 22 minutes
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 peoples
    Calories 171 kcal

    Equipment

    • Air Fryer
    • Measuring spoons and cups
    • Ice cream scoop
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Meat thermometer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 lb ground chicken
    • 1 medium egg
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ½ tablespoon worcestershire sauce
    • ½ cup regular breadcrumbs plain or panko
    • ¼ cup parmesan cheese grated
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 teaspoon dried parsley
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
    • Chopped fresh parsley to garnish
    • Marinara sauce to serve

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your air fryer to 390°F for 5 minutes. Line the air fryer basket with aluminum foil or parchment paper to prevent sticking and easy cleaning, and set it aside.
    • In a large mixing bowl combine the ingredients to make chicken meatballs; ground chicken, egg, olive oil, worcestershire sauce, breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, onion powder, dried parsley, salt and pepper. Mix everything together until well combined.
    • Using an ice cream scoop or your hands, scoop out portions of the chicken mixture and roll them into round balls. Place the meatballs on a plate. This recipe yields approximately 20-22 meatballs.
    • Arrange the chicken balls in the air fryer basket, ensuring they don’t touch or overcrowd. Air fry at 390°F for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. Cook until the meatballs are golden and the internal temperature reaches 165°F.
    • Once cooked, transfer the meatballs to a serving plate. Garnish with fresh parsley and extra Parmesan cheese if desired.
    • Serve these juicy air-fried chicken meatballs with marinara sauce, ranch, or your favorite dip. Perfect as an appetizer, snack, or main dish!

    Notes

    • Line your air fryer basket with parchment paper or foil to prevent sticking and make cleanup easier.
    • Place the meatballs in a single layer with space between them to allow air to circulate for even cooking. Cook in batches if necessary.
    • Turn the meatballs halfway through cooking to ensure they’re golden and evenly cooked on all sides.


    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 171kcalCarbohydrates: 9.4gProtein: 11.2gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 2.9gCholesterol: 119mgSodium: 5044mgPotassium: 190mgFiber: 0.6gSugar: 1gCalcium: 96mg
    Keyword Air fryer recipes, Appetizers, Chicken, Healthy, Main Dish, snacks
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes

    by 3 Comments

    Who else loves individual desserts as much as I do? Let me introduce you to my all-time favorite: Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes with Dark Chocolate Ganache. These little cakes are the perfect combination of rich indulgence and elegant presentation, making them ideal for any occasion. Each bite is irresistibly moist and tender, with a deep chocolate flavor elevated by a hint of coffee in the batter. Finished with a glossy, silky dark chocolate ganache, these mini bundt cakes are pure decadence in every bite!

    Mini chocolate bundt cake with ganache.

    Serious chocoholics (and we are all serious) are transported to paradise by these chocolate mini bundt cake recipes with a divine chocolate ganache. They are sweet, moist, and decadent enough to satisfy the most ardent sweet tooth. Moist chocolate bundt cakes are prepared with flavor-enhancing ingredients such as sour cream, Dutch cocoa, and coffee. It’s a culinary magical trio.
    Chocolate ganache never fails to satisfy. It’s a mix of heavy cream and melted chocolate that is perfect as a pastry topping. This dark chocolate ganache recipe originated in France when a clumsy junior pastry chef accidentally dropped hot cream on some chocolate. Out of defeat, a chocolate triumph was born. We all recognize chocolate to be a mood enhancer. As has been said, “Chocolate is cheaper than therapy and you don’t need an appointment.”

    If you are a bundt cake fan then you should try this lemon mini bundt cake recipe too!

    Are you a chocolate lover? Then you’re in for a treat! Don’t miss these indulgent recipes: Dark Chocolate Almond Fudge, Mint Chocolate Brownies, and Chocolate Chip Oatmeal Cookies. Each one is packed with rich, chocolatey goodness that’s sure to satisfy your sweet tooth. Give them a try—you won’t be disappointed!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Flatl lay image of chocolate mini Bundt cake with chococlate chips, milk in the sides.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe Mini Chocolate Bundt Cake Recipe

    • Rich Chocolate Flavor: The combination of cocoa and coffee creates a deep, decadent chocolate taste that’s irresistible. I personally love chocolate cakes with coffee flavored recipes.
    • Incredibly Moist cake : Thanks to sour cream, oil, and butter, these mini bundt cakes have a melt-in-your-mouth texture you’ll adore.
    • Perfectly Sized Portions: Individual cakes make serving effortless—no slicing required! They’re great for parties, gifts, or a personal treat.
    • Easy but Elegant: Despite their fancy look, these cakes are simple to make and always impress with their sophisticated ganache topping.
    • Crowd-Pleaser: Whether for a birthday, holiday, valentines day, anniversaries, potluck or just because, these cakes are sure to be a hit with everyone who tries them for dessert!

    What to Serve with Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes

    Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes are a treat on their own, but pairing them with the right accompaniments can elevate the experience. Here are some of my favorite serving ideas to make your dessert extra special:

    Milk - A glass of cold milk is a classic choice—it perfectly balances the cake’s sweetness and richness, making each bite even more enjoyable.

    Coffee - A cup of coffee is a natural companion for chocolate! Espresso, cappuccino, or a latte beautifully complements the rich chocolate flavor. For a decadent pairing, try my Salted Caramel Latte alongside these mini bundt cakes—it’s a match made in dessert heaven.

    Scoop of Ice Cream - Who can resist cake and ice cream together? Add a scoop of vanilla, chocolate, or coffee ice cream on the side for a delightful contrast of warm and cold. It’s a guaranteed crowd-pleaser.

    Whipped Cream Topping - Top each bundt cake with a dollop of freshly whipped cream. For an extra touch, garnish with chocolate shavings, fresh berries, or even a sprinkle of cocoa powder.

    Close up shot of chocolate mini bundt cakes.

    How to Make Dark Chocolate Ganache

    Chocolate ganache is prepared by combining chopped chocolate and hot cream. You can also use chocolate chips instead like I used in this recipe. Place the chopped dark chocolate chips in a microwave-safe bowl and set aside. Warm the cream in a pan and bring to a simmer. Don’t allow the cream to boil. As soon as the cream starts to simmer, remove it from the heat and pour over the chocolate chips. 

    Allow the mixture to sit for a minute or two, then stir to blend the two ingredients and use immediately while still warm.

    Why Opt for Small Bundt Cakes

    Size does matter. Regarding bundt cakes, small cakes are a frequent choice due to faster baking time, less waste, and the ease of individual servings. It is also easier to experiment with various flavors without the commitment required of a larger cake.

    Visually, these miniature bundt cakes are an adorably cute after-dinner treat. Without specifically broaching the topic, they are also an effective way to keep chocoholics from overeating. They are perfect for crowds as everyone can help themselves.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients laid out for mini chocolate bundt cakes.
    • All-purpose flour: Provides structure to the cake by forming the base of the batter. 
    • Dutch processed cocoa powder: Adds a rich, deep chocolate flavor and a smooth texture, love using Dutch processed always in my  baking recipes.
    • Baking powder: A leavening agent that helps the cake rise by creating air pockets in the batter during baking.
    • Salt: Enhances the chocolate flavor and balances the sweetness of the cake.
    • Unsalted butter: Adds richness, flavor, and moisture while contributing to a tender crumb. Make sure it's at room temperature.
    • White sugar: Sweetens the cake and helps retain moisture during baking.
    • Eggs: Act as a binding agent, providing structure and stability while contributing to a moist texture. Make sure it's at room temperature.
    • Vanilla extract: Enhances the overall flavor profile by adding a warm, sweet aroma to the chocolate cake.
    • Sour cream: Adds moisture and tanginess, helping to keep the cake soft and tender. Make sure it's at room temperature.
    • Oil: Boosts moisture and ensures the cake remains soft even after cooling. Any flavorless oil should work for the recipe and I have used Avocado oil.
    • Brewed warm coffee: Intensifies the chocolate flavor while adding a subtle depth. For deep coffee flavor you can use instant coffee granules too.
    • Dark chocolate chips: Provides bursts of melty chocolate throughout the cake for added richness to the ganache. 
    • Heavy cream: Used to create a silky ganache topping when mixed with chocolate, adding a luscious finishing touch.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Fork cut the mini chocolate bundt cake.

    How to Make Decadent and Easy, Miniature Bundt Cakes

    1. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees and lightly butter or oil the miniature bundt cake pans. You don’t want your mini cakes to stick.
    2. Whip the butter and sugar in a bowl using a hand mixer. This is how your cakes become light and airy.
    3. Combine the dry ingredients, flour, cocoa powder, baking powder, and salt in another bowl. For the cocoa, we highly recommend Dutch chocolate powder; it’s the best.
    4. Beat in the eggs one at a time. Then, add the sour cream, oil, and vanilla extract, mixing until fully combined. A good, light olive oil is your best oil choice. And don’t omit the sour cream, that natural flavor enhancer, as is the final ingredient, a sweet-smelling cup of brewed coffee.
    5. Line up the bundt cake cups and spoon the batter into each without filling the cups to the top.
    6. Bake the mini bundt cakes for about 20 minutes but keep an eye on them. They will be ready to remove from the oven when you can insert a toothpick in the center, and it comes out clean. 
    7. Let the cakes cool completely while you prepare the chocolate ganache.
    8. Combine the chocolate and cream in a microwave-safe bowl. Microwave the ganache for 30-second intervals while stirring after each. Your ganache will be smooth as silk.

    STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS

    Combine the wet ingredients in a bowl.

    Combine the wet ingredients in a bowl.

    Suage and butter in a bowl.

    Beat the sugar and butter in a separate bowl.

    Sour cream added to the bowl.

    Add sour cream, eggs and oil.

    Add the dry ingredients.

    Combine the dry and wet ingredients.

    coffee added to the bundt cake batter.

    Warm coffee added to the bundt cake batter.

    Batter divided ot the bundt cake pan.

    Divide the batter into the prepared mini bundt cake pan.

    Baked mini chocolate bundt cakes.

    Allow the mini bundt cakes to cool down in a wire rack.

    Chocolate ganache in a bowl.

    Combine the chocolate chips and heavy cream to prepare ganache.

    Gently drizzle the ganache over the cooled bundt cakes and be prepared to impress friends and family.

    Dark chocolate ganache drizzled over the mini chocolate bundt cakes.

    Substitutions

    • Flour: Substitute with gluten-free all-purpose flour for a gluten-free option, or whole wheat flour for a nuttier flavor and slightly denser texture.
    • Dutch-Processed Cocoa Powder: Use natural cocoa powder, but note that it may affect the flavor. Because Dutch processes have deep flavors of cocoa comparatively!
    • White Granulated Sugar: Substitute with brown sugar for a deeper flavor or coconut sugar for a natural sweetener.
    • Eggs: Replace with flaxseed meal (1 tablespoon flaxseed + 3 tablespoons water per egg) or unsweetened applesauce (¼ cup per egg) for a vegan option.
    • Sour Cream: Substitute with Greek yogurt or buttermilk for a similar tangy moisture.
    • Freshly Brewed Warm Coffee: Use hot water with a teaspoon of instant espresso powder for the same flavor boost.
    • Dark Chocolate Chips: Substitute with milk chocolate chips or chopped chocolate bar of your choice.

    Variations

    • Orange Chocolate Bundt Cakes: Add 1 tablespoon orange zest and replace coffee with orange juice for a citrusy twist.
    • Cream Cheese Swirl: Swirl a mixture of softened cream cheese, sugar, and vanilla into the batter before baking. It creates a chocolate bundt cake with cream cheese swirl!
    • Adding Nuts: Mix in ½ cup chopped walnuts, almonds, or hazelnuts to create nutty cake variations.
    • Salted Caramel Glaze: Drizzle with homemade caramel sauce and sprinkle sea salt. Try these  variations instead of making your own chocolate ganache.
    Mini chocolate bundt cake with chocolate ganache in a white plate.

    Equipment

    Mini Bundt Pan: Essential for creating the signature shape. Use a silicone or metal mini bundt pan with 6-12 cavities.

    Mixing Bowls: At least two bowls—one for dry ingredients and another for wet ingredients.

    Whisk: For blending dry ingredients and mixing wet components smoothly.

    Electric Mixer (Optional): A handheld or stand mixer makes creaming butter and sugar easier, but you can also use a whisk or spatula.

    Measuring Cups and Spoons: For accurately measuring dry and liquid ingredients.

    Cooling Rack: To allow the cakes to cool evenly after baking.

    Non-Stick Spray or Pastry Brush: To grease the bundt pan cavities for easy release of cakes.

    How to Store Chocolate Mini Bundt Cakes With Chocolate Ganache

    Keep your chocolate bundt cakes in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five to seven days.

    To freeze these mini cakes, wrap them in plastic, then aluminum foil, and place them in the freezer for up to six months.

    Mini chocolate bundt cake in a plate.

    Top Tips to Prevent Mini Bundt Cakes from Sticking to the Pan

    These mini bundt cake pans look adorable. However, they are not created equal. When placed in an oven, they can become unbalanced, and you may have lopsided bundt cakes. Not to fear.

    As an avid mini bundt cake baker, you will benefit from buying mini cake pans that are joined together – very much like a muffin pan with cups. This will help keep the cakes even. Follow the below tips to make the mini bundt cakes perfect every time!

    1. Use a high-quality non-stick mini bundt pan. I have linked mine in the equipment section.
    2. Use a non-stick spray with flour or a combination of butter and flour. Apply generously, ensuring every nook and cranny is coated, especially the intricate designs.(For extra assurance, use a pastry brush to spread the grease evenly like I did mine)
    3. After greasing, lightly dust the pan with flour or cocoa powder (for chocolate cakes). Shake out the excess for a clean coating.
    4. Let the cakes cool in the pan for 10–15 minutes after baking. Removing them while too hot increases the risk of sticking and breaking.
    5. Gently tap the pan on the countertop to loosen the cakes before inverting.

    FAQ

    Can I substitute the sour cream?

    Absolutely! You can use plain Greek yogurt, buttermilk as a substitute for sour cream.

    Can I freeze mini chocolate bundt cakes?

    Yes! Wrap the cooled cakes individually in plastic wrap and store them in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    Can I substitute the coffee in the recipe?

    Yes, if you prefer not to use coffee, you can replace it with hot water or milk. However, coffee enhances the chocolate flavor, so the cakes may taste slightly less rich without it.

    Can I make the ganache with milk chocolate instead of dark chocolate?

    Yes, you can use milk chocolate for the ganache. Keep in mind that it will result in a sweeter flavor compared to dark chocolate.

    Mini chocolate bundt cake with chocolate drizzle on it.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Mini Chocolate Bundt Cake:

    Close up shot of chocolate mini bundt cake with chocolate drizzle on it.

    Mini Chocolate Bundt Cakes

    Abi Guna
    Mini chocolate bundt cake with chocolate ganache is a moist and tender cake with deep chocolate and coffee flavor and silky smooth chocolate ganache perfect to serve as a individual dessert for any occasion!
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Mini bundt cakes
    Calories 483 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mini Bundt Pan
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Whisk
    • Measuring cups and spoons
    • Cooling rack
    • Non-Stick Spray

    Ingredients
      

    For Mini Chocolate Bundt Cake

    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • ⅓ cup Dutch processed cocoa powder
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter at room temperature
    • ¾ cup white granulated sugar
    • 2 eggs at room temperature
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup sourcream at room temperature
    • ¼ cup flavorless oil
    • ¼ freshly brewed warm coffee

    For Dark Chocolate Ganache

    • ¾ cup dark or semi chocolate chips
    • ⅓ cup heavy cream

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Grease the mini bundt cake pan with oil and dust it with flour. Tap out any excess flour by inverting the pan. Set aside.
    • In a medium bowl, combine the flour, coca powder, baking powder, and salt. Mix well and set aside.
    • In another bowl, use a hand mixer to beat the butter and sugar for 2-3 minutes until light and creamy using a hand mixer or stand mixer.
    • Add the eggs, one at a time, beating well after each addition. Then, add the sour cream, oil, and vanilla extract, mixing until fully combined.
    • Slowly add the flour mixture to the wet ingredients, mixing until everything is well incorporated.
    • Pour the warm, freshly brewed coffee into the batter and gently mix until just combined, being careful not to overmix.
    • Use a piping bag or spoon to fill each cavity of the prepared mini bundt cake pan up to ⅔ full. Smooth the tops if needed.
    • Bake for 18-20 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
    • Remove the pan from the oven and let the mini bundt cakes cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Then, carefully invert the pan onto a wire rack to release the cakes. Allow them to cool completely for another 10 minutes.
    • While the cakes cool, prepare the chocolate ganache by combining chocolate chips and heavy cream in a microwave-safe bowl. Heat the mixture in 30-second intervals, stirring after each, until smooth and pourable.
    • Once the cakes have cooled, drizzle the chocolate ganache over the tops of the mini chocolate bundts. Enjoy these delightful treats!

    Notes

    1. For a gluten-free version of the lemon mini bundts, simply substitute the all-purpose flour with 1:1 gluten-free baking flour.
    2. Store the bundt cakes at room temperature for up to 2 days, or in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 mini bundt cakeCalories: 483kcalCarbohydrates: 39.9gProtein: 5.1gFat: 37.1gSaturated Fat: 18.1gCholesterol: 111mgFiber: 2.7gSugar: 30.8g
    Keyword bundt cakes, cakes, chocolate, easy desserts, mini
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Ground Chicken Stir Fry

    by 2 Comments

    Who doesn’t love a dinner that’s ready in under 30 minutes? This Ground Chicken Stir-Fry is the ultimate quick, healthy, and flavorful dish for busy weeknights. Juicy ground chicken is stir-fried with vibrant red bell peppers, crisp broccoli, and savory onions, all tossed in a mouthwatering garlic-ginger soy sauce.

    Ground Chicken Stir Fry In a white skillet

    This one-pan meal is not only simple to make but also packed with protein and veggies, making it a wholesome option that pairs perfectly with steamed rice or quinoa. Want to make it even better? Customize it with your favorite seasonings, or top it off with sesame seeds and green onions for an extra burst of flavor. Ready in no time, this recipe is a lifesaver for those hectic evenings when you need something delicious and satisfying!

    Love skillet stir fry recipes? Try my Glass Noodles Stir Fry recipe perfect dinner option!

    Ground chicken is such a versatile ingredient—it’s a true kitchen workhorse! From spicy chicken meatballs to homemade chicken breakfast sausages and juicy chicken burgers, the options are endless. One of my personal favorites is my Ground Chicken Spaghetti Recipe—a quick, flavorful dinner option that’s perfect for busy weeknights. If you haven’t tried it yet, you’re missing out! Ground chicken makes mealtime so much easier and more delicious.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Asian chicken stry fry recipe in a white bowl.

    What Makes Ground Chicken Special

    Ground chicken does much of the heavy lifting in your kitchen. It can be used for lasagna, chili, burgers, and many other reasonably priced dishes. If you want a top-level ground chicken, buy boneless and skinless chicken meat at your market and grind it yourself to avoid any surprise ingredients. Add a few dark meat thighs to your grinder for extra flavor.

    On its own, lean ground chicken is like a blank canvas – its natural lack of fats means it depends on seasonings, spices, and sauces to create a chicken masterpiece that is very healthy for you. That is why the Asian sauce for this stir fry with ground chicken is so powerful because it contributes to the sublime flavor. Stir-frying with a great sauce can create magic in all Asian ground chicken recipes.

    This vegetable chicken stir fry recipe can be prepared in less than half an hour. With one skillet or wok (minimal cleanup) you combine the ground chicken, vegetables, and outstanding sauce. The good thing is you can be flexible about the vegetables you use.

    Quick and easy chicken stir stry with ground chicken and veggies in a white skillet close up shot.

    Serving Ideas for Easy Ground Chicken Stir Fry

    Ground chicken stir fry is incredibly versatile and pairs well with so many dishes! Here are a few serving ideas to try:

    • Serve with Grains: It’s perfect over fluffy white rice, hearty brown rice, noodles, or even quinoa for a healthier option. If you’d like to learn how to cook perfectly fluffy quinoa, check out my Salmon Kale Quinoa Recipe, where I’ve explained the process in detail!
    • Make a Wrap: Spoon the stir fry into a tortilla with some fresh veggies to create a delicious chicken and vegetable wrap.
    • Upgrade Your Soup: Stir any leftover stir fry into a bowl of ramen or a broth-based soup for a hearty, flavorful meal. It works wonderfully in dishes like my family favorite Spicy Vegetable Soup!

    These options make it easy to enjoy this stir fry in a variety of ways—perfect for quick dinners or using up leftovers!

    Preparing Your Chicken Stir Fry with Vegetables

    1. You start your healthy chicken stir fry meal with ground chicken, available at most markets, or you can have a butcher grind a special chicken breast and thigh meat combination to your exact specifications. 
    2. When the ground chicken is browned, add the aromatics, such as onion, garlic, and ginger to your wok. The aroma alone becomes intoxicating. 
    3. Next, add your vegetables and stir-fry them for a few minutes until they become crisp. 
    4. You are now ready to prepare the magical stir-fry sauce.
    Asian inspired chicken stry fry with veggies.

    Tips for Preparing the Sauce for Your Ground Chicken Stir Fry

    Think of ground chicken as the mannequin in the shop window and the sauce as the fabulous outfit that will make you run inside and buy it. It’s all in how you dress things up.

    You can experiment with the type and amount of sauce ingredients, but soy and oyster sauce are standard Asian sauce ingredients. Liven it up with a chili sauce or sriracha sauce, balance the heat with a touch of honey, and drizzle in a bit of sesame oil. That’s the sauce that will infuse your ground chicken with magical flavor.

    However, all ingredients are not created equal. For the best minced chicken recipes, go for quality ingredients. How can you tell a quality soy sauce from a mediocre one? It’s easier than you think. Start by reading the label and look for minimal ingredients that do not contain preservatives. The shorter the list of ingredients, the better the soy and oyster sauces will be. And the better the sauces, the bolder and more flavorful your stir fry will taste.

    While reading the label, look for the words, “traditionally brewed.” This indicates that the sauce has been made using a traditional method.

    Ingredients

    The ingredients for this Ground Chicken Stir Fry are simple yet packed with flavor! With a base of ground chicken, fresh vegetables, and a savory-sweet sauce made from soy sauce, honey, and a hint of sriracha, every bite is a burst of deliciousness. It’s versatile and customizable, so you can easily swap in your favorite veggies or adjust the spice level to suit your taste!

    Ingredients for simple stir fry with ground chicken
    • Ground Chicken: A lean and versatile protein, ground chicken absorbs flavors well and cooks quickly, making it ideal for stir-fries.
    • Onions: Sweet and savory, onions add depth and aromatic flavor to the dish.
    • Red Bell Pepper: Red bell peppers add a pop of color, crunch to the recipe.
    • Broccoli: Nutritious and fiber-rich, broccoli provides a crisp texture and complements the savory elements of the stir-fry.
    • Chicken Broth: Used to add moisture and enhance flavor. I have used low-sodium chicken broth for this recipe.
    • Soy Sauce: A key ingredient for umami flavor.
    • Honey: Brings a mild sweetness to the recipe. (you can also use light or dark brown sugar instead)
    • Rice Vinegar: A mild and tangy vinegar that adds a subtle acidity to balance flavors in stir-fries.
    • Sriracha Sauce: A spicy chili sauce with a touch of sweetness that brings heat and depth to dishes.
    • Oyster Sauce: A thick, savory sauce with a hint of sweetness, made from oyster extracts, that enhances umami flavor.
    • Ginger and Garlic: The flavor base, adding warmth, spice, and depth to the dish. I usually mince them as tiny as possible.
    • Vegetable Oil: A neutral cooking oil works the best here.
    • Salt and Pepper: Essential seasonings that enhance and balance the dish.
    • Cornstarch: A thickening agent used to give the sauce a silky texture.
    • Green Onions: A fresh and mild onion garnish that adds a pop of color.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Instructions

    Cooked ground chicken in a white skillet.

    Cook the ground chicken in a large skillet.

    Vegetables in a skillet for stir fry

    In the same skillet add the vegetables and cook for 4-5 minutes.

    Chicken stir fry sauce mixed in a bowl.

    Mix the sauce ingredients in a bowl.

    Cooked vegetables and ground chicken in a white skillet.

    Return the cooked chicken to the skillet along with the sauce.

    Once the ground chicken stir-fry is cooked, finish it off by garnishing with freshly chopped green onions for a pop of color and a mild oniony flavor that complements the dish. Serve it warm over a bed of steamed rice!

    Close up shot of grouns chicken stir fry.

    Substitutions

    • Ground Chicken: Swap with ground turkey, ground pork, or even ground beef for a similar texture and flavor. For a vegetarian option, you can try with crumbled tofu as well.
    • Soy Sauce: Use tamari or coconut aminos for a gluten-free alternative.
    • Vegetables: You can use whatever you have on hand! Try zucchini, snap peas, broccoli, or bell peppers as great alternatives.
    • Honey: Substitute with maple syrup, agave nectar, or even a pinch of brown sugar for sweetness.

    Variations

    • Spicy Stir Fry: Add extra sriracha, a dash of chili oil, or fresh chopped chili peppers for a fiery kick.
    • Crunchy Touch: Top with toasted sesame seeds, crushed peanuts, or crispy fried onions for texture.

    Equipment

    In a white bowl chicken stir fry served over white rice.

    How to Store Leftover mince chicken Stir Fry

    You can store your leftover ground chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator. If possible, store separately from any leftover rice.

    When reheating your ground chicken, use the stovetop with very low heat. You can also microwave the dish.

    Freezing is not recommended as it would affect the crispiness of the vegetables.

    Secrets to a Top-Rated Ground Chicken Stir Fry Recipe 

    Any ground chicken stir fry recipe is bound for success, but there are tricks to preparing  a dish that is beyond the ordinary:

    1. Make sure your wok is hot before adding any ingredients.
    2. Slice the ingredients, either meat or vegetables, to a uniform size for even frying.
    3. Do not overcrowd your wok or frying pan and use a high heat when frying.
    4. Stir while you fry to prevent burning.
    5. Use an oil that can handle high heat, such as peanut oil or vegetable oil. Avoid olive oil for serious frying as it lacks a high smoke point.

    FAQ

    How does the stir fry sauce taste like?

    This sauce is a perfect balance of sweet, savory, and tangy flavors! The sweetness from honey pairs beautifully with the savory depth of soy sauce, oyster sauce, and a hint of heat from sriracha. To round it all out, rice vinegar adds a tangy kick that takes it to the next level. The result? A flavorful umami-packed sauce that compliments just about any protein or vegetable you toss it with. It’s a game-changer for your stir-fry nights!

    Can I add any other vegetables to this stir fry recipe?

    Of Course you can! Adding additional vegetables like zucchini, carrots, and beans can also be a great way to customize the recipe to your family likings. 

    Can I replace shrimp with the same recipe?

    Yes, swapping out chicken for shrimp is a good option for those who love to eat seafood. I sometimes do that when I get some fresh shrimp!

    How to make Ground Chicken Stir Fry more saucier?

    If you prefer a saucier stir fry, Increase the quantities (almost double) of soy sauce, oyster sauce, honey, sriracha, and rice vinegar in your recipe.Mix 1 teaspoon of cornstarch with 2 tablespoons of water, then stir it into the sauce while cooking.

    Easy chicken dinner with gorund chicken stir fry in a bowl.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Ground Chicken Stir Fry:

    Healthy ground chicken stir fry in a skillet.

    Ground Chicken Stir Fry

    Abi Guna
     Ground Chicken Stir-Fry is the ultimate quick, healthy, and flavorful dish for busy weeknights. Juicy ground chicken is stir-fried with vibrant red bell peppers, crisp broccoli, and savory onions, all tossed in a mouthwatering garlic-ginger soy sauce.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Asian, Chinese
    Servings 4
    Calories 219 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large Skillet
    • Measuring spoons and cups
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Serving Bowls

    Ingredients
      

    For the chicken stir fry

    • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil divided
    • 1 lb ground chicken
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
    • 1 teaspoon garlic minced
    • 1 teaspoon ginger grated
    • 1 small yellow onion sliced
    • 1 medium red bell pepper sliced
    • 2 cups broccoli florets

    For the stir fry sauce

    • ¼ cup chicken broth low sodium
    • 3 tablespoons soy sauce low-sodium
    • 1 tablespoon oyster sauce
    • 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce
    • 1 tablespoon rice vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon honey
    • ½ tablespoon cornstarch
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • 2 tablespoons chopped green onions for garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Heat 1 tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large skillet or wok over medium-high heat.
    • Add the ground chicken and cook, breaking it into small pieces, until no longer pink for about 5 minutes. Season with a pinch of salt and pepper, then remove from the skillet and set aside.
    • In the same skillet, add the remaining 1 tablespoon of oil. Add garlic and ginger, sautéing for about 30 seconds until fragrant.
    • Toss in the onion and red bell pepper, cooking for 2–3 minutes. Add the broccoli and stir-fry for another 3-4 minutes until the vegetables are tender but still crisp.
    • Meanwhile, prepare the stir-fry sauce. In a bowl, combine chicken broth, soy sauce, oyster sauce, sriracha sauce, rice vinegar, honey, sesame oil and cornstarch
    • Pour the sauce over the veggies in the skillet. Return the cooked chicken to the skillet and bring it to a rolling boil; the mixture will start to thicken.
    • Once done, garnish the ground chicken stir-fry with green onions.
    • Serve them over rice to enjoy.

    Notes

    1. Adjust the cornstarch slurry quantity according to how thick or thin you want the stir fry sauce to be.
    2.  It's also a good reminder to taste the dish and adjust the salt accordingly, as different soy sauce brands may vary in their sodium content.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 219kcalCarbohydrates: 20.8gProtein: 11.9gFat: 10.5gSaturated Fat: 1.6gSodium: 9964mgFiber: 2.9gSugar: 12.8g
    Keyword Chicken, Dinner, Main Dish, Skillet
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Salted Caramel Latte Recipe

    by 5 Comments

    Love Starbucks lattes? This Salted Caramel Latte Recipe is perfect for you! With the ideal balance of sweet and salty flavors, creamy milk, and bold coffee, it’s a must-try for coffee lovers. Best of all, it’s easy to make at home and your next café-quality latte is just minutes away! 

    Caramel syrup dirzzed over the salted caramel latte.

    If you're a fan of indulgent coffee drinks, you’ll love this Salted Caramel Coffee Recipe! Perfect for cozy mornings or an afternoon pick-me-up, this recipe combines the creamy sweetness of a Hot Caramel Latte with a touch of sea salt for a sophisticated twist. The balance of flavors in a Sea Salt Latte enhances the rich caramel notes, making each sip irresistibly delicious. Easy to make at home, this drink is a must-try for anyone looking to elevate their coffee game!

    Are you a coffee lover? Try our Mint Chocolate Brownies—they pair perfectly with a salted caramel latte!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Caramel Latte Recipe

    Quick and Easy: This Salted Caramel Latte recipe takes just minutes to prepare, making it perfect for busy mornings or a cozy afternoon treat.

    Café-Quality at Home: Skip the coffee shop lines and enjoy a rich, creamy latte with perfectly balanced sweet and salty flavors right in your own kitchen.

    Budget-Friendly: Save money by making this indulgent drink at home without compromising on quality or flavor.

    Close up shot of salted caramel latte.

    What to Serve with Your Salted Caramel Latte

    Pairing your latte with the right food enhances the overall experience. Here are some delicious options that go perfectly with a salted caramel latte:

    Pastries: Croissants and cinnamon rolls beautifully complement the creamy and bold flavors of a latte.

    Cookies: Biscotti and Butterscotch Oatmeal Cookies are perfect for dipping into your hot latte.

    Cakes: Indulge in slices of pound cake, Red velvet cookie cake, coffee cake, or mini bundt cakes. For a chocolate twist, try Andes Mint Brownies and Dark Chocolate Almond Fudge —they pair wonderfully with the latte.

    Muffins: Blueberry, banana, or chocolate chip muffins are classic, satisfying pairings.

    Granola Parfait: A chia seed parfait with granola and fruit offers a nutritious, latte-friendly option. Have you tried my Berry Chia Seed Pudding? It’s a fantastic choice!

    What is a Salted Caramel Latte

    We all love our creamy latte, which we have been getting at Starbucks since 1985. That’s when the coffee house began to offer espresso drinks. It all began with quick latte recipes and grew into tasty flavor varieties of milk coffee drinks.

    Creamy Salted Hot Caramel Latte in a Glass

    Exciting as this was for coffee lovers, Starbucks was way behind the times. Europe was popularizing creamy espresso and steamed milk drinks as early as the 17th century, and the invention of the espresso machine led to the modern latte.

    The French, always at the forefront of good taste, invented the incredible combination of salt and caramel in the 1970s. There are few such complex taste treats, and the salted caramel was awarded "Best Sweet in France" in 1971. Enjoying this Best Sweet with our favorite espresso milk drink is the ultimate in luxury as the flavors positively dance in our mouth.

    How to Steam Milk for a Latte

    Steaming milk properly is essential for creating the creamy, velvety texture that makes a great latte. The good news? You don’t need any high-end machines! You can prepare steamed milk easily and budget-friendly using simple tools like a milk frother.

    Frother - Use an electric milk frother or a handheld frother to steam and froth the milk simultaneously. This is quick, easy, and delivers excellent results.

    Stovetop + Whisk - Heat the milk in a saucepan over medium heat until warm (but not boiling). Whisk vigorously to create foam. A handheld frother can also be used for better results.

    Microwave + Jar - Warm milk in a microwave-safe jar or container with a lid. Once warmed, shake the jar or use a frother to create foam.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients laid out for salted caramel latte recipe.
    • Brewed Coffee - The bold base of the latte, strong coffee provides a robust flavor that pairs perfectly with the sweetness of the caramel. 
    • Caramel Syrup - This syrup adds the signature sweet and caramel flavor, creating the indulgent taste that makes this latte irresistible.
    • Sea Salt - Enhances the caramel's sweetness while adding depth to the overall flavor.
    • Milk - Steamed or frothed milk adds creaminess and smoothness.
    • Whipped Cream- A finishing touch that adds a light, fluffy texture and an extra layer of indulgence. 

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make a Homemade Salted Caramel Latte

    1. Begin with brewing a cup of your favorite strong coffee or a shot of espresso. That is the basis of your latte, along with the milk.
    2. Warm the milk on the stovetop or in the microwave. To get that all-important froth, use a milk frother. If you long for ultimate latte heaven, purchasing an electric milk frother is worth it. 
    3. Drizzle the inside of two glasses with salted caramel syrup and add a touch of sea salt. That’s your basic power flavor right there.
    4. Pour an equal amount of your coffee into both glasses.
    5. Add two tablespoons of the caramel syrup to both glasses.
    6. Top each glass with the steamed, frothy milk.
    7. Add whipped cream and more caramel sauce over the top.
    8. Pretend you are sitting in a Parisian sidewalk café, sipping your easy salted caramel latte and savoring your best life.

    Step-by-step Instructions

    Caramel syrup drizzled around the glass.

    Caramel syrup drizzled around the glass.

    Freshly brewed coffee pour into the caramel drizzled glass.

    Pour the freshly brewed coffee.

    Caramel syrup being added to the salted caramel latte.

    Add sea salt and caramel syrup to the coffee.

    Milk frothing.

    Froth the warm milk using a milk frother.

    Milk poured in the latte.

    Pour the frothed milk into the latte.

    Whipped cream piped over the salted caramel latte.

    Top the caramel latte with whipped cream.

    Add more caramel syrup on top—who could say no to that? Enjoy every sip of your latte while it’s still warm!

    Salted caramel latte coffee with whipped cream.

    Substitutions for Salted Caramel Latte Recipe

    Strong Brewed Coffee: Swap with decaf coffee for a caffeine-free option. Alternatively, dissolve 1-2 teaspoons of instant coffee in hot water for a quick and convenient substitute.

    Milk: Use non-dairy milk like almond, oat, coconut, or soy for a dairy-free latte. For an extra rich and creamy texture, opt for heavy cream or half-and-half. For a lighter version, use skim milk.

    Whipped Cream: Choose coconut whipped cream as a dairy-free alternative, perfect for vegans or those avoiding dairy.

    Variations for Salted Caramel Latte Recipe

    Here are some creative twists on the classic Salted Caramel Latte to try:

    • Iced Salted Caramel Latte - Swap hot coffee for cold brewed coffee or chilled espresso. Serve over ice with frothed milk and drizzle salted caramel syrup on top for a refreshing version.
    • Vanilla Salted Caramel Latte - Add a splash of vanilla extract or a pump of vanilla syrup for an extra layer of sweetness and flavor.
    • Pumpkin Salted Caramel Latte - Mix in 1-2 tablespoons of pumpkin puree and a pinch of pumpkin spice for a cozy, fall-inspired variation.
    • Salted Caramel Chai Latte - Replace the coffee with brewed chai tea for a spiced, caramel-infused chai latte.

    Equipment

    Coffee Maker or Espresso Machine - To brew strong coffee or espresso 

    Milk Frother - To create creamy, frothed milk for your latte.

    Microwave safe glass/mug - To warm the milk

    Measuring Spoons and Cups - For accurately measuring the coffee, syrup, and milk.

    Top angle shot of salted caramel latte.

    Reheating Your Salted Caramel Latte

    You can use the steam wand to reheat your caramel latte recipe, although this might affect the original texture. It will stay in the refrigerator for two days, but the magic won’t be there. Like Superman without his cape.

    We suggest brewing your coffee or espresso and refrigerating the same, then adding the steamed milk fresh when you are ready.

    Top Tips

    1. Whole milk creates a creamy texture, but you can use non-dairy options like oat or almond milk for a lighter or dairy-free version.
    2. For the best foam, use a milk frother or whisk vigorously. Some non-dairy milks, like oat milk, froth better than others.
    3. For the best experience, enjoy your latte fresh and hot. Whipped cream and caramel drizzle may lose texture if left too long.

    FAQ

    How do I make the salted caramel syrup at home?

    I have used store-bought caramel syrup for the recipe, but you can also make your homemade syup easily. You have to combine sugar, water, butter, heavy cream, and a pinch of sea salt to create homemade salted caramel syrup. Let it cool before using it in your latte.

    Can I make an iced version of this latte?

    Yes ofcourse you can! Use cold brewed coffee or chilled espresso, pour it over ice, and add cold milk and salted caramel syrup. Stir well and enjoy a refreshing iced salted caramel latte.

    Can I omit the sea salt adding to the recipe?

    Yes, but the sea salt enhances the caramel flavor by balancing its sweetness. Without it, the latte will have a milder, sweeter taste.

    Can I add other flavors to my latte?

    Yes you can! Vanilla extract, hazelnut syrup, or a sprinkle of cinnamon are excellent additions to customize your salted caramel latte.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Salted Caramel Latte:

    Creamy and delicious homemade salted caramel latte recipe in a glass mug.

    Salted Caramel Latte Recipe

    Abi Guna
    This Salted Caramel Latte Recipe is perfect for you with the ideal balance of sweet and salty flavors, creamy milk, and bold coffee, it’s a must-try for coffee lovers.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2
    Calories 291 kcal

    Equipment

    • Coffee Maker or Espresso Machine
    • Milk Frother
    • Microwave safe mugs
    • Measuring spoons and cups

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup strong brewed coffee
    • 4 tablespoons caramel syrup or caramel sauce
    • Pinch of sea salt
    • 2 cups milk
    • Whipped cream for topping

    Instructions
     

    • Brew a shot of espresso or 1 cup of strong coffee. Set it aside.
    • Heat the milk in a saucepan or microwave until warm. Froth it using a milk frother until it’s light and foamy.
    • Coat the inner sides of two glasses with a drizzle of salted caramel syrup. Sprinkle a pinch of sea salt inside for added flavor.
    • Divide the brewed coffee equally between the two glasses.
    • Stir 2 tablespoons of salted caramel syrup into each glass.
    • Pour the steamed milk over the coffee, dividing it evenly between the glasses.
    • Top with whipped cream and drizzle with caramel sauce over.
    • Sip and savor your homemade Salted Caramel Latte!

    Notes

    1. This recipe makes 2 servings of salted caramel lattes, with each serving being 8 ounces.
    2. For a bold flavor, use strong brewed coffee or espresso. Weak coffee may dilute the taste of the latte.
    3. Adjust the amount of caramel syrup to suit your taste. If it’s too sweet, reduce the syrup or add more coffee.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 291kcalCarbohydrates: 32.9gProtein: 3.4gFat: 16.1gSaturated Fat: 9.2gCholesterol: 58mgSodium: 19640mgPotassium: 116mgSugar: 28.5gVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 121mg
    Keyword caramel, coffee, drinks, latte
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs

    by 9 Comments

    Introducing our family’s favorite Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs! These chicken thighs are irresistibly juicy, tender, and packed with bold, delicious flavor. Perfect for a quick and easy meal everyone will love!

    Close-Up of Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Garnished with Sesame Seeds with teriyaki sauce drizzle.

    These crispy teriyaki chicken thighs are the ultimate solution for quick and easy weeknight dinners. Cooked to perfection in the air fryer, they develop a crispy, golden skin while staying incredibly moist and juicy inside. Brushed with a rich, homemade teriyaki sauce, every bite is coated in a sticky, savory-sweet glaze that caramelizes beautifully as they finish cooking. Trust me—you’ll find yourself making these again and again! Better than the Panda Express teriyaki chicken recipe!

    If you're a fan of air fryer recipes, you absolutely have to try these popular dishes: Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs , Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs, and Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges. They’re easy, delicious, and perfect for any meal! And also you can check this Lemon Pepper Chicken Thighs recipe to make it for a weekend dinner!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Air Fry Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Recipe

    • Quick and Easy - Ready in under 30 minutes, this recipe is perfect for busy weeknights. I like to marinate the chicken over the weekend so it’s ready to cook anytime during the week—super convenient!
    • Healthy and Light - Made with minimal oil and simple ingredients, this recipe is a lighter alternative to traditional teriyaki dishes. No need to worry about extra calories here!
    • Absolutely Delicious - This might just be the most delicious chicken thigh recipe you’ve ever made! The air fryer ensures the chicken is tender and juicy on the inside, with perfectly crisp, golden skin. Coated in a rich, savory-sweet homemade teriyaki sauce, every bite bursts with flavor.
    • Kid-Friendly - The sticky, caramelized glaze is a favorite among kids and adults alike. It’s a guaranteed crowd-pleaser!
    • Customizable - You can easily adapt this recipe by swapping chicken thighs for breasts or drumsticks, depending on your preference. It’s as flexible as it is delicious! Once you try it, this recipe is sure to become a regular in your dinner rotation!
    Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs in the air fryer basket.

    What to Serve with Your Teriyaki Chicken Thighs

    With teriyaki chicken thighs in air fryer, you get bold and powerful flavors that deserve equally delicious side dishes. Here are some complementary ideas to pair with this dish:

    • Rice: Flavored or plain, rice is a classic and versatile accompaniment. I love pairing it with a bowl of fluffy white rice, as shown here, but mashed potatoes can also work as a comforting alternative.
    • Noodles: Lo mein, soba, or rice noodles tossed in soy sauce and sesame oil make an excellent Asian-inspired side. For something special, try my Glass Noodles Stir-Fry recipe!
    • Oven-Roasted Veggies: Roasted carrots and cauliflower, or Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts pair beautifully with teriyaki chicken thighs. Drizzle them with soy sauce and sprinkle with sesame seeds for an extra burst of flavor.
    • Chinese Slaw: A refreshing and flavorful slaw made with cabbage, carrots, and a light, tangy dressing offers a perfect contrast to the richness of the teriyaki glaze.
    • Stir-Fried Vegetables: A colorful medley of bell peppers, broccoli, snap peas, and carrots stir-fried with garlic and sesame oil makes for a healthy, vibrant, and flavorful side dish.

    What Makes Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Special

    Everything about this meal speaks of a culinary masterpiece, Teriyaki sauce helps produce a rice and complex sticky sauce sweetened with brown sugar. Marinating the chicken in this luscious sauce helps infuse the thighs with maximum flavor.

    We highly recommend using bone-in and skin-on thighs for your air-frying experience. The bone helps moisturize the meat from the inside out, while the skin adds a richer flavor and a crispy skin. Ironically, bone-in and skin-on chicken thighs are not only more flavorful, but they are also cheaper to buy. Win-win all the way.

    Perfectly Cooked Chicken Thighs in a Rich, Sticky Teriyaki Sauce in a white plate.

    One of the secrets to our air fryer teriyaki chicken is the homemade teriyaki sauce. Preparing your own sauce puts you in control of the flavor and the level of sweetness and spiciness. You will find that using fresh garlic and ginger makes a noticeable difference. There is no comparing store-bought teriyaki sauce to homemade.  

    Teriyaki sauce hits all your taste buds – it is salty, somewhat spicy, and sweet all at the same time. You can use your homemade sauce for meat, seafood, and vegetables. It makes a great dip, as well. Perfect as a main course, this dish pairs beautifully with a variety of side dishes with teriyaki chicken, such as fried rice. For an irresistible upgrade, try this recipe for teriyaki fried chicken, a mouthwatering combination of crispiness and bold teriyaki flavor that will leave everyone asking for seconds!

    Secrets of the Air Fryer: Tips for Perfectly Crispy and Juicy Meals

    Chicken is easy to prepare. Historically, it has been baked, roasted, or fried. These days, more and more chefs in the know are turning to an air fryer for healthy chicken. Air fryer chicken has become the go-to way to prepare easy, juicy, and crispy chicken thighs in only 25 minutes by using hot circulating air. This quick cooking style almost guarantees that the chicken will not dry out. When the skin is left on, the chicken thigh will get marvelously crispy. All this for far less time that it would take to bake it. 

    Once you feel comfortable with your air fryer, it will become your culinary friend to use for a multitude of air fryer recipes such as appetizers (stuffed mushrooms), meats, fish, vegetables, and even cookies. It does it all fast and with less fat. 

    Ingredients

    Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Ingredients in the marble counter.
    • Bone-in, Skin-on Chicken Thighs: The main protein of the dish, chicken thighs are flavorful, juicy, and cook perfectly in the air fryer with a crispy skin.
    • Soy Sauce: Provides the salty, umami base for the teriyaki sauce, balancing the sweetness of other ingredients.
    • Brown Sugar: Adds sweetness to the sauce and helps create the sticky, caramelized glaze on the chicken.
    • Rice Vinegar: Adds acidity to balance the sweet and savory flavors of the sauce.
    • Garlic and Ginger: Contributes a bold, aromatic flavor to the sauce, complementing the soy.
    • Black Pepper: Provides a subtle hint of spice to enhance the savory components of the dish.
    • Sesame Oil: Offers a nutty, aromatic richness that elevates the flavors of the teriyaki sauce.
    • Cornstarch: Acts as a thickening agent to give the sauce its glossy, sticky texture.
    • Sesame Seeds: Adds a crunchy texture to the final dish.
    • Green Onions: A  mild garnish that provides a pop of color and a hint of oniony flavor to complement the teriyaki sauce.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Healthy Air Fryer Chicken Teriyaki Thighs Recipe

    1. Begin by preheating your air fryer to approximately 375 to 380 degrees.
    2. To ensure true crispiness, dry the chicken thighs thoroughly with a paper towel.
    3. Prepare your sweet and savory teriyaki sauce. The origin of this sauce is a bit of a mystery. It is unlikely to have originated in Japan but is probably the result of Japanese immigrants to the U.S. creating a sauce to grill meat. Yaki translates to grill, and “teri” means shine. The fact is teriyaki sauce will help make your meat shine. 
    4. Marinate the teriyaki chicken thighs in half the teriyaki sauce and the seasoning for about 30 minutes. This helps the thighs absorb the flavor.
    5. Transfer the marinated chicken thighs into the air fryer basket without crowding them.
    6. Fry them for about 16 minutes while flipping them halfway through the frying process. Brush the thighs with the remaining teriyaki sauce as you flip.
    7. Serve these crispy chicken thighs with rice or your favorite side dish.

    Steps By Step Instructions

    Teriyaki sauce ingredients in a bowl.

    Combine all the Teriyaki sauce ingredients in a bowl.

    Marinating the chicken thighs in teriyaki sauce.

    Marinating the chicken thighs in the prepared Teriyaki sauce.

    Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs uncooked in the air fryer basket.

    Place the chicken thighs in an air fryer basket to air fry.

    Teriyaki sauce in a skillet.

    Simmered Teriyaki Sauce.

    Teriyaki sauce coated over the chicken thighs.

    Brush the thighs with the prepared teriyaki sauce. Air Fry again.

    Golden Brown Chicken Thighs Coated in Sticky Teriyaki Sauce

    Crispy, golden and sticky chicken thighs are ready.

    Once done, garnish the chicken thighs with sesame seeds and chopped green onions.

    Quick and Easy Air Fryer Chicken Thighs with a Savory-Sweet Teriyaki Glaze.

    Substitutions

    If you're missing an ingredient or need a swap, here are some easy substitutions to ensure your teriyaki chicken thigh recipe turn out just as delicious:

    • For Chicken Thighs: Use boneless, skinless chicken breasts for a leaner option. Adjust cooking time as they may cook faster. nother flavorful alternative is chicken drumsticks, these work great with teriyaki sauce and stay juicy in the air fryer.
    • Soy Sauce: Substitute with tamari for a gluten-free option or use coconut aminos for a slightly sweeter and soy-free alternative.
    • Brown Sugar: Replace with honey, maple syrup, or granulated white sugar for sweetness.
    • Cornstarch: Substitute with arrowroot powder or flour as a thickening agent for the sauce.

    Variations

    Here are some creative and delicious variations to customize your Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs recipe:

    • Spicy Teriyaki Chicken Thighs: Add sriracha, chili flakes, or a splash of hot sauce to the teriyaki sauce for a spicy kick.
    • Honey Garlic Teriyaki Chicken Thighs: Mix in honey and extra minced garlic to the sauce for a sweeter, garlicky flavor.
    • Pineapple Teriyaki Chicken Thighs: Add chunks of pineapple to the sauce or cook them alongside the chicken.
    Asian-Inspired Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Recipe with Homemade Sauce.

    Equipment Needed for Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Recipe

    Air Fryer - An essential for cooking the chicken thighs to crispy, golden perfection while keeping them juicy inside.

    Small Skillet - To simmer and thicken the teriyaki sauce on the stovetop.

    Mixing Bowls - For marinating the chicken and preparing the teriyaki sauce.

    Measuring Spoons and Cups - To accurately measure the ingredients for the sauce and marinade.

    Basting Brush - To evenly coat the chicken thighs with the teriyaki sauce during cooking.

    Storing Teriyaki Chicken Thighs

    Properly storing your teriyaki chicken thighs ensures you can enjoy their delicious flavors for days to come. Here’s how to do it:

    • Refrigeration: Place the cooked chicken thighs in an airtight container and refrigerate them for up to four days. When ready to eat, reheat them in an air fryer, oven, or stovetop to restore some of the crispiness. Using a microwave is convenient but may soften the skin.
    • Freezing: If you want to store them for a longer period, place the chicken thighs in an airtight container or a freezer-safe bag. They will keep well in the freezer for up to one month. To prevent freezer burn, ensure as much air as possible is removed from the container or bag before sealing.
    • Reheating Frozen Chicken Thighs: When reheating frozen chicken, allow it to thaw in the refrigerator overnight. To reheat, use an air fryer or oven to revive the crispy texture. Avoid reheating at high heat too quickly, as this can dry out the chicken.
    Homemade Teriyaki Sauce Glazed Chicken Thighs Fresh from the Air Fryer.

    Top Tip

    Once the teriyaki chicken thighs have been refrigerated, they will still taste delicious, but the crispy skin may lose some of its original texture. Reheating in an air fryer or oven can help bring back a bit of the crispiness, but it won’t be exactly the same as freshly cooked.

    FAQ

    Can I use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of bone-in, skin-on?

    Yes, you can use boneless, skinless chicken thighs. However, they may cook faster, so adjust the cooking time accordingly. The skin-on thighs provide extra crispiness and flavor, but the dish will still be delicious without it.

    Can I make this recipe with chicken breasts?

    Absolutely! Chicken breasts are a leaner option, but they can dry out if overcooked. Keep a close eye on the cooking time and consider pounding them to an even thickness for better results.

    What if I don’t have an air fryer? Can I make this recipe in Oven?

    You can bake the chicken thighs in the oven at 400°F (200°C) for about 35-40 minutes or until they reach an internal temperature of 165°F (75°C). For extra crispiness, broil them for the last 3-5 minutes.

    Can I marinate the chicken thighs ahead of time?

    Yes! Marinating the chicken for a few hours or overnight enhances the flavor. Just make sure to refrigerate the marinated chicken in an airtight container or ziploc bag to lock the flavors!

    Can I Use Store-Bought Teriyaki Sauce for This Recipe?

    Yes, you can absolutely use store-bought teriyaki sauce for this recipe! It’s a great time-saving option and still delivers delicious results. 

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs:

    Crispy Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs with Sesame Seeds and Green Onions.

    Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs

    Abi Guna
    These healthy Air Fryer Chicken Thighs are juicy, tender, and bursting with bold flavors, perfect quick and easy meal that’s sure to be a crowd-pleaser
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American, Asian, Japanese
    Servings 4
    Calories 247 kcal

    Equipment

    • Air Fryer
    • Mixing Bowl
    • Skillet
    • Measuring Spoons
    • Basting Brush

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 bone-in skin-on chicken thighs
    • ½ cup soy sauce low sodium
    • ¼ cup brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon rice vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon garlic minced
    • 1 teaspoon ginger grated
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • 1 teaspoon cornstarch
    • 2 teaspoons water to make cornstarch slurry
    • 2 teaspoons sesame seeds to garnish
    • 2 teaspoons chopped green onions to garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your air fryer to 380°F for about 3-5 minutes.
    • Pat the chicken thighs dry with paper towels to remove excess moisture.
    • In a small bowl, combine the ingredients for the teriyaki sauce: Soy sauce, Rice vinegar, Garlic (minced), Ginger (grated), Black pepper, and Sesame oil. Mix well.
    • Add about ⅓ of the prepared sauce to the chicken thighs and marinate for at least 30 minutes, if possible.
    • Pour the remaining sauce into a skillet and simmer over medium heat for 2 minutes. In a small bowl, mix 1 tablespoon of cornstarch with 2 teaspoons of water to make a slurry. Gradually whisk the slurry into the simmering sauce. The sauce will thicken within 2 minutes.
    • Remove the teriyaki sauce from the heat and set it aside.
    • Place the chicken thighs skin-side down in the air fryer basket, ensuring they are not overcrowded. Cook for 8-10 minutes.
    • Brush the chicken thighs generously with the prepared teriyaki sauce on both sides.
    • Cook for an additional 7-8 minutes to caramelize the sauce and create a sticky glaze.
    • Once done, garnish the chicken thighs with sesame seeds and chopped green onions.
    • Serve the chicken thighs over a bed of rice and enjoy!

    Notes

    1. If your sauce isn’t thick enough, mix a little more cornstarch with water to create a slurry and stir it into the simmering sauce until it reaches your desired consistency.
    2. Arrange the chicken thighs in a single layer, leaving space between them for proper air circulation. Cook in batches if necessary.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 247kcalCarbohydrates: 25.2gProtein: 11gFat: 10.3gSaturated Fat: 2.9gCholesterol: 42mgSodium: 819mgPotassium: 203mgFiber: 3.7gSugar: 13.6gIron: 5mg
    Keyword Air fryer recipes, Chicken, Chicken thighs, Healthy, Teriyaki Sauce
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs

    by 5 Comments

    Do you have just 30 minutes to whip up a quick and healthy recipe for your family? Try these juicy and flavorful Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs—the ultimate dinner choice for anyone craving a satisfying and delicious meal. Perfectly crispy on the outside and tender on the inside, these chicken thighs are coated with a rich, smoky BBQ glaze that caramelizes beautifully in the air fryer.

    Bone-in, skin-on BBQ chicken thighs cooked to perfection in the air fryer, garnished with fresh parsley.

    This air-fried BBQ chicken recipe is a game-changer for busy weeknights or last-minute gatherings. Not only are they incredibly easy to prepare, but they also require less oil than traditional frying methods, making them a healthier option without compromising on flavor. 

    Looking for more healthy air-fried recipes? Check out my Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs, Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs and Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges!

    Want to try more chicken recipes? Check out these delicious options: Lemon Pepper Chicken, Ground Chicken Spaghetti, and Chicken Stir-Fry Noodles!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you will love this BBQ Chicken Thighs Recipe

    1. Crispy and Juicy: Achieve perfectly crispy skin and tender, juicy meat with minimal effort.
    2. Quick and Easy: Ready in under 30 minutes, this recipe is ideal for busy weeknights or last-minute dinners. Loved by adults and kids alike, it’s a meal everyone will ask for again and again.
    3. Flavor-Packed: The sweet and smoky BBQ glaze caramelizes beautifully in the air fryer, adding a delicious depth of flavor.
    4. Healthier Option: Uses less oil than traditional frying methods while still delivering incredible taste.
    5. Versatile: Pairs well with a variety of sides, from roasted vegetables to mashed potatoes or a fresh salad. 
    Golden brown air fryer BBQ chicken thighs with a rich, sticky glaze, served alongside a side extra sauce.

    What to Serve with Barbeque Chicken Thighs

    Many possible tasty sides will turn your air fryer BBQ chicken into a rich meal. Classic sides are macaroni and cheese and baked beans. You can also serve cornbread or roasted vegetables such as Air fry sweet potato wedges and Roasted cauliflower and carrots.

    Another option is to slice up the chicken and create a salad, sandwich, or pizza topping. These delicious possibilities are close to endless. This recipe works especially well for BBQ chicken thighs bone-in, ensuring the chicken stays moist and packed with smoky, tangy flavor. Whether you're using a grill or air fryer, these barbecue chicken thighs are sure to become a family favorite!

    What Makes Healthy BBQ Chicken Thighs So Special

    We will say this once because we don’t want to upset chickens. However, the fact is that the thigh is the best and juiciest part of the chicken. The fat within the dark meat makes it much harder to dry out, and anyone who has ever enjoyed a chicken breast knows how easily they become dry – the difference between dry and juicy chicken breasts can be a matter of minutes. Contrary to the breast, it can be virtually impossible to dry the thighs, which results in a more intense flavor experience. Even if you become distracted and let them cook longer than needed, the odds are they will still be delectable and juicy.

    BBQ Air fryer chicken thighs in a white plate.

    We also recommend using bone-in chicken thighs with the skin on as this will only contribute to the chicken's juiciness and flavor. 

    The thighs are filled with more flavor than the breasts. When marinaded, the thighs absorb the marinade better, and they are quite adaptable and work well with barbeque sauces and different spices. 

    Perhaps it is time to become a thigh person. This recipe works especially well for BBQ chicken thighs bone-in, ensuring the chicken stays moist and packed with smoky, tangy flavor. Whether you're using a grill or air fryer, these barbecue chicken thighs are sure to become a family favorite!

    The Secrets of Air Frying

    Air frying has become popular for a reason. It fries using hot air instead of fat, making a fried meal much healthier and friendlier to your waistline. It cooks faster and neater, as well. 

    When air frying chicken thighs, the skin will be unfailingly crisp without using oil. The texture and taste will resemble that of a fried thigh, without the additional, unwanted fat. And the interior will be deliciously juicy and moist. That’s the best part of crispy skin chicken thighs.

    Ingredients

    Juicy and crispy air fryer BBQ chicken thighs Ingredients
    • Bone-in, Skin-on Chicken Thighs: These provide juicy, tender meat with crispy skin, making them ideal for air frying. The bone helps retain moisture, while the skin adds flavor and texture.
    • Olive Oil: Olive oil helps the seasonings stick to the chicken and ensures the skin crisps up beautifully in the air fryer.
    • Garlic Powder: Adds a savory, aromatic flavor that complements the smoky BBQ glaze and enhances the overall seasoning.
    • Smoked Paprika: Provides a rich, smoky depth and vibrant color to the chicken.
    • Salt: Essential for enhancing the natural flavors of the chicken and balancing the spices in the seasoning blend.
    • Onion Powder: Offers a mild sweetness and depth of flavor, balancing the stronger spices in the mix.
    • Ground Black Pepper: Adds a subtle heat and depth to the seasoning blend.
    • BBQ Sauce: The star ingredient that creates a rich, sweet, and smoky glaze, caramelizing beautifully on the chicken in the air fryer.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to Master an Easy Air Fryer Barbeque Chicken Thighs Recipe 

    1. To bring out the maximum flavor in your BBQ chicken thighs in air fryer, apply a generous helping of spice rub of salt, pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, and smoked paprika.
    2. To keep your chicken from sticking to the basket, spray it with an oil such as olive oil or avocado oil. 
    3. Brush the chicken lightly with your choice of barbeque sauce and fry for 10 minutes. The best barbeque sauce for chicken has a good blend of sweet and tangy.
    4. Baste the thighs with more barbeque sauce and fry for about 8 to 10 more minutes.
    5. By not pouring all the barbeque sauce at the beginning, you keep the sauce from burning. 

    Step By Step Instructions

    If you’re craving flavorful and juicy chicken, this recipe for barbecue chicken thighs is a must-try! Learn how to BBQ chicken thighs to perfection with this simple method that works for both grilling and air frying. 

    Air fry BBQ seasonings in a white bowl.

    Combine all the seasonings into a small bowl.

    Chicken thighs rubbed with the seasonings

    Seasonings rubbed over the chicken thighs.

    Seasoned chicken thighs placed in the air fryer

    Arrange the chicken thighs in an air fryer basket toair fry for 15 minutes.

    Barbecue sauce coated over the air fry chicken thighs.

    Brush the chicken thighs generously with BBQ sauce and air fry for 5 more minutes.

    Remove the chicken thighs from the air fryer and let them rest for 5 minutes before serving. Serve with extra BBQ sauce on the side if desired. Garnish with chopped parsley.

    Golden brown air fryer BBQ chicken thighs with a rich, sticky glaze, in the air fryer basket.

    Substitutions

    • Bone-in, Skin-on Chicken Thighs: Can be substituted with boneless, skinless chicken thighs or chicken drumsticks.
    • Garlic Powder: Can be replaced with fresh minced garlic for a stronger, more aromatic flavor.
    • Smoked Paprika: Substitute with regular paprika, chipotle powder, or a pinch of cayenne pepper for added spice.

    Variations

    • Spicy BBQ Chicken Thighs: Add a pinch of cayenne pepper or a splash of hot sauce to the BBQ sauce for a spicy twist.
    • Honey BBQ Chicken Thighs: Mix a tablespoon of honey into the BBQ sauce for a sweet and sticky variation.
    • Teriyaki-Style Chicken Thighs: Replace the BBQ sauce with teriyaki sauce to create flavorful teriyaki chicken thighs.

    Equipment

    Air Fryer - Essential for achieving perfectly crispy and juicy chicken thighs with minimal oil.

    Pastry Brush - To evenly coat the chicken with BBQ sauce during the final cooking stage.

    Mixing Bowl - To toss the chicken thighs with olive oil and seasonings before cooking.

    Measuring Spoons - To measure out the spices and seasonings accurately.

    Delicious air fryer BBQ chicken thighs ready in under 30 minutes, perfect for weeknight dinners or gatherings.

    How to Store Leftover Barbeque Chicken Thighs

    Store your leftover air fryer BBQ chicken thighs in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. When reheating, add a coating of BBQ sauce to keep them moist and juicy.

    For longer storage, freeze the BBQ chicken thighs in an airtight container for up to 2 months. Thaw them completely before reheating, and brush with BBQ sauce to restore flavor and moisture. Reheat in the air fryer at 375°F (190°C) for 3-5 minutes to bring back their crispiness.

    Hints for barbeque chicken thighs in air fryer

    Making Juicy Chicken Thighs in Air Fryer is easy, and here are a few suggestions:

    1. Preheat your air fryer as you would an oven.
    2. For a trouble-free cleanup, line your basket with parchment paper.
    3. Rest the chicken thighs in a single layer and don’t crowd them.
    4. Begin frying with the skin side down, then flip the thighs up. This will result in the crispest skin. 
    5. Chicken thighs can vary in size. Use a meat thermometer and ensure the internal temperature is between 165 and 170 degrees. 
    6. Avoid burning the barbeque sauce by adding most of it toward the end of the cooking cycle.
    7. Do not spray the air fryer with non-stick sprays.
    Fork passed through the Airy fry BBQ chicken Thighs

    FAQ

    Can I use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of bone-in, skin-on?

    Yes, you can substitute boneless, skinless chicken thighs. However, the cooking time will be shorter, so check for doneness after 12-15 minutes.

    How do I prevent the BBQ sauce from burning?

    Brush the BBQ sauce onto the chicken during the last 3-5 minutes of cooking. This allows it to caramelize without burning.

    Can I make this recipe with chicken breasts or drumsticks?

    Absolutely! Adjust the cooking time based on the cut: chicken breasts may take 12-15 minutes, and drumsticks around 20-25 minutes.

    How long to cook bbq chicken thigh recipes in the Air fryer?

    Cook at 380°F (190°C) for 20-25 minutes, flipping halfway through. Add BBQ sauce during the last 3-5 minutes to caramelize. Ensure the chicken is fully cooked by checking the internal temperature. It should reach 165°F (74°C) at the thickest part. Cooking times may vary slightly depending on the size of the chicken thighs and the model of your air fryer. Always use a meat thermometer for accuracy!

    Can I Make Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs in the Oven?

    Yes, you can easily make this recipe in the oven! Place the seasoned chicken thighs skin-side up on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or in an oven-safe dish. Bake for 35-40 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F (74°C). n the last 5-7 minutes of baking, brush the chicken thighs generously with BBQ sauce and continue baking until the sauce caramelizes. Serve while its still warm to enjoy!

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs:

    Juicy and crispy air fryer BBQ chicken thighs coated with a caramelized smoky barbecue glaze on a serving plate.

    Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs

    Abi Guna
     Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs - the ultimate dinner choice for anyone craving a satisfying and delicious meal. Perfectly crispy on the outside and tender on the inside, these chicken thighs are coated with a rich, smoky BBQ glaze that caramelizes beautifully in the air fryer.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 409 kcal

    Equipment

    • Air Fryer
    • Mixing Bowl
    • Measuring Spoons
    • Brush

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 Chicken thighs bone-in and skin-on
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ cup BBQ sauce
    • Chopped Parsley to garnish
    • Lemon Wedges to serve

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your air fryer to 380°F for about 3-5 minutes.
    • Pat the chicken thighs dry with paper towels to remove excess moisture.
    • In a small bowl, mix the seasonings; garlic powder, paprika, onion powder, salt, and pepper.
    • Brush olive oil over the chicken thighs and rub this mixture evenly over the chicken thighs.
    • Place the chicken thighs skin-side down in the air fryer basket, ensuring they are not overcrowded. Cook for 10-12 minutes.
    • Flip the thighs over and cook for an additional 8 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F.
    • Brush the chicken thighs generously with BBQ sauce on both sides.
    • Cook for an additional 3-5 minutes to caramelize the sauce and create a sticky glaze.
    • Remove the chicken thighs from the air fryer and let them rest for 5 minutes before serving. Serve with extra BBQ sauce on the side if desired. Garnish with chopped parsley.

    Notes

    1. Ensure the chicken thighs are patted dry with a paper towel before seasoning. This helps the skin crisp up in the air fryer.
    2.  Arrange the chicken thighs in a single layer, leaving space between them for proper air circulation. Cook in batches if necessary.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 ServingCalories: 409kcalCarbohydrates: 4.5gProtein: 27gFat: 3.1gSaturated Fat: 7.8gCholesterol: 135mgSodium: 10084mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 3.3gCalcium: 8mgIron: 1mg
    Keyword Air fryer recipes, BBQ, Chicken, Chicken thighs
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges

    by 1 Comment

    Craving a fried snack but want to keep it healthy? Try these crispy and flavorful Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges an irresistible, healthy, and delicious snack or side dish that you’ll want to make again and again! Quick and easy to prepare, these wedges are seasoned to perfection with a blend of spices that enhance their natural sweetness and deliver a satisfying crunch in every bite. 

    Crispy air fryer sweet potato wedges served with ketchup in a white plate.

    Perfect for busy weeknights, game day appetizers, or even as a guilt-free snack, these air fry sweet potato wedges are a versatile addition to any meal. Whether you're pairing them with your favorite dipping sauce or serving them alongside a main dish, they’re guaranteed to be a crowd-pleaser! IIf you only have cubed sweet potatoes, no worries—I’ve got you covered! Try my Air Fryer Sweet Potato Cubes recipe! 

    If you're a fan of air fryer recipes, you definitely need to try these Air Fryer BBQ Chicken Thighs , Air Fryer Chicken Meatballs , and Air Fryer Teriyaki Chicken Thighs! 

    Whether you’re looking to air fry sweet potato wedges for a quick snack or whip up sweet potato steak fries to pair with your favorite burger, this recipe is easy to make and full of flavor. Seasoned to perfection and cooked in minutes, these sweet potato wedges are sure to become a household favorite!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Will Love This Sweet Potato Fries in the Air Fryer Recipe

    • Quick and Easy: This recipe comes together in no time, making it perfect for busy weeknights or last-minute meals.
    • Healthier Option: By using the air fryer, you get crispy, golden results with less oil than traditional frying methods.
    • Versatile Side or Snack: These wedges pair well with burgers, grilled chicken or enjoy them as a guilt-free snack with your favorite dip.
    • Crowd-Pleasing: Whether it's for your family, a dinner party, or a game-day snack, everyone will love this recipe.

    These air fried sweet potato wedges are the perfect solution! With their crispy exterior and tender interior, they’re a delicious and nutritious side dish.

    Close-up of crispy sweet potato wedges in an air fryer basket.

    Why Air Fry Your Healthy Sweet Potato Wedges

    Air frying your vegetables has become synonymous with less fat and extra crispiness. An air fryer also allows for shorter cooking time. It’s a culinary-winning combination. 

    As an air fryer side dish, these hot, crunchy, reddish sweet potato wedges are ready to dominate a meal. Every bite is a gem, especially when drizzled with oil and seasoned with salt, pepper, garlic powder, paprika, cumin, and some cinnamon for an added burst of flavor. Each bite is a true flavor experience. 

    The air fryer’s circulating hot air guarantees a satisfying crunch without unnecessary oil. And the potato wedges are ready in under half an hour and offer valuable nutrition such as vitamin A, vitamin C, potassium, and fiber. All this good taste helps fight diabetes, cancer, and heart diseases. And for anyone on a diet, you can use air fryer sweet potatoes wedges to create the perfect low-calorie, gluten-free, vegan sweet potato wedges recipe!

    What to Serve with Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges

    • Just like traditional fries, these wedges pair perfectly with all types of burgers and sandwiches.
    • Elevate any meal by serving them alongside a salad, like a kale quinoa salad, or a hearty meat dish such as lemon pepper chicken thighs. Even kids will clean their plates with these on the side!
    • Pair these wedges with hummus for a healthy and flavorful option—try carrot hummus for a unique twist.
    • Other delicious dipping sauce options include classic ketchup, ranch, garlic aioli, sriracha mayo, sweet chili sauce, and more.
    Healthy air fryer sweet potato wedges arranged on a plate with a side of ketchup and a fry dipped in.

    Sweet Potatoes Vs Yams

    Many people believe sweet potatoes and yams are interchangeable vegetables. Not so. They are different, and you shouldn’t confuse them when preparing this easy air fryer recipe.  

    Going just by appearance, the yam has a darker rougher skin while the sweet potato is smooth with a more reddish color. Sweet potatoes taste sweeter, while the yams resemble potatoes more in texture and taste.

    Ingredients for Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges

    Healthy air fryer sweet potato wedges ingredients
    • Start with the obvious, sweet potatoes. There is no need to peel them, but you can if you so desire.
    • You want to drizzle them in oil, but vegetable oil is far too unhealthy for this job. Use olive oil or avocado oil. The higher the quality of the oil, the better your sweet potato wedges will turn out.
    • Seasonings such as paprika counter the sweetness of the wedges. It’s fine to experiment with blends of sweetness and spices, such as trying a touch of sriracha for added heat.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Best way for Air Frying Sweet Potato Wedge

    1. Start by preheating your air fryer to 380 degrees to achieve desired crispiness.
    2. Scrub your sweet potato clean before slicing them into ½-inch wedges.
    3. To slice your sweet potatoes properly, slice the end off and cut the sweet potato in half. Place the open, flat side down. Cut the halves into quarters. Be sure to use a sharp knife. 
    4. The crispiness of the wedges comes from the oil, so drizzle them with quality olive oil while they are in a bowl. Toss these wedges well.
    5. Place the wedges evenly in the fryer basket. Do two batches rather than overloading the sweet potatoes and failing to get them crispy.
    6. Bring out the true flavor by seasoning them properly.
    7. Fry the sweet potatoes for around 15 minutes. Use a tong to turn them once during the frying process.
    8. When serving, you have tasty options for dipping sauces, such as ketchup or even spicy ketchup, which is ketchup with a bit of hot sauce such as sriracha.

    How to make sweet potato wedges in air fryer (Step by step instructions)

    Sweet potatoes cut into wedges

    Slice the sweet potato into ½-inch wedges.

    Adding the seasonings to the bowl of cut sweet potatoes .

    Toss with olive oil and seasonings.

    Arranged sweet potaoes in an air fryer.

    Arrange the seasoned wedges in a single layer.

    Golden brown sweet potato wedges seasoned with paprika and garlic powder, freshly cooked in an air fryer.

    Air fry for 13-15 minutes until crispy and golden.

    Garnish with chopped parsley and serve!

    Close-up of crispy sweet potato wedges in an air fryer basket.

    Substitutions

    • Sweet Potatoes: Substitute with regular potatoes, carrots, parsnips, or butternut squash for a different texture and flavor.
    • Garlic Powder: Replace with onion powder or fresh minced garlic for a similar savory taste.
    • Pepper: Swap with white pepper or red pepper flakes to adjust the type and level of heat.

    Variations

    • Spicy Sweet Potato Wedges: Add cayenne pepper, chili powder, or smoked paprika for an extra kick of heat.
    • Herbed Wedges: Sprinkle dried rosemary, thyme, or Italian seasoning for a fragrant, aromatic twist.
    • Cheesy Wedges: Top with grated Parmesan or nutritional yeast after cooking for a cheesy flavor. Use nutritional yeast for a vegan-friendly option.
    • Smoky BBQ Wedges: Season with a sprinkle of BBQ seasoning or drizzle BBQ sauce before or after air frying, just like in my Air Fryer BBQ Chicken recipe.

    These substitutions and variations allow you to customize the dish to suit your taste and dietary needs.

    Easy air fryer recipe for sweet potato wedges with spices, served warm on a white marble table.

    Equipment

    • Air Fryer - Essential for cooking the sweet potato wedges to crispy perfection with minimal oil.
    • Cutting Board - For safely slicing the sweet potatoes into uniform wedges.
    • Sharp Knife - To easily cut through the dense sweet potatoes for even-sized wedges.
    • Mixing Bowl - To toss the wedges with olive oil and seasonings for even coating.
    • Measuring Spoons - To measure out the seasonings and oil accurately.

    Storing Your Sweet Potato Wedges

    Once your sweet potatoes have cooled, place them in an airtight container and refrigerate them for up to four days. To reheat them, transfer them to a baking sheet and preheat your oven to 375 degrees. Bake them for approximately 5 minutes while flipping them once.

    The sweet potato wedges can also be frozen in an airtight container for 3 months. Be sure to thaw them before you reheat them.

    Close-up of crispy sweet potato wedges with fresh parsley garnish, perfect for snacks or side dishes.

    Top Tips for Preparing Perfect Sweet Potato Wedges in Air Fryer

    1. Cut your wedges uniformly. This allows them to fry evenly. 
    2. Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket as this can result in uneven frying.
    3. Serve them immediately. They taste best hot and just fried.
    4. Pat the sweet potato wedges dry before frying to ensure ultimate crispiness

    FAQ

    Can I use regular potatoes instead of sweet potatoes?

    Yes, of course ! You can substitute sweet potatoes with regular potatoes. Adjust the cooking time slightly as needed, depending on the size and type of potato.

    Do I need to peel the skin of sweet potatoes?

    No, peeling is optional. The skin adds extra nutrients and a slightly crispy texture, but you can peel them if you prefer a smoother bite. But I like mine with the skin!

    Why my sweet potato wedges are not crispy?

    Ensure the wedges are spread out in a single layer in the air fryer basket to avoid steaming (avoid overcrowding ). Also, pat the sweet potatoes dry before seasoning to remove excess moisture. And then season them as per the recipe.

    Can I make these wedges ahead of time?

    Yes, you can partially cook them and reheat in the air fryer at 375°F for 3-5 minutes to restore crispiness before serving.

    What dipping sauces go well with sweet potato wedges?

    Trust me, these sweet potato wedges are so tasty and flavorful that you can enjoy them on their own! However, popular dipping options include garlic aioli, ketchup, sriracha mayo, ranch dressing, honey mustard, and sweet chili sauce.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges:

    Crispy air fryer sweet potato wedges served with ketchup in a white plate.

    Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges

    Abi Guna
    These crispy and flavorful Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges are a healthy and delicious snack or side dish. They’re quick to make, perfectly seasoned, and have a satisfying crunch!
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 223 kcal

    Equipment

    • Air Fryer
    • Sharp Knife
    • Mixing Bowl
    • Measuring Spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 medium sweet potatoes
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon paprika
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
    • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • Chopped parsley to garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the air fryer to 380 degrees F for about 5 minutes.
    • Meanwhile, wash and scrub the sweet potatoes well. Cut the sweet potatoes into wedges with uniform thickness to ensure even cooking.
    • In a large bowl, toss the wedges with olive oil until evenly coated.
    • Sprinkle paprika, garlic powder, cumin, pepper, cinnamon, salt, and pepper over the wedges. Toss again to coat evenly with the spices.
    • Arrange the seasoned wedges in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Avoid overcrowding; cook in batches.
    • Air fry for 13-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through until the wedges are golden brown and crispy on the outside and tender on the inside.
    • Remove the wedges from the air fryer and garnish with chopped parsley. Serve immediately. Pair with your favorite dipping sauces ranch or ketchup.

    Notes

    1. To achieve crispy sweet potato wedges, pat the sweet potatoes dry with a paper towel before seasoning to remove excess moisture and enhance crispiness.
    2. Shake the air fryer basket halfway through cooking to ensure even browning on all sides.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 223kcalCarbohydrates: 41.3gProtein: 2.5gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 9746mgPotassium: 2mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8.8gCalcium: 31mgIron: 1mg
    Keyword Air fryer recipes, Appetizers, side dish, snacks, Sweet Potato
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots

    by 5 Comments

    Are you wondering what to make for a weeknight dinner with minimal preparation? Look no further! Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots is a simple yet delicious recipe that transforms these vegetables into a flavorful, caramelized delight through the magic of oven roasting. 

    Healthy oven-roasted vegetables on a baking sheet.

    Perfect as a side dish or a light meal, this dish is not only healthy but also incredibly versatile and easy to prepare. A squeeze of fresh lemon juice and a garnish of chopped parsley elevate the flavors, adding a vibrant and refreshing touch to this wholesome dish.

    Packed with nutrients like fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants, Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots is a guilt-free addition to your table. It’s naturally gluten-free, vegan, and customizable with your favorite seasonings or garnishes. Perfect for weeknight dinners, meal prep, or entertaining guests, this recipe is a true crowd-pleaser. Once you try it, it’s bound to become a go-to favorite for its unbeatable combination of flavor, nutrition, and ease.

    Still searching for more side dish recipes? Have you tried my Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts recipe?

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Will Love This Recipe

    • Simple and Quick: This roasted cauliflower and carrots recipe requires minimal preparation and uses simple, pantry-friendly ingredients.
    • Healthy and Nutritious: Packed with vitamins, fiber, and antioxidants, it's a wholesome addition to any meal.
    • Versatile: It can be served as a side, a snack, or even as part of a main dish like a grain bowl or salad.
    • Customizable Flavors: The recipe allows for endless variations with different spices, herbs, and toppings to suit your taste.
    • Crowd-Pleasing: This dish is vegan, gluten-free, and loved by all, making it perfect for gatherings or potlucks.
    Garlic and paprika roasted cauliflower and carrots side dish

    How to Serve Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots

    While roasted cauliflower and carrots are typically served as a side dish, they can easily be turned into a main dish or used creatively in various meals:

    • Pair with Lemon Pepper Chicken : Serve alongside lemon pepper chicken to create a complete and flavorful meal.
    • Build a Buddha Bowl: Layer roasted cauliflower and carrots with grains, greens, and a protein like chickpeas or tofu for a wholesome bowl.
    • Top Pizza or Flatbread: Use the roasted vegetables as a topping for pizza or flatbread, finished with a sprinkle of mozzarella or goat cheese.
    • Serve with Dips: Pair them with carrot hummus, tzatziki, or a spicy yogurt dip to make a delicious party appetizer or snack.
    • Enjoy as a Snack: Eat them straight out of the oven for a healthy and satisfying snack—just like I always do!

    These versatile roasted vegetables can complement a variety of dishes or stand on their own as a flavorful option.

    What Makes Healthy Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots Special

    Roasting two favorite vegetables such as cauliflower and carrots together makes for a perfect eating experience. Top this healthy side dish recipe with special spices, and you end up with an award-winning, low-carb vegetable recipe that if impossible to resist. 

    Close-up of roasted cauliflower and carrots seasoned with herbs

    This roasted carrots and cauliflower recipe is easy to prepare by roasting the veggies on a baking sheet. However, just because a dish is simple doesn’t imply it is boring. On the contrary, this easy roasted vegetable recipe is bursting with flavors. It is also flexible when it comes to herbs and spices used, allowing you to customize it to your own preference. 

    Like most vegetable and gluten-free side dishes, roasted cauliflower and carrots provide not only an abundance of flavor, but they also allow you to enjoy a variety of health benefits. Carrots are good for their beta-carotene, potassium, vitamins, and antioxidants. Cauliflowers, another superpower veggie, can help reduce the risk of heart problems and other chronic illnesses.

    How to Roast Cauliflower and Carrots

    Most people realize that there is a considerable taste difference between boiling and roasting vegetables. The primary reason for that is that roasting provides a higher temperature, up to 425 degrees, and it is the higher temperature that creates a gentle sweetness by caramelizing the vegetables’ natural sugars and offering a crisp texture. Add seasoning, and you end up with a little piece of roasted heaven. To ensure that your vegetables roast evenly, don’t overcrowd the baking sheet and ensure that they are cut the same size. This will help create your ultimate Whole30 vegetable recipe.

    Of course, fresh vegetables will always be best, but there will be emergency times when you want to serve your beloved roasted cauliflower and roasted carrots but don’t have any fresh ones at hand. That’s when you can use frozen veggies – although they should not be your first choice. Place the cauliflower and carrots on a baking sheet while they are still frozen and drizzle them with seasoning and oil. Roast them for 20 minutes (keep an eye on them), and you will have browned, crispy, roasted veggies.

    Healthy oven-roasted vegetables on a baking sheet

    Tricks to Making Roasted Vegetables

    Magical roasted vegetables don’t just happen. Here are a few helpful tricks:

    1. You can save time by purchasing your vegetables pre-chopped at the store. If your veggies aren’t pre-chopped, chop them before you prepare your meal for an easier time.
    2. Adding chopped opinion provides great depth of flavor and intensifies the taste of a vegetable dish such as roasted cauliflower and carrots.
    3. You decide whether to peel your carrots but be sure to wash them very thoroughly. 
    4. For crisp vegetables, roast at a high temperature of around 400 degrees.
    5. Place your chopped vegetables on a baking sheet in a single layer. If you need more room, use a second baking sheet instead of overcrowding them. 
    6. Drizzle your vegetables with oil to achieve that delightful crispness. Otherwise, they can burn and become dry.
    7. For an even crispness throughout, rotate your baking sheet(s) 180 degrees.
    8. Seasoning your roasted vegetables is important, and don’t be afraid to experiment. You can add heat with some chili powder, curry, or cayenne pepper. Drizzling your vegetables with a hint of acidity, such as lemon juice, will bring them to life.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for roasted cauliflower and carrots
    • Cauliflower - Cauliflower serves as the main ingredient with its mild, nutty flavor, roasting beautifully to develop crispy edges.
    • Carrots - Carrots add natural sweetness and a vibrant color to the dish, balancing the savory spices with their caramelized flavor when roasted.
    • Olive Oil - Ensures the vegetables roast evenly.
    • Salt - Enhances the natural flavors of the vegetables.
    • Ground Pepper - Adds a mild heat and depth of flavor.
    • Garlic Powder - Infuses the dish with a subtle, savory garlic flavor without the moisture of fresh garlic.
    • Paprika - Adds a mild smokiness and a hint of sweetness.
    • Cumin Powder - An earthy, warm spice that pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables.
    • Lemon Juice - Provides a bright, tangy finish, balancing the richness of the olive oil and the sweetness of the roasted carrots.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Preparing Your Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower Recipe

    This fabulous side dish couldn’t be easier to prepare, and it can be customized with ease. The true beauty is it pairs with most meats and fish and is a vegetarian treat.

    1. You can either purchase pre-cut cauliflower florets or cut them yourself. Buying pre-cut is a time-saver.
    2. You have several options when it comes to the carrots. You can purchase regular carrots, as we have done here, and peel and slice them. It is even easier to use pre-cut and pre-peeled baby carrots. And if you are in a mischievous mood, use multi-colored carrots for a lovely effect. Actually, each different colored carrot has been bred for specific health benefits, so they may be an excellent bet. 
    3. Olive oil is a healthy fat that your body wants and needs.
    4. You make the dish your own with the spices you use, and there is a chance you have been underestimating the power of spices. Paprika is a great source of vitamins A and C, as well as iron and potassium. Garlic powder is filled with vitamins, manganese and antioxidants to help with blood pressure and heart health. Cumin is another popular spice with antioxidants that can improve heart problems, blood sugar, and may offer protection from cancer. 

    Step By Step Instructions

    Add the veggies and spices together

    To a large bowl add the veggies, spices and oil. Toss well.

    Spreaded vegetable layer in a roasting pan

    Spread the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking tray and bake.

    The addition of a drizzle of lemon juice will brighten the entire dish.

    Garlic and paprika roasted cauliflower and carrots side dish

    Substitutions

    • Garlic powder can be substituted with fresh minced garlic, onion powder, or roasted garlic paste.
    • Cauliflower can be substituted with broccoli, Brussels sprouts, or cubed butternut squash.
    • Carrots can be substituted with sweet potatoes, parsnips, or zucchini.

    Variations

    • Spicy Variation: For those who enjoy a kick of heat, add ½ teaspoon of chili powder or cayenne pepper. This variation introduces bold, spicy flavors to the dish.
    • Herb-Infused Variation: Add fresh rosemary, thyme, or oregano sprigs to the vegetables before roasting to enhance the overall flavor of the dish.
    • Cheesy Variation: Sprinkle grated Parmesan or crumbled feta cheese over the vegetables during the last 5 minutes of roasting for a savory, cheesy finish.

    Equipment

    • Large Mixing Bowl - To toss the vegetables with olive oil and seasonings.
    • Baking Sheet - A flat surface to roast the vegetables evenly.
    • Parchment Paper  - To line the baking sheet for easy cleanup and prevent sticking.
    • Measuring Spoons - To measure the seasonings and oil accurately.
    Close shot of roasted veggies

    How to Store Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots

    Place your roasted vegetables in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to four days.

    Freezing them is not recommended as they will lose their crispness.

    To reheat, place them in a pan, drizzle them with a few drops of oil, and cook on low for four to five minutes.

    Top Tip

    Stir or flip the vegetables halfway through cooking to ensure even browning on all sides.

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen vegetables for this recipe?

    Yes, Of course you can use frozen cauliflower and carrots, but they may release more moisture, so roast them at a slightly higher temperature (425°F) and spread them out well to prevent steaming.

    How do I know when the vegetables are done?

    The vegetables are done when they are tender and slightly caramelized with crispy edges. You can test tenderness by piercing them with a fork.

    Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

    Yes, you can roast the vegetables ahead of time and reheat them in the oven at 350°F for about 10 minutes to restore their crispness.

    What other vegetables can I add to this dish?

    You can add other sturdy vegetables like sweet potatoes, Brussels sprouts, or parsnips. Just make sure they are cut to similar sizes for even cooking.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Roasted Carrots and Cauliflower recipe:

    Healthy oven-roasted vegetables on a white bowl

    Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots

    Abi Guna
    Easy to make Oven Roasted Cauliflower and Carrots is a delightful way to enjoy the earthy flavors of fresh produce, perfect for weeknight dinners, meal prepping, or festive gatherings.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 167 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowl
    • Baking Pan
    • Measuring Spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 medium head of cauliflower cut into florets
    • 4 medium carrots peeled and sliced
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon paprika
    • ½ teaspoon cumin powder
    • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
    • Chopped parsley for garnish
    • Lemon wedges to serve

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 400°F . Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or lightly grease it.
    • Place the cauliflower and carrots in a large bowl.
    • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with garlic powder, paprika, cumin, salt, and pepper. Toss until the vegetables are evenly coated.
    • Spread the vegetables in a single layer on the prepared baking sheet. Avoid overcrowding to ensure proper roasting.
    • Roast in the preheated oven for 30-32 minutes, flipping halfway through, until the vegetables are golden brown and tender. The edges should be slightly crispy.
    • After removing from the oven, drizzle with lemon juice for a bright flavor.
    • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve warm as a side dish, or enjoy as a light meal with a dip like hummus.

    Notes

    1. Ensure the cauliflower florets and carrot slices are similar in size for even cooking and uniform texture.
    2. Spread the vegetables in a single layer with some space between them. Overcrowding can cause steaming instead of roasting, resulting in less crispy edges.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 167kcalCarbohydrates: 17.9gProtein: 3.8gFat: 10.7gSaturated Fat: 1.5gPotassium: 771mgFiber: 6.3gSugar: 8.4gCalcium: 74mgIron: 1mg
    Keyword carrots, CAULIFLOWER, roasted vegetables, side dish
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Hot Honey Brussel Sprouts

    by 3 Comments

    Is your family tired of the same old side dishes? Shake things up with Hot Honey Brussel Sprouts ! This sweet, spicy, and savory side dish transforms ordinary roasted Brussels sprouts into an irresistible treat everyone will love.

    Hot honey Brussels sprouts garnished with pomegranate seeds and goat cheese

    These sprouts are roasted until golden and crispy, bringing out their natural sweetness and nutty flavor. They're then drizzled with a homemade hot honey sauce, a delightful blend of honey and crushed red pepper flakes, which adds a perfect balance of heat and sweetness. The dish is topped with creamy crumbled goat cheese for richness and tang, and pomegranate seeds for a pop of color and a burst of juicy freshness. It's a crowd-pleasing side dish that's perfect for holidays, dinner parties, or a flavorful weeknight meal!

    Complement the spicy sweetness of the Brussels sprouts with a simple herb-seasoned chicken, such as lemon pepper chicken thighs—perfect for pairing with this flavorful side dish! For a comforting meal, serve it alongside a light soup like tomato bisque or spicy vegetable soup.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    These Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts, topped with crumbled goat cheese and vibrant pomegranate seeds, are a true showstopper on any table. But there’s more to love about this amazing side dish:

    • Easy to Make: With simple ingredients and minimal prep, this recipe is quick and hassle-free—perfect for busy weeknights or festive holiday feasts.
    • Versatile Side Dish: Pairs wonderfully with a variety of mains like roasted chicken, grilled salmon, or vegetarian dishes.
    • Nutritious and Delicious: Packed with fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants, these Brussels sprouts are both healthy and flavorful.
    • Crowd-Pleaser: The bold, sweet, and spicy hot honey glaze is sure to win over even the most skeptical eaters.

    This recipe combines ease, nutrition, and bold flavors for a side dish you’ll want to make again and again!

    Hot honey Brussels sprouts garnished with pomegranate seeds and goat cheese placed in a white platter with gold rim

    Why Brussel Sprouts

    Let’s talk facts. Brussel sprouts don’t top many children’s favorite food list. This green mini-cabbage has even made it into a horror movie, “Ernest Scared Stupid,” as Ernest proclaims, “Pretty soon, the kids won't have to worry about eating their Brussel sprouts because the Brussel sprouts will be eating them!” Ernest has been proven wrong. It’s time we looked at the real facts and see how deliciously mouthwatering oven-roasted Brussel sprouts with hot honey can be.

    All About Hot Honey

    These hot honey Brussel sprouts are a flavor eruption in your mouth with a combination of the heat and the sweet that makes up the hot honey. Honey provides antioxidants for increased health, and the heat, red pepper flakes, is frequently considered a mere pizza topping, The good news is that the benefits of red pepper flakes go far beyond just being a flavoring. Red pepper flakes can provide a boost to the metabolism and may help fight prostate cancer. You can make your own sauce or purchase the Hot Honey at the store.

    Hot honey drizzle over roasted Brussels sprouts

    Hot honey can be used in a variety of ways, such as drizzled over other vegetables (be daring and try it!) and on toast for a bit of a bite. It is healthier than sugar and might help lower blood pressure and cholesterol. 

    If you are wondering how to make hot honey, it is remarkably easy. Combine your basic honey with your choice of heat, such as red pepper flakes, then add a light slash of apple cider vinegar. 

    What Makes Hot Honey Brussel Sprouts Special

    Crisp honey glazed Brussels sprouts are a holiday must-have as they make the perfect side dish. Brussel sprouts are a rare winter vegetable and at the peak of their flavor in December. Serving these tiny cabbages during the holidays is simply excellent timing. It is also good to know that during the season of overeating, Brussel sprouts provide us with Vitamins A and B, manganese, as well as iron, without an abundance of calories. Roasted Brussels sprouts are a powerhouse vegetable. Toss them with goat cheese and they become a showpiece. 

    Ingredients

    • Brussels sprouts: Take a pound and a half of Brussels sprouts and cut them in half. This recipe is flexible, but please use fresh Brussels sprouts instead of frozen.
    • Olive oil: Olive oil helps the Brussels sprouts crisp up in the oven while adding a rich, smooth flavor. 
    • Honey: Honey provides a natural sweetness and sticky consistency for the glaze, which contrasts beautifully with the roasted Brussels sprouts and complements the heat from the red pepper flakes.
    • Red pepper flakes: Red pepper flakes are a good choice, but so is sriracha or a touch of chili paste. Feel free to experiment.
    • Seaonings: To elevate the dish and flavors you need garlic powder, salt and pepper.
    • Goat Cheese: This healthy side dish recipe is topped with crumbled goat cheese, offering a rich and smooth texture to the dish.
    • Pomegranate seeds: An interesting and healthful addition to these Brussel sprouts. They are full of antioxidants to help with heart problems, lower cholesterol, joint pain, and they contain fiber. A pomegranate Brussel sprout dish can genuinely elevate your health.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Instructions

    Seasonings on top of the brussels sprouts

    Add the Brussel sprouts and the seasonings into a bowl. Mix well.

    Brussel sprouts spreaded on the baking tray

    Spread the seasoned Brussel sprouts in a single layer. Bake.

    honey and red pepper flakes in a bowl

    In a microwave-safe bowl, combine the honey and crushed red pepper flakes. 

    Roasted brussel sprouts

    Drizzle the hot honey over the sprouts and toss to coat.

    Sprinkle the roasted sprouts with crumbled goat cheese and pomegranate seeds. Serve immediately and enjoy!

    Substitutions

    • Goat Cheese: Swap with feta cheese, blue cheese, or parmesan for a different flavor profile.
    • Honey: Use maple syrup or agave nectar for a vegan-friendly or slightly different sweetness.
    • Pomegranate Seeds: Replace with dried cranberries or chopped candied pecans for a similar burst of flavor and texture.
    • Red Pepper Flakes: Use cayenne pepper or chili powder for heat if red pepper flakes aren’t available.

    Variations

    • Crunchy Version: Sprinkle toasted almonds, walnuts, or pine nuts for extra crunch.
    • Bacon Version: Add crispy bacon bits for a smoky, savory twist.
    • Vegan Version: Use vegan cheese or skip the cheese altogether and substitute honey with maple syrup or agave nectar.
    • For Spicy Version: Add a pinch of smoked paprika or cumin to the seasoning mix for added depth.
    • Air Fryer Version: Roast the Brussels sprouts in an air fryer for a quicker and crispier alternative.

    Equipment

    • Baking Tray - To roast the Brussels sprouts evenly.
    • Parchment Paper - For easy cleanup and to prevent sticking.
    • Mixing Bowl - To toss the Brussels sprouts with seasonings.
    • Microwave-Safe Bowl - To prepare the hot honey glaze.
    • Measuring Spoons - For precise measurement of ingredients like olive oil, honey, and spices.
    Close up shot of hot honey brussel sprouts

    How to Store Hot Honey Brussel Sprouts

    Your Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts will keep in the refrigerator for up to four days when stored in an airtight container. This makes them a great option for meal prepping or enjoying leftovers. However, freezing the sprouts is not recommended, as the freezing process may cause the Brussels sprouts to become mushy upon reheating, losing their crisp texture.

    For the best results when reheating, place the leftover Brussels sprouts in a baking dish and cover them loosely with foil. Bake at 350°F (175°C) for about 10 minutes, or until they are heated through. If you want to restore some of the crispiness, remove the foil during the last 3 minutes of reheating. Alternatively, you can reheat them in an air fryer for a few minutes at 375°F (190°C) for a crispier finish.

    Top Tip

    Don’t Overcrowd the Baking Tray - For the best texture, make sure the Brussels sprouts are spread out in a single layer on the baking tray. Overcrowding can cause them to steam rather than roast, leading to soggy sprouts.

    Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts in an Air Fryer

    Follow the same preparation steps, but instead of using a baking tray, toss the seasoned Brussels sprouts into the air fryer. Air fry at 375°F (190°C) for 12–15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through for even cooking. Once crispy and golden, drizzle with the hot honey glaze and serve!

    In a fork hot honey brussel sprouts

    FAQ

    Can I make this Brussel sprouts recipe vegan?

    Absolutely! Simply replace honey with maple syrup or agave nectar and skip the goat cheese or use a plant-based alternative.

    Can I prepare this dish ahead of time?

    Yes! Roast the Brussels sprouts in advance and prepare the hot honey glaze separately. Before serving, reheat the sprouts and drizzle them with the warmed glaze.

    Can I use frozen Brussels sprouts?

    While fresh Brussels sprouts yield the best results, you can use frozen ones. Just make sure to thaw and pat them dry before roasting to avoid sogginess.

    Can I use other vegetables in this recipe?

    Yes! Try adding carrots, cauliflower, or sweet potatoes for a colorful veggie mix. Adjust roasting time based on the vegetables you use.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Hot Honey Brussel Sprouts:

    Hot honey Brussels sprouts in a baking tray

    Hot Honey Brussel Sprouts

    Abi Guna
    Shake things up with Hot Honey Brussels Sprouts! This sweet, spicy, and savory side dish transforms ordinary roasted Brussels sprouts into an irresistible treat everyone will love.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 159 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking Tray 
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Measuring Spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ lb. fresh Brussel sprouts
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
    • 3 tablespoons honey
    • 2 teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
    • ¼ cup crumbled goat cheese
    • ¼ cup pomegranate seeds

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 425°F. Line a baking tray with parchment paper and set it aside.
    • Cut the sprouts in half and transfer them to a bowl.
    • Add olive oil, garlic powder, salt, and pepper. Mix well until evenly coated.
    • Spread the seasoned Brussels sprouts onto the prepared baking tray in a single layer. Bake for 20–25 minutes, or until they are golden and crispy.
    • In a microwave-safe bowl, combine the honey and crushed red pepper flakes. Microwave for 10 seconds, just until the honey becomes slightly runny and infused with the pepper flakes' flavor.
    • Once the Brussels sprouts are roasted, remove the tray from the oven. Drizzle the hot honey over the sprouts and toss to coat.
    • Sprinkle the roasted sprouts with crumbled goat cheese and pomegranate seeds. Serve immediately and enjoy!

    Notes

    1. Roasting times may vary depending on the size of your Brussels sprouts and the oven’s heat, so check for crispy edges. You want them golden and slightly charred for the best texture.
    2. Make sure the hot honey glaze is warmed slightly before drizzling over the Brussels sprouts. This helps it spread evenly and coat them better.
    3. Sprinkle the crumbled goat cheese over the Brussels sprouts right before serving to keep it fresh and creamy. If you add it too early, it may melt too much and lose its texture.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 159kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 3.4gFat: 9.4gSaturated Fat: 2.6gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 4877mgFiber: 1.6gSugar: 14.5gCalcium: 165mgIron: 1mg
    Keyword Brussel sprouts, roasted, side dish, vegetables
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Pesto Ricotta Pasta

    by 3 Comments

    Weeknights call for simplicity, and this Pesto Ricotta Pasta is the ultimate creamy, dreamy comfort food! With velvety ricotta, homemade basil pesto, and perfectly al dente pasta, this dish is an irresistible combination of rich flavors and satisfying textures. Whether you're whipping up a quick weeknight dinner or impressing guests, this pasta dish is sure to become your new favorite! 

    Easy Pesto Ricotta Pasta in a white skillet

    If you’ve never tried pesto with ricotta, now’s the time to explore this delicious twist on a classic recipe - it’s a crowd-pleaser for any occasion! For the best results, I highly recommend using my homemade Pesto sauce without pine nuts, which is rich, flavorful, and budget-friendly. Plus, you can use the leftover pesto to make this quick Pesto Butter Salmon recipe for an easy and delicious dinner on another day!

    Are you a fan of quick, 30-minute pasta dinners like my family? Then you should definitely try these easy and delicious pasta recipes: Ground Chicken Spaghetti and Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine—two of my most popular dishes!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]



    Finding the perfect pesto to pasta ratio is key to achieving a flavorful and balanced dish. For a creamy twist, try a pasta sauce with ricotta, blending the richness of ricotta cheese with the bold flavors of pesto. This combination creates a velvety texture that coats the pasta beautifully. Whether you're making pesto pasta with ricotta for a quick weeknight dinner or a special occasion, this dish is sure to impress with its simple yet elevated flavor profile!

    If you're following a vegan diet, don’t worry—this dish is easily adaptable! Simply swap the ricotta for your favorite vegan Velvet rsion, and you’ll still get that creamy, dreamy texture. Whether you’re feeding a family or just treating yourself, this recipe is a perfect balance of ease, nutrition, and indulgence. Serve it alongside a fresh green salad or some crusty bread, and you’ve got yourself a winner.

    Pesto and Ricotta pasta in a white bowl

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Effortless : This dish is the epitome of comfort food, combining creamy ricotta with fresh, herbaceous pesto for a luxurious yet simple meal.
    • Quick and Easy: With a no-cook sauce that can be prepared ahead of time, this recipe comes together in under 30 minutes, perfect for busy weeknights.
    • Versatile: Use any type of pasta you love, including gluten-free options, making it adaptable to various dietary needs.
    • One-Pot Convenience: Minimal cleanup is required, as everything comes together in one pot for hassle-free cooking.
    • Perfect for Any Occasion: Whether it’s a quick family dinner or a dish to impress guests, this recipe is guaranteed to be a crowd-pleaser!

    Why Ricotta Cheese is Essential in This Recipe

    Ricotta is the key to the luxurious creaminess of pesto ricotta pasta. There are two main types of ricotta to consider—American and Italian:

    1. American Ricotta: Made from cow’s milk, it tends to be creamier and slightly saltier. The higher fat content enhances the richness and depth of the pesto ricotta sauce.
    2. Italian Ricotta: Traditionally made from sheep’s milk, it is slightly drier and less moist than its American counterpart. Sheep’s milk ricotta boasts a higher protein and amino acid content, adding a nuanced flavor profile to the dish.

    Both types work beautifully in the recipe, so the choice depends on your preference for texture and flavor complexity.

    Pesto and ricotta pasta in a white bowl and a skillet

    How to Serve This Pesto and Ricotta Pasta

    • In Shallow Bowls: Serve the pasta in shallow bowls for easy eating. Pair with warm, crusty bread or garlic bread to complete the meal.
    • With a Crisp Salad: Balance the richness of the pasta by serving it alongside a fresh salad. Consider a simple kale or mixed greens salad with a light lemon vinaigrette. Speaking of salads, have you tried my Kale Quinoa Salad?
    • Alongside Protein: For a more filling meal, serve smaller portions of the pasta alongside a protein, such as grilled chicken or baked salmon. By the way, have you tried my Baked Lemon Pepper Chicken recipe?
    • With Soup: For a cozy, comforting meal, pair the pasta with a light soup, like my Spicy Vegetable Soup.

    Ingredients For Pesto Ricotta Pasta Recipe

    My favorite part of this recipe is that it requires just 5 main ingredients and 2 optional ones. I love how hassle-free it is to make this insanely delicious Ricotta and Pesto Pasta!

    Pesto Ricotta Pasta Ingredients
    • Pasta, of course, is your prime ingredient. This recipe calls for penne, but you can be flexible. Spaghetti works as well.
    • Pesto – this sauce is made with basil, garlic, parmesan cheese, quality olive oil, with a bit of lemon juice for a touch of acidity. My homemade sauce uses walnuts instead of the more standard pine nuts for a heartier flavor. It truly elevates this pesto ricotta pasta into something exceptional. 
    • Creamy Ricotta cheese that imbues this pesto ricotta pasta with incredible richness. 
    • Garlic powder and red pepper flakes provide a bit of a welcome kick to counter the creaminess.
    • Parmesan cheese helps to enhance the sharp flavor of the dish

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make Pasta with Ricotta and Pesto

    Start by bringing a large pot of salted water to a boil—this is key to enhancing the flavor of the pasta. Add the penne and cook according to the package instructions until it's perfectly al dente—firm to the bite yet tender. Before draining, carefully reserve about ¾ cup of the pasta cooking water. This starchy water will play a crucial role in achieving a silky, cohesive sauce.

    In a large skillet set over low heat, add the pesto sauce. Gently warm it for about a minute, stirring to prevent it from sticking or losing its vibrant flavor. This step intensifies the aroma of the herbs and garlic in the pesto.

    Pesto sauce in a spoon

    Add the ricotta cheese to the skillet and mix until the pesto and ricotta come together in a smooth, luscious sauce. The ricotta adds a rich, creamy texture that complements the boldness of the pesto.

    Gradually stir in the reserved pasta cooking water, one splash at a time. This not only loosens the sauce but also creates a silky emulsion that clings beautifully to the pasta. Adjust the consistency to your preference—whether you like it thicker or slightly more fluid.

    Stir in the seasonings—salt, garlic powder, crushed red pepper flakes, lemon zest, and lemon juice. These ingredients add layers of flavor, from zesty brightness to a subtle, spicy kick. Be sure to taste and tweak the seasoning as needed.

    Add the cooked penne directly to the skillet with the sauce. Toss gently but thoroughly, ensuring each piece of pasta is coated in the creamy, flavorful sauce.

    Divide the pasta into serving bowls or plates. Top with a generous sprinkle of shredded Parmesan cheese for extra umami, and garnish with fresh basil leaves for a pop of color and freshness. Serve immediately while the pasta is hot, so you can fully enjoy the dish's vibrant flavors and creamy textures.

    Step-by-Step Instructions

    Boiled pasta to make pesto ricotta pasta

    Cook the pasta according to the package instructions.

    Ricotta cheese and Pesto in a white skillet

    Add Pesto sauce and Ricotta cheese, mix it and heat it up.

    Pesto Ricotta Sauce in a white skillet

    Stir in the seasonings, pasta water and lemon juice.

    Pasta added to the pesto ricotta sauce

    Add the pasta to the sauce and toss well.

    Top your creamy ricotta pasta with parmesan cheese and fresh basil. The pesto ricotta pasta goes with virtually everything but is especially nice with a refreshing salad. Sit back and enjoy collecting compliments.

    Hint: If possible, grate your parmesan cheese fresh from a fresh block of parmesan instead of using pre-grated. You’ll taste the difference.

    In a fork pesto ricotta pasta

    Substitutions

    • Pesto Sauce: Instead of homemade pesto you can use store-bought pesto if short on time. And also you can swap basil pesto with spinach, arugula, or kale pesto for a unique twist.
    • Ricotta Cheese: Replace with mascarpone or cream cheese for a richer, creamier texture. Use vegan ricotta or blended tofu for a plant-based alternative.
    • Pasta: Any pasta works—try spaghetti, fusilli, or bowties for variety. For a gluten-free version, use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Swap with Pecorino Romano for a sharper flavor. Use nutritional yeast or vegan Parmesan for a dairy-free option.

    Variations

    • Chicken Pesto Ricotta Pasta - Toss in grilled chicken for a heartier meal.
    • Vegetable Pesto and Ricotta Pasta - Mix in roasted cherry tomatoes, zucchini, or bell peppers for added color and flavor. Stir in spinach, kale, or arugula for a leafy green twist.
    • Spicy - Add a pinch of cayenne or an extra dash of crushed red pepper flakes for a spicier kick.
    • Chessy - Add shredded mozzarella or burrata for an extra creamy, cheesy layer.

    Equipment

    Large Pot: For boiling the pasta and reserving the starchy cooking water.

    Colander: To drain the cooked pasta while keeping some pasta water aside.

    Large Skillet or Pan: For preparing and mixing the pesto ricotta sauce with the pasta.

    Measuring Cups and Spoons: To measure ingredients like ricotta, pesto, and pasta water accurately.

    Peto pasta with ricotta in a white bowl

    Storing Pesto Ricotta Pasta

    The pasta will keep in the refrigerator for up to three days when placed in a sealed container. If reheating the dish on the stovetop, add a bit of water to help it retain moisture.

    You can freeze your pesto ricotta pasta but be aware that the texture is likely to change. Due to ricotta’s moisture content, the moisture turns to ice, which changes the smoothness of the ricotta, and it will become drier and crumbly. Store the pesto ricotta sauce in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. Thaw in the refrigerator and reheat before tossing with fresh pasta.

    Top Tips For Preparing Pasta with Ricotta and Pesto

    1. Reserving pasta water is important for the sauce. The starch in the water thickens the sauce to elevate the creaminess.
    2. Be sure to add salt to your water when preparing the pasta.
    3. Don’t disregard the lemon zest. It adds a lot to the dish. 
    4. Don't overcook the pasta : Overcooking can make it mushy

    FAQ

    Can I make the sauce ahead of time?

    Yes! The pesto ricotta sauce can be prepared in advance and stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Just reheat gently and thin with pasta water when ready to use.

    What type of pasta works best for this recipe?

    While penne is a classic choice, you can use any pasta, such as spaghetti, fettuccine, rigatoni, or even gluten-free varieties. Choose a shape that holds the sauce well.

    Can I make this dish vegan?

    Absolutely! Substitute ricotta with vegan ricotta or blended tofu, use a dairy-free pesto, and replace Parmesan with nutritional yeast or vegan Parmesan.

    What if I forget to save pasta water?

    You can use warm vegetable or chicken broth as a substitute, though pasta water is ideal for its starchiness.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Pesto Ricotta Pasta:

    Ricotta Pesto Pasta in a white cast iron skillet

    Pesto Ricotta Pasta

    Abi Guna
    Weeknights call for simplicity, and this Pesto and Ricotta Pasta delivers on all fronts. It’s a no-fuss recipe that packs a punch with bold, complex flavors and a generous helping of protein to keep you satisfied.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 492 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large Pot
    • Colander
    • Large Skillet
    • Measuring cups and spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces dry penne pasta
    • ½ cup pesto sauce homemade without pine nuts
    • ½ cup full-fat ricotta cheese
    • ¾ cup pasta cooking water
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
    • 1 teaspoon fresh lemon zest
    • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
    • ¼ cup shredded Parmesan cheese for serving
    • Fresh basil for garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the penne pasta and cook according to the package instructions until al dente. Reserve ¾ cup of the pasta cooking water before draining the pasta.
    • Heat a large skillet over low heat. Add the pesto sauce and warm it for about a minute, stirring gently.
    • Add the ricotta cheese to the skillet and stir until the mixture is smooth and well combined.
    • Gradually add the reserved pasta cooking water, a little at a time, stirring until the sauce reaches your desired consistency.
    • Stir in the salt, garlic powder, crushed red pepper flakes, lemon zest, and lemon juice. Taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.
    • Add the cooked penne pasta to the skillet with the sauce. Toss until the pasta is evenly coated.
    • Divide the pasta among serving plates or bowls. Sprinkle with shredded Parmesan cheese and garnish with fresh basil leaves. Serve them while it's still hot to enjoy!

    Notes

    Cooking pasta to the perfect texture, known as al dente, is crucial for this dish. Overcooking pasta not only makes it mushy and unappealing but also impacts the overall texture of the recipe. The pasta needs to have a slight firmness to hold up against the creamy pesto and ricotta sauce.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 492kcalCarbohydrates: 83.5gProtein: 19gFat: 10.6gSaturated Fat: 3.2gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 5002mgFiber: 10.2gSugar: 0.9gCalcium: 131mgIron: 7mg
    Keyword Dinner, Main Dish, Pasta, Pesto
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Pesto Without Pine Nuts (Simple and Easy 5 minutes Recipe)

    by 1 Comment

    I'm not a fan of store-bought pesto, as I prefer the freshness of a homemade version. This Pesto Without Pine Nuts recipe offers a simple and flavorful alternative, using walnuts or sunflower seeds instead of traditional pine nuts. This makes it a budget-friendly and allergy-friendly option.

    Pesto without pine nuts in a bowl

    This pine nut free pesto is packed with fresh basil, garlic, Parmesan cheese, and rich olive oil, it delivers all the creamy, herbaceous goodness you love in a classic pesto. Whether tossed with pasta, spread on sandwiches, or used as a dip, this versatile recipe is quick to make and perfect for weeknight meals or meal prep. No pine nuts? No problem—this pesto is still bursting with flavor!

    Speaking of pasta, have you tried my Ricotta Pesto Pasta recipe? If not, I highly recommend checking it out. It's the perfect way to use this homemade pesto sauce without nuts. Plus, you can use the leftover pesto to make this quick Pesto Butter Salmon recipe for an easy and delicious dinner on another day!

    You can still enjoy a delicious pesto recipe with no pine nuts! Making basil pesto without pine nuts is a great way to save money and experiment with different flavors. Wondering what to use as a pine nut substitute for pesto? Try walnuts, almonds, sunflower seeds, or even cashews for a creamy and flavorful twist. If you’ve ever asked, “Can you make pesto without pine nuts?”, the answer is absolutely yes! With just basil, olive oil, garlic, Parmesan, and your preferred nut or seed substitute, you can whip up a versatile and budget-friendly pesto in no time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Pesto?

    Pesto is invariably associated with bright green herbs. It is an Italian sauce frequently served over pasta, but it works like a charm on sandwiches, eggs and with salads and vegetables. If ever there was a flavor-booster, it is pesto. Power to the green!

    Pesto sauce in a spoon

    What Makes Pesto Special?

    Pesto sauce can be purchased by the jar at your local market, but it will be sorely lacking. This homemade, easy pesto recipe takes only minutes to prepare with fresh herbs and healthy olive oil. This version of pesto sauce recipe uses walnuts instead of the usual pine nuts, which gives an extra robustness to the sauce.

    Walnuts versus Pine Nuts

    The standard ingredient for pesto sauce is pine nuts. This pesto sauce recipe without pine nuts uses walnuts, instead. There are several reasons for this tasty switch. The first and logical reason is that pine nuts cost twice as much as walnuts without providing twice the benefits. As a matter of fact, toasted walnuts provide a genuine stronger flavor. In other ways, they are very similar and quite interchangeable.

    Both are high-caloric nuts, and both are valued as high-nutrient sources. They contain approximately the same amount of carbohydrates – 13 grams per 100 grams of nuts. The walnut is a greater source of fiber, yet both offer about 3 grams of sugar.

    The pine nut wins the saturated fat war – 20 percent less than the walnut. 

    The two nuts are very similar and offer excellent nutritional benefits, but as a consumer, you save money and gain added flavor by using walnuts. It’s always good to have options, isn’t it?

    No worries for anyone with nut allergies. You can prepare a nut-free pesto that is smooth and creamy by adding an extra half a cup of cheese. 

    Ingredients

    Ingredients shown in the picture for Pesto Sauce without pinenuts
    • Garlic – Adds a bold, savory flavor and aromatic depth to the pesto.
    • Walnuts - Provides a rich, nutty taste and a creamy texture when blended.
    • Basil leaves - The main ingredient, offering a fragrant, herbal aroma and vibrant green color.
    • Parmesan cheese – Adds a salty, umami-rich flavor that enhances the overall taste.
    • Extra-virgin olive oil – Brings a smooth, velvety consistency and rich flavor to the sauce.
    • Salt – Balances the flavors and enhances the taste of all the ingredients.
    • Black pepper – Adds a mild spiciness to complement the savory notes.
    • Lemon juice – Provides a bright, tangy acidity that lifts and balances the richness of the pesto.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    The Magic of Basil

    Basil is the basis for pesto. While basil is famed for its Italian flavor, who knew about its magical properties?

    Basil gained fame thousands of years ago for its antioxidants that help cells develop. The Egyptians mummified their dead using basil for its antibacterial action – even mummies worry about bacteria. The Egyptians may not have understood about bacteria, but they knew that basil was a positive addition.

    India has considered the basil plant sacred and blessed with positive energy (no arguments). It also regarded basil as an icon of chastity as well as a love declaration. We won’t even consider the possible contraction here.

    All the above, and we haven’t even discussed how much flavor basil adds to your easy pesto sauce. It is unarguably a mighty powerful sauce.

    Backlight shot of homemade pesto without pine nuts

    How to make pesto recipe without pine nuts

    Chop the nuts and garlic in a food processor to get them very fine. Add the basil and chop for another minute.

    Next to be chopped for 30 seconds is the parmesan cheese. Finely chopping your ingredients will create the basis of a very fine sauce. The older your parmesan cheese, by the way, the better it will substitute for the missing pine nuts.

    For flavor, pour in the olive oil and lemon sauce and season with salt and pepper.

    Be sure to taste the sauce and make any necessary adjustments.

    Instructions for no pine nut pesto

    Walnuts and garlic in a food processor

    To a food add chopped walnuts and garlic. Give a pulse.

    Add the basil leaves to the food processor

    Add the basil leaves and pulse again.

    Add Parmesan cheese to the food processor for the pesto sauce.

    After a minute of pulsing, add Parmesan cheese, lemon juice, salt and pepper.

    Blended pesto sauce in a food processor

    Finally add olive oil and blend until smooth.

    An easy and delicious budget-friendly homemade pesto sauce that comes together in no time—it takes just 5 minutes to prepare! This is the perfect meal prep sauce for those chaotic evenings when you need a stress-free dinner.

    Close up shot for pesto sauce without nuts in a food processor

    The Many Uses for Basil Pesto Sauce

    There are many ways to enjoy a classic pesto sauce.

    1. Combine pesto sauce with your favorite pasta.  Check out my Pesto Ricotta Pasta for ideas on how to make it even more delicious!
    2. Top your pizza with some pesto sauce.
    3. Pesto will enhance the flavor of soups, especially those of Mexican origin.
    4. Create a great salad topped with pesto sauce.
    5. Serve roasted vegetables with pesto or stir it into mashed potatoes. It also elevates the taste of vegetable casseroles.
    6. Scrambled eggs lose their ordinariness with a dollop of pesto sauce.
    7. Spread pesto on your sandwich
    8. Use pesto sauce as a dip for raw vegetables.

    Substitutions & Variations

    • Substitute for pine nuts in pesto sauce – Use blanched almonds for a mild, nutty flavor, or cashews for a slightly sweet and creamy pesto. Pistachios bring a unique, earthy taste, while sunflower seeds are an excellent nut-free option, ideal for those with allergies.
    • Cheese Substitutions – Pecorino Romano offers a sharper, saltier flavor compared to Parmesan. For a vegan alternative, use nutritional yeast to achieve a cheesy, umami flavor.
    • Oil Substitutions – Instead of olive oil, try avocado oil for a neutral, heart-healthy alternative.
    • Spicy Pesto – Add a teaspoon of crushed red pepper flakes to give your pesto a spicy kick.
    • Roasted Garlic Pesto – Swap fresh garlic for roasted garlic to add a mellow, sweet depth to the sauce.
    Texture of bail pesto without pine nuts

    Equipment

    Food Processor – To blend the ingredients into a smooth pesto sauce.

    Measuring Cups and Spoons – To accurately measure the basil, walnuts, olive oil, and other ingredients.

    Airtight Container or Jar – For storing the pesto sauce.

    How to Store and Freeze Pesto Sauce

    Pesto sauce is very versatile, so you’ll want to keep some on hand whenever possible. Store pesto in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To prevent browning, add a thin layer of olive oil on top. You can also freeze it in ice cube trays for up to 3 months.

    Special Hints for Making Great Pesto Without Pine Nuts

    • Try adding just a touch of heat by adding half a red chili. This will liven up the basil and gentle parmesan cheese. 
    • Toss some additional greens, such as spinach, parsley, or cilantro into the mix and create a more complex green flavor base.
    • Make sure your basil is young and fresh. 
    Basil pesto suace without pine nuts in a spoon

    FAQ

    What can I use if I’m allergic to any nuts?

    Sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, or even hemp seeds are great nut-free alternatives. They provide a similar texture and mild flavor.

    Can I make this pesto vegan?

    Yes! Substitute Parmesan cheese with nutritional yeast or vegan Parmesan for a plant-based version.

    Can I use a blender instead of a food processor?

    Absolutely! A blender works well, though you may need to stop and scrape the sides more frequently to ensure everything blends evenly.

    How do I adjust the pesto consistency?

    If the pesto is too thick, add a bit more olive oil or a splash of water. For a thicker consistency, use less liquid or add more nuts or cheese.

    What pasta works best with this pesto?

    Pesto pairs beautifully with long pasta like spaghetti or linguine, as well as short shapes like penne or fusilli that hold the sauce well.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Pesto without Pine Nuts Recipe:

    Easy Pesto without Pine nuts feature image in a gray white bowl

    Pesto Without Pine Nuts (5 minutes)

    Abi Guna
    This simple and flavorful pesto recipe without pine nuts for a more budget-friendly or allergy-friendly option, it delivers all the creamy, herbaceous goodness you love in a classic pesto. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4 peoples
    Calories 244 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor
    • Measuring cups & spoons
    • Air Tight Container

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 cloves garlic
    • ½ cup walnuts chopped
    • 2 cups fresh basil leaves packed
    • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated
    • ½ cup extra-virgin olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1-2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice

    Instructions
     

    • In a food processor, combine garlic and chopped walnuts, then pulse a few times until coarsely chopped.
    • Add the basil leaves and pulse again for about 30 seconds.
    • Next, add Parmesan cheese and pulse for another 30 seconds until the mixture is coarsely combined.
    • While the processor is running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and blend until the pesto reaches your desired consistency, either smooth or slightly chunky.
    • Season with salt, pepper, and a splash of lemon juice for added freshness.
    • Use immediately with pasta, sandwiches, or as a dip. Alternatively, transfer to an airtight container, cover the surface with a thin layer of olive oil, and refrigerate for up to a week, or freeze for longer storage.

    Notes

    1. Make sure your basil is young and fresh. Avoid using dried basil.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1 servingCalories: 244kcalCarbohydrates: 3.8gProtein: 7.6gFat: 23.2gSaturated Fat: 4.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4.5gCholesterol: 9mgSodium: 4963mgPotassium: 155mgFiber: 2.1gSugar: 0.7gCalcium: 213mgIron: 2mg
    Keyword Condiments, Dinner, Dips, Pasta, Pesto, sauces
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti

    by 5 Comments

    Every mom’s dream is to get kids to finish their dinner without any fuss; I’ve got you covered! Try this Ground Chicken Spaghetti, and you’ll be amazed at how much kids love it. This hearty and comforting pasta dish combines tender spaghetti with a flavorful sauce made from ground chicken and fresh vegetables like carrots and celery.

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti in a skillet

    This chicken vegetable spaghetti is a flavorful and wholesome twist on classic pasta dishes. Made with a savory tomato-based sauce infused with garlic, onion, and Italian herbs, it delivers a rich and satisfying taste while keeping it light and healthy. The ground chicken with pasta makes for a leaner alternative to traditional beef or pork sauces, while carrots and celery add a natural sweetness and a slight crunch. This ground chicken and pasta recipe is perfect for quick weeknight dinners or meal prepping, offering a hearty, nutritious meal that the whole family will love. Whether you're looking for an easy chicken mince spaghetti dish or a healthy pasta option, this recipe is sure to become a go-to favorite! 

    If your family loves pasta recipes like mine does, you must try this Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine recipe—it’s another perfect dinner option!

    Looking for more ground chicken recipes? Try these Ground Chicken Stir Fry and Ground Chicken Meatballs recipe!

    More recipes using chicken? How about trying a flavorful Chicken Noodles Stir Fry and Lemon Pepper Chicken Thighs for a weeknight dinner?

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you'll love this pasta recipe

    Quick and Easy: Perfect for busy weeknights, this spaghetti recipe comes together in under 30 minutes.

    Healthy and Wholesome: Made with lean ground chicken and packed with fresh vegetables for a balanced meal.

    Rich and Flavorful: The savory sauce clings to the pasta, creating a deliciously hearty dish that’s satisfying and comforting.

    Customizable: Easily swap in your favorite pasta or veggies to suit your taste and pantry staples.

    Kid-Friendly: A hit with the whole family— even picky eaters will love this flavorful pasta! Trust me, my daughter finished her entire bowl without a single complaint (every mom’s dream!)

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti in a white bowl

    What Is Ground Chicken Spaghetti?

    Quite simply, on a busy day, when you arrive home late, are so tired you can barely stand,  and the kids complain about being deliberately starved, ground chicken spaghetti is your friend and lifesaver. It is healthy and delicious and can be on the table in less than half an hour. As a bonus, it is a very affordable dinner recipe.

    This easy family dinner combines generously seasoned ground chicken with a tasty marinara sauce that kids love. Ground chicken can dry easily, but the delicious sauce, high in flavor and low in calories, keeps the chicken moist. It is truly one of the best weeknight dinner ideas that will bring everyone to the table. 

    Ground Chicken versus Ground Beef

    This affordable dinner recipe can easily be prepared with ground chicken or ground beef. Why is ground chicken the preferred choice? The main reason is that the chicken is just as flavorful but is healthier with fewer calories. 

    Ground chicken is considered a superior protein source because of its lower saturated fat content. Of course, very lean ground beef is low in fat, but it will also be dry and low in flavor. Per normal serving, ground chicken has more protein than ground beef. Ground chicken also has more of the important vitamins we need, although ground beef provides more vitamin B12. Ground chicken should be your kitchen staple.

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti Pasta in a fork

    What Makes This Ground Chicken and Pasta Special?

    This quick ground chicken spaghetti recipe is perfect for weeknights. The entire family – from adults to toddlers – will devour it. Its ease of preparation is enhanced by using a jarred sauce that imbues the pasta and ground chicken with flavor. Keep in mind you can also substitute ground turkey for the meat. Italian seasoning adds a touch of special love.

    In addition to everything else, this easy ground chicken spaghetti can be made gluten-free. If you are using gluten-free pasta, be sure to salt the pasta water properly to add needed taste. Gluten-free pasta does not store well, so make only as much as you need.

    Finally, let the gluten-free pasta soak up the sauce for a few minutes before serving.

    Ingredients

    Lets see the simple ingredients needed to create this amazingly delicious recipe!

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti Ingredient list iteams placed in a marble table
    • Spaghetti: The base of the dish, spaghetti provides a hearty and satisfying foundation for the flavorful sauce to coat.
    • Olive oil: Used to sauté the vegetables and garlic, adding richness and helping to develop the flavors of the dish.
    • Garlic: Enhances the aroma and provides a savory flavor to the sauce.
    • Onions: Sweet and savory depth to the dish, forming the flavor base for the sauce.
    • Carrots: Contributes a touch of natural sweetness and texture while boosting the nutritional value.
    • Celery: Adds crunch and a subtle earthy flavor, balancing the sweetness of the carrots.
    • Ground chicken: Provides a lean protein option that absorbs the seasoning and enriches the dish.
    • Spices (Italian seasoning, garlic powder, onion powder, salt and pepper): Boosts the depth of flavor and enhances the whole dish.
    • Low-sodium chicken broth: Keeps the sauce moist and ties the flavors together.
    • Marinara sauce: Forms the primary sauce for the dish, bringing a rich, tangy tomato flavor.
    • Parmesan cheese, for garnish: Adds a nutty, salty finish that enhances the flavors of the pasta.
    • Fresh basil, for garnish: Provides a fresh and aromatic touch.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    In a skilllet Ground Chicken Spaghetti -15

    How to Prepare Ground Chicken Spaghetti 

    Start by preparing your pasta in a pot of salted boiling water. This should take about 12 minutes. Drain the pasta and keep a cup or so of the pasta water. Set the pasta aside.

    Sautéing the vegetables in olive oil is next. Keep in mind that olive oil is the healthiest oil to use. Start with the onion and garlic, then add the carrots and celery. There is no reason you can’t add additional vegetables, such as bell peppers if desired. Sauteing your vegetables helps elevate their flavor, and the sauteing process should fill your kitchen with an amazing aroma.

    Crumble the ground chicken and add it to your skillet with the vegetables. Brown the chicken for 5 minutes. Then season everything according to taste with basic Italian seasonings, salt, and pepper.

    The delectable sauce comes next. Pour your marinara sauce and chicken broth into the skillet and bring the liquid to a boil. Then simmer the ground chicken and vegetables in the sauce for a delightful flavor boost. If you need more liquid, use the reserved pasta water.

    Taste test and adjust your seasoning and serve the ground chicken pasta topped with grated parmesan cheese.

    The tomatoes in the marinara sauce provide plenty of needed vitamins, and the ground chicken and parmesan cheeses are filled with protein. This dish is easy to prepare and healthy.

    Step By Step Instructions

    Cooked spaghetti in a plate
    1. Step 1: Cook the spaghetti according to the package instructions.
    Onions, Carrots and celery in a skillet
    1. Step 2: Add the veggies and cook for 3-5 minutes.
    Added ground chicken in a skillet
    1. Step 3: Push the vegetables to one side of the skillet. Add the ground chicken and cook.
    Cooked ground chicken in a skillet
    1. Step 4: Breaking it apart with a spatula and cook until it is no longer pink.
    Marinara sauce is added to the veggies
    1. Step 5: Stir in the chicken broth and marinara sauce.
    Simmered marinara sauce in a skillet for Ground Chicken Spaghetti
    1. Step 6: Let the sauce simmer for 10 minutes.
    Cooked spaghetti added to the marinara sauce
    1. Step 7: Add the cooked spaghetti to the skillet and toss to coat the pasta evenly in the sauce.
    Cooked ground chicken spaghetti in a stainless steel skillet
    1. Step 8: Sprinkle grated Parmesan cheese and garnish with fresh basil.

    Substitutions

    • Protein Swap: Substitute ground chicken with ground turkey, beef, pork, or even plant-based meat for a different flavor profile.
    • Low-Carb Option: Replace spaghetti with zucchini noodles, spaghetti squash, or a high-protein pasta alternative.
    • Gluten-Free: Use gluten-free spaghetti or pasta to make the dish suitable for those with gluten sensitivities.
    • Broth Substitution: Replace chicken broth with vegetable broth or white wine for a slightly different depth of flavor.

    Variations

    • Vegetable-Loaded Ground Chicken Spaghetti: Add zucchini, bell peppers, mushrooms, or spinach to boost nutrients and enhance texture. Simply incorporate these veggies into the recipe for a flavorful, veggie-packed variation!
    • Cheesy Ground Chicken Spaghetti: Stir in a handful of shredded mozzarella or grated Parmesan into the sauce for a creamy, cheesy twist.
    • Spicy Ground Chicken Spaghetti: Add a pinch of red pepper flakes or a dash of hot sauce for some heat.

    Serving Options

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti is best served with sides and accompaniments that complement its hearty and flavorful nature. Here are some great options:

    • Garlic Bread
    • Roasted Vegetables
    • Green Salad (Talking about salad have you tried my BEST Kale Quinoa Salad ?)
    Ground Chicken Spaghetti in a white bowl and skillet

    Equipment

    Large Pot – To cook the spaghetti.

    Colander – For draining the cooked pasta.

    Large Skillet or Sauté Pan – To cook the ground chicken and prepare the sauce.

    Wooden Spoon or Spatula – To stir and cook the sauce ingredients.

    Measuring Cups and Spoons – For accurately measuring ingredients.

    Tongs – For mixing the pasta with the sauce.

    How to Store Ground Chicken Spaghetti

    Let the sauce cool and store it in a sealed container separately from the pasta for up to three days in the refrigerator. Store the pasta in a different container for the same length of time. Refrigerating them apart provides you with more options when you reheat.

    You can freeze the easy ground chicken spaghetti for three months. Again, it’s a good idea to freeze the sauce separately from the pasta.

    The best way to reheat the ground chicken spaghetti is to thaw the leftovers and warm them in a skillet on low heat. Add a bit of extra broth or marina sauce to help the dish retain its moistness.

    Ground Chicken Spaghetti in a skillet garnished with basil and parmesan cheese

    Top Tips On Preparing Your  Ground Chicken Dinner

    Your ground chicken can dry out easily, so don’t overdo the browning process. Brown to the point where the meat is no longer pink (and no longer) and then add the sauce.

    Young children can get picky about things like onions and garlic, even as those vegetables boost the flavor. The trick is to chop them as finely as possible to keep the kids unaware of their presence. Using a chopper works well.

    Prepare your pasta al dente. Undercooked pasta will be too chewy, and overcooked pasta turns limp. The best pasta for this healthy ground chicken recipe is “firm.”

    Meal Prep Options for Ground Chicken Spaghetti

    This recipe is an excellent option for meal prep!

    • Prepare a large batch of the ground chicken sauce and cook the spaghetti.
    • Store them separately to preserve the texture and flavor when reheated.
    • Divide the cooked spaghetti and sauce into individual airtight containers for convenient grab-and-go meals.
    • Refrigerate for up to 4 days or freeze for up to 3 months for longer storage.

    FAQ

    Can I use ground beef instead of chicken?  

    Absolutely , you can use ground beef instead of chicken! Ground beef will add a richer, heartier flavor to the dish. Be sure to drain any excess fat after browning the beef before continuing with the recipe.

    Can I use homemade marinara sauce?

    Yes, homemade marinara works wonderfully and allows you to customize the flavor even more. If you have in handy please feel free to use it!

     Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

    Yes, you can prepare till the sauce steps in advance and store it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat and combine it with freshly cooked pasta before serving. Its a best meal prep option for those busy days.

    Can I use a different type of pasta to the same recipe?

    Yes, you can use any type of pasta, such as penne, fettuccine, or even gluten-free pasta, depending on your preference or dietary needs.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Ground Chicken Spaghetti:

    Finished Ground chicken spaghetti dish in a skillet

    Easy Ground Chicken Spaghetti

    Abi Guna
    Ground Chicken Spaghetti is a hearty and comforting pasta dish combines tender spaghetti with a flavorful sauce made from ground chicken and fresh vegetables like carrots and celery.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4

    Equipment

    • Large Pot
    • Colander
    • Large Skillet
    • Wooden Spoon
    • Measuring cups and spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces dry spaghetti
    • 2 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon minced garlic
    • 1 medium onion diced
    • 2 medium carrots diced
    • 2 celery stalks diced
    • 1 lb. ground chicken
    • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
    • ½ cup low-sodium chicken broth
    • 2 cups (16 ounces) marinara sauce Store-bought
    • Parmesan cheese for garnish
    • Fresh basil for garnish

    Instructions
     

    • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the spaghetti according to package instructions until al dente. Reserve ½ cup of pasta water, then drain and set aside.
    • Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat.
    • Add the minced garlic and onion, sautéing until fragrant and softened.
    • Add the diced carrots and celery to the skillet. Cook for 3-5 minutes, stirring occasionally, until softened.
    • Push the vegetables to one side of the skillet. Add the ground chicken to the empty space and cook, breaking it apart with a spatula, until it is no longer pink (about 5 minutes).
    • Add in the seasonings such as Italian seasonings, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper.
    • Stir in the chicken broth and marinara sauce, bring to boil, reduce the heat, and let the sauce simmer for 10 minutes, allowing the flavors to meld.
    • Add the cooked spaghetti to the skillet and toss to coat the pasta evenly in the sauce. If needed, use the reserved pasta water to adjust the sauce consistency.
    • Divide the spaghetti into serving bowls. Sprinkle grated Parmesan cheese and garnish with fresh basil.

    Notes

    1. Be sure to cook the spaghetti according to package instructions until al dente, as it will absorb some sauce when combined, preventing it from becoming mushy.
    2. 2. Cook the chicken until just done to keep it tender and juicy, as it can dry out quickly.
    3. 3. Add a splash of pasta water if the sauce feels too thick—it also helps the sauce cling to the pasta.
    Keyword Chicken, Dinner, Main Dish, Pasta, Spaghetti
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Easy Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine

    by 5 Comments

    If you're a fan of seafood and pasta, then you should try this quick and easy Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine - Ready in 20 Minutes! This delicious shrimp scampi fettuccine pasta is a perfect weeknight dinner recipe, ready in mere minutes. With tender shrimp, a garlicky lemon-butter sauce, and al dente fettuccine, this easy pasta recipe delivers restaurant-quality flavor right at home.

    Easy shrimp scampi fettuccine in a large skillet

    The shrimp cook quickly, allowing them to stay tender and juicy, locking in all their natural sweetness and delicate texture. Meanwhile, the pasta absorbs the rich, savory sauce, infused with garlic, lemon, and a hint of spice from the crushed red pepper flakes. Each bite is loaded with vibrant flavors, ensuring a delicious and satisfying experience from start to finish!

    Are you a fan of pasta? If so, you should definitely try this recipe: Ground Chicken Spaghetti .

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Will Love This Shrimp Scampi With Fettuccine Pasta

    I am sure you will love exploring the variety of fettuccine recipes with shrimp available to try. Whether you prefer creamy sauces, garlicky butter flavors, or spicy tomato bases, there's a perfect recipe waiting for you.

    • Quick and Easy: This recipe comes together in just about 30 minutes, making it perfect for a weeknight dinner or special occasion.
    • Rich and Flavorful Sauce: The creamy, garlicky sauce made with chicken broth and lemon juice creates a deliciously rich flavor that perfectly complements the shrimp and pasta.
    • Versatile: You can easily adjust the seasonings, add extra veggies like spinach or tomatoes, or swap the shrimp for chicken or another protein, making this dish adaptable to your preferences.
    • Better Than Restaurants: With its restaurant-style flavor and presentation, this dish makes you feel like you're dining out, but it's made right in your own kitchen with simple, everyday ingredients.
    Easy shrimp scampi fettuccine in a fork

    Shrimp and fettuccine recipes are not only delicious but also quick to prepare, making them ideal for busy weeknights or special occasions. From classic fettuccine with shrimp in Alfredo sauce to lighter lemon-garlic variations, these dishes are sure to impress your family or guests with their rich, satisfying flavors.

    Aside from the luscious, delectable taste, shrimp scampi fettuccine is easy to prepare in less than half an hour using just a few staple ingredients. It is so easy that even novice cooks can serve up a mouthwatering culinary masterpiece to impress friends and in-laws. 

    The ideal  garlic butter shrimp pasta blends succulent shrimp, tart lemon, and creamy butter and cheese sauce to create a delightful taste sensation. 

    Fettuccine is the most prevalent pasta used for this dish; however, capellini and angel hair also work with the delicious garlic butter sauce that is the heart and soul of shrimp scampi. Add garlic bread and a nice white wine, and it is elevated to a flavorsome treat while remaining pure comfort food. Since it contains seafood, you can add healthy, as well.

    In a bowl shrimp scampi fettuccine with a fork

    History of Shrimp Scampi and Fettuccine

    Shrimp Scampi has been an Italian favorite since the 14th century and made its first appearance in a British cookbook in 1747. It gained its current popularity in the mid-twentieth century, when restaurants began taking advantage of its cooking simplicity – no master chef needed. From there, it was a logical step for enthusiastic food lovers to prepare this classic one-pot shrimp pasta dish in their own home. 

    Dry or Fresh for Your Shrimp Scampi Pasta 

    The general perception is that Italian food lovers prefer fresh pasta. Food snobs would be mistaken here. While fresh pasta cooks much quicker – within one to three minutes – dry pasta consistently provides a better al dente texture with a superior “bite.”

    Foodies who expect Italian cupboards to be filled with fresh pasta are in for a surprise. Many Italian cooks use dry pasta. Keep in mind not all dry pasta is created equal. Find the best dry pasta suited to your needs and use it to create a bit of heaven.

    Ingredients

    Shrimp scampi fettuccine ingredients in the marble backdrop
    • Pasta: The long, flat shape of fettuccine is perfect for picking up the rich, garlicky sauce, giving the dish a hearty and satisfying feel.
    • Olive oil: Adds richness and helps cook the shrimp to a golden color.
    • Shrimp: The main protein in this dish, providing a tender, sweet flavor.
    • Salt: Enhances and balances the flavors of all ingredients.
    • Black pepper: Adds a bit of spice and depth to the dish.
    • Garlic powder: Provides a mild garlic flavor to the shrimp.
    • Butter: Adds creaminess to the sauce, balancing the olive oil.
    • Garlic: Infuses a bold garlic flavor throughout the dish.
    • Low-sodium chicken broth: Adds a savory depth to the sauce without overpowering it.
    • Parsley: Brings freshness to the dish.
    • Lemon juice: Adds brightness and a tangy contrast to the dish.
    • Red pepper flakes: Adds a hint of heat to balance the dish's richness.
    • Parmesan cheese: Adds a salty, nutty finish, enhancing the sauce and pasta.

    See recipe card for the detailed quantities.

    How To Prepare Your Easy Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine Pasta Recipe

    1. Prepare your fettuccine in a pot of salted water according to directions. Reserve some pasta water.
    2. Heat olive oil in a skillet and add the shrimp and seasonings. The type of olive oil you use will make a difference, so use the best you can afford. Toss the shrimp and olive oil well for about 2 minutes – don’t overcook the shrimp. Set it aside. 
    3. Add the garlic (you honestly can’t have too much garlic in your shrimp scampi fettuccini). 
    4. When your garlic is sauteed in the creamy butter, pour in the broth, lemon juice, and additional seasoning. The wine adds an element of sweetness that counteracts the garlic to perfection. That is your wonderful garlic butter sauce. For a thicker sauce, consider adding a bit of cream.
    5. Toss the sauce with the shrimp and fettuccine. Add some of the reserved pasta water if you need more liquid.
    6. Add the parmesan and toss again.
    7. Garnish your garlic butter shrimp scampi with parsley and lemon.

    Instructions

    In a skillet add the seasonings and shrimp
    1. Step 1: In a skillet add oil followed by shrimp, salt, pepper and garlic powder.
    Sautéed shrimp in a skillet.
    1. Step 2: Cook for about 2 minutes.
    Chicken broth in a skillet for shrimp scampi
    1. Step 3: Add butter, once butter is melted add garlic, chicken broth, lemon juice, broth and seasonings. Simmer for 4-5 minutes.
    Cooked fettuccine pasta and cooked shrimp in a skillet
    1. Step 4:Add the drained fettuccine pasta and cooked shrimp to the skillet. Toss it with the sauce.

    Once everything is well-coated, sprinkle the shrimp scampi with freshly grated Parmesan cheese and toss again to combine. Garnish with freshly chopped parsley and lemon wedges for an extra burst of freshness.

    Hint: For more saucy pasta, add ½ cup more chicken broth than the mentioned quantity.

    In a white skillet shrimp scampi fettuccine

    What to Serve with Fettuccine Shrimp Scampi

    Fettuccine Shrimp Scampi is already a complete and satisfying meal, but pairing it with a few delicious side dishes can elevate it to the next level. Here are some of my favorite sides to serve with Fettuccine Shrimp Scampi:

    • Garlic Bread: A classic choice that’s perfect for soaking up the extra sauce.
    • Salad: A light salad with mixed greens, arugula, or spinach, topped with a simple vinaigrette, balances the richness of the scampi. Speaking of salads, have you tried my Salmon Kale Quinoa Salad recipe?

    Substitutions

    Shrimp: Swap shrimp with chicken breast, chicken thighs, or scallops for a different protein.

    Fettuccine: Use any other pasta, like spaghetti, linguine, or penne.

    Gluten-Free Option: Use gluten-free pasta or zucchini noodles as a substitute.

    Vegan Option: Use tofu as a vegetarian protein option instead of shrimp. Substitute chicken broth with vegetable broth or white wine for extra depth of flavor. For Parmesan cheese, use vegan Parmesan or nutritional yeast.

    CLose up shot of shrimp scampi fettuccine

    Variations

    Spicy Shrimp Scampi: Add more crushed red pepper flakes or a dash of cayenne pepper to the sauce for a spicier kick. 

    Creamy Shrimp Scampi: Stir in heavy cream or half-and-half into the sauce to make it creamy, creating a rich, luxurious texture.

    Garlic Butter Shrimp Scampi: For a more intense garlic flavor, increase the amount of garlic and use a little more butter in place of the chicken broth. This will create a rich, buttery sauce.

    Shrimp Scampi with Pesto: Add a couple of tablespoons of pesto sauce to the dish for a unique twist that adds a fresh, herby flavor.

    Equipment

    Large Pot: For boiling the fettuccine pasta.

    Strainer or Colander: To drain the pasta once it’s cooked.

    Large Skillet: For cooking the shrimp and making the sauce.

    Measuring Cups and Spoons: For accurate measurements of liquids like broth and lemon juice and seasonings.

    In a white bowl shrimp scampi fettuccine

    Storage

    Refrigerate: Place leftovers in an airtight container within 2 hours of cooking. Store in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    Freeze: If you’d like to freeze it, transfer the fettuccine and shrimp to a freezer-safe container. The pasta can be frozen for up to 2 months, but keep in mind that freezing may slightly alter the texture of the shrimp and pasta.

    Reheating Your Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine Recipes

    It’s nice to make enough shrimp scampi fettuccine for a second meal. The dish can be reheated without effort.

    Oven Reheating: If you are using the oven, preheat it to 275 degrees. Transfer the shrimp to a baking dish and cover the dish with aluminum foil. Heat for 15 minutes. As always with seafood, be careful not to overcook.

    Stovetop Reheating: If you are reheating on the stovetop, add the dish to a small pan or skillet and simmer for 4 to 5 minutes while gently stirring, being careful not to overcook the shrimp. You may want to add a few extra tablespoons of broth to keep the shrimp scampi moist. 

    In a fork shrimp scampi fettuccine

    Tips for Creating the Perfect Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine

    Whether to use fresh or frozen shrimp is a good question. If you use fresh, give it a sniff and make sure it smells of the ocean rather than fishy. If it has a fishy odor, it has been around for a bit.

    Frozen shrimp, if frozen immediately, can be fresher than the thawed “fresh” shrimp available in most markets.  It is also more difficult to overcook frozen shrimp, which will help make it more tender.

    As for your pasta and olive oil, it is worth splurging on the best quality products. Quality ingredients go far in raising the value of your meal. Likewise, grating your parmesan cheese freshly over your pasta instead of using pre-grated cheese will add the last bit of magic to your shrimp scampi. 

    FAQ

    Can I use frozen shrimp for this recipe?

    Yes, you can definitely use frozen shrimp for this Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine recipe! It's best to thaw the shrimp before cooking, then pat them dry with a paper towel to remove excess moisture. Follow the same cooking steps as you would for fresh shrimp—just note that frozen shrimp may take an extra minute or two to cook, so keep an eye on them to avoid overcooking.

    Whats the best pasta to use it for shrimp scampi?

    Aside from fettuccine, you can use linguine, a classic choice for shrimp scampi. Spaghetti and angel hair also pair well, offering a balanced, light texture that complements the shrimp and sauce beautifully.

    Can I add veggies to the same recipe?

    Adding veggies enhances both the flavor and nutritional value of the dish, pairing wonderfully with the shrimp and pasta. Some of my favorites to add are spinach, cherry tomatoes, asparagus, and zucchini.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine:

    Easy shrimp scampi fettuccine in a white skillet and garnished with parsley

    Easy Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine

    Abi Guna
    Quick and easy Shrimp Scampi Fettuccine - Ready in 20 Minutes! This delicious shrimp scampi fettuccine pasta is a perfect weeknight dinner, ready in mere minutes. With tender shrimp, a garlicky lemon-butter sauce, and al dente fettuccine, this easy pasta recipe delivers restaurant-quality flavor right at home.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4

    Equipment

    • Large Pot
    • Strainer
    • Large Skillet
    • Measuring cups & spoons

    Ingredients
      

    • 16 ounce fettuccine
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 ½ lb. large fresh shrimp peeled and deveined
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 teaspoon minced garlic
    • ½ cup low sodium chicken broth
    • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
    • ¼ cup fresh lemon juice
    • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
    • ¼ cup parmesan cheese grated
    • ½ cup pasta cooked water or as needed
    • Lemon wedges to garnish

    Instructions
     

    • In a large pot, bring salted water to a boil. Add the fettuccine pasta and cook according to the package instructions, usually about 9-11 minutes, until the pasta is al dente. Once done, reserve ½ cup of pasta water and set it aside. Then, drain the pasta and set it aside, keeping it warm.
    • While the pasta is cooking, heat a large skillet over medium heat and add oil. Once the oil is hot and shimmering, add the shrimp in a single layer. Season with salt, pepper, and garlic powder. Cook for about 2 minutes, turning the shrimp once they begin to turn pink and opaque. Once cooked, transfer the shrimp to a plate and set it aside.
    • In the same skillet you used for the shrimp, add the butter and allow it to melt. Once melted, add the minced garlic and sauté for about 1 minute until fragrant and golden, being careful not to burn the garlic.
    • Next, pour in the chicken broth to deglaze the skillet, scraping up any brown bits from the bottom of the pan. Bring the mixture to a simmer and cook for about 2 minutes, letting the broth reduce slightly.
    • Add the fresh lemon juice, crushed red pepper flakes, chopped parsley, and a pinch of salt and pepper to the skillet. Stir well to combine and let the sauce simmer for 4-5 minutes, allowing the flavors to meld together and the sauce to slightly thicken.
    • Add the drained fettuccine pasta to the skillet with the sauce, tossing gently to coat the pasta in the flavorful mixture. Add the cooked shrimp back into the skillet, stirring to combine. If the sauce looks too thick, add a bit of the reserved pasta water, a tablespoon at a time, until the desired sauce consistency is reached.
    • Once everything is well-coated, sprinkle the shrimp scampi with freshly grated Parmesan cheese and toss again to combine. Garnish with freshly chopped parsley and lemon wedges for an extra burst of freshness.
    • Serve the shrimp scampi fettuccine immediately while hot, and enjoy this delicious, flavorful dish.

    Notes

    1. To keep your pasta perfect and prevent sticking, toss it lightly with a teaspoon of olive oil.
    2. You can spice up the recipe by adding ⅛ teaspoon of cayenne pepper.
    Keyword Main Dish, Pasta, Shrimp
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    If you try this recipe, please leave a STAR rating in the comment section below! Your feedback helps a small blogger like me stay motivated in creating content for my readers. Also, feel free to follow me at Food Exit on Instagram, TikTok, and Pinterest for the latest recipe updates!

    Christmas Cake Pops with Cake Mix

    by 4 Comments

    A Showstopper on the Dessert Table - Christmas cake pops, also known as holiday cake pops, are festive, bite-sized treats made from crumbled cake mixed with creamy cream cheese frosting, shaped into balls, and coated in a smooth layer of almond bark (candy melts or white chocolate).

    CHRISTMAS cake pops in a glass jar.

    These holiday cake pops are then decorated with seasonal sprinkles, making them a perfect, easy-to-make dessert for the holiday season. Loved by kids and adults alike, these delicious treats require just a few ingredients: cake mix, candy melts, cream cheese frosting, and holiday sprinkles. With less than five ingredients, Christmas cake pops are simple yet irresistible – an ideal addition to your holiday dessert table and parties!

     You might also like these BEST holiday treats Andes Chocolate Mint Brownies and Dark Chocolate Almond Fudge.

    If you love eassy desserts using cake mix then try these recipes: Red Velvet Cake Mix Waffles and Valentines Cake Pops.

    Cake pops were invented in the early 2000s by a popular blogger and cake designer. The idea originated from using leftover cake scraps, which were crumbled, mixed with frosting, and shaped into small balls on sticks. Today, cake pops are a beloved treat for all occasions, with endless variations in flavors, coatings, and decorations. Like those creations, these Christmas cake pops are a delightful treat to enjoy with minimal effort and simple ingredients! I promise you won’t want to buy cake pops from the store anymore!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why should I make this Christmas cake pops recipe

    Easy to Make - With just a few simple ingredients (cake mix, frosting, candy melts), this recipe is incredibly easy and quick to make, even for beginners. You don’t need advanced baking skills to create these delicious treats.

    No special tools needed - Unlike many baked goods that require special tools, this recipe doesn’t require anything beyond basic kitchen equipment. 

    Perfect for the Holiday Season - Christmas cake pops are a festive and fun treat that captures the spirit of the season. Their bite-sized shape and holiday-themed decorations make them ideal for holiday parties, gift-giving, or as a sweet treat during family gatherings.

    Great for Gift Giving - These christmas cake pops are perfect for wrapping up and giving as homemade gifts. Package them in a festive box or cellophane bag, and they make thoughtful, personalized gifts for friends,family and neighbors.

    Christmas Cake Pops layed in a marble tray

    A Showstopper on the Dessert Table – Christmas Cake Pops!

    With their colorful decorations and fun shapes, Christmas cake pops are sure to be the star of any holiday dessert spread. Their eye-catching presentation adds a festive touch to your holiday table.

    These Christmas cake pops offer a delightful textural experience. The outer coating of candy melts provides a crisp and slightly crunchy bite, while the soft, moist cake center is perfectly balanced with the sweetness of the frosting. Each bite delivers a perfect blend of textures and flavors, making these holiday cake pops an irresistible treat.

    It's our family tradition to make these cake pops with my daughter every year during the holiday season 🙂

    Three CHRISTMAS cake pops stagged

    BEST to make with leftover cakes

    Leftover cake usually has a rich, moist texture that works well when combined with frosting to create the perfect consistency for cake pops. The beauty of using leftovers is that you don’t need to bake a new cake.

    Simply crumble the leftover cake, mix it with frosting, and proceed with the cake pop steps. This saves time and makes the process easier during busy times like the holiday season. Leftover cakes of any flavor—chocolate, vanilla, red velvet, etc., can be used, so you can create a variety of cake pops with different flavors based on what you have leftover.

    What’s in this Holiday Cake Pops Recipe?

    All you need is less than 5 ingredients to make this recipe!

    ingredients nneed to make CHRISTMAS cake pops
    • Yellow cake mix - This pre-packaged cake mix serves as the base for the cake pops, providing a soft, moist texture and a delicious vanilla flavor.
    • Eggs -  Add structure, moisture, and richness to the cake mix, helping it bake up fluffy and soft.
    • Oil - Oil keeps the cake moist and tender.
    • Cream cheese frosting - Creamy, tangy frosting binds the cake crumbs together to create the ideal consistency for shaping the cake pops.
    • Vanilla almond bark - A coating that melts smoothly and hardens quickly, ideal for covering the cake pops.
    • Holiday sprinkles -  Decorative toppings that add a festive touch, enhancing both the look and texture of the cake pops.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    How to make this Best holiday cake pops recipe with cake mix

    It all starts by making the cake using the instructions on the cake mix box. Once you prepare the batter according to the package instructions, pour it into the pan and bake for 25-28 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Let the cake cool—this step is important. Then, trim the edges and crumble the cake into pieces. Add cream cheese frosting and mix until well combined. I like to use a spatula for a mess-free mix.

    Shape the mixture into golf ball-sized portions (I use a 1-tablespoon ice cream scoop) and refrigerate for 10 minutes. Melt white chocolate or almond bark in a microwave-safe bowl. Dip the tip of the cake pop sticks into the melted coating and insert them halfway into each cake ball—don’t go all the way through.

    Freeze the cake pops for another 10 minutes. Dip the cake pops into the melted coating, tap to remove excess, and immediately decorate with holiday sprinkles. You can make 30 cake pops using 1 cake box mix. Once the coating has set, enjoy your festive holiday cake pops with friends and family!

    Instructions

    Step-by-step guide for making these delicious holiday cake pops.

    Add the ingredients to make cake batter for cake mix.
    1. Step 1: Add the cake mix ingredients and mix well.
    Cake batter in a sheet pan
    1. Step 2: Pour the cake batter into the prepared sheet pan and bake.
    Baked cake mix yellow cake.
    1. Step 3: Once done, allow the cake to cool down.
    Crumbled cake and frosting
    1. Step 4: Mix crumbled cake and cream cheese frosting.
    1. Step 5: Roll the mixture into round cake balls.
    Dip the pop sticks in white chocolate
    1. Step 6: Dip the pop sticks with melted white chocolate.
    Pop sticks inserted into the Cake Balls.
    1. Step 7: Insert the pop sticks into the Cake Balls and refrigerate.
    Dip the cake pops in white chocolate.
    1. Step 8: Dip the cake pops in melted white chocolate.

    Decorate the cake pops with festive holiday sprinkles immediately after coating. Once decorated, place the cake pops vertically, sticking the end of the stick into a foam block or a tall glass.

    Once set, enjoy these delicious and festive holiday treats!

    Hint: If the cake crumbs seem too dry or aren’t sticking together, you can add a little more frosting. The mixture should have a dough-like consistency that holds together well but isn’t overly sticky.

    One CHRISTMAS cake pop

    Tips for successful outer chocolate coating

    1. If using almond bark or candy melts, melt them in short bursts (20-30 seconds) in the microwave, stirring between intervals to prevent burning. If you're using white chocolate chips, you can add a small amount of vegetable oil or coconut oil to thin the coating and make it smoother for dipping.
    2. Tap the cake pops gently on the side of the bowl after dipping to remove any excess coating, which helps prevent drips and gives a cleaner finish.
    3. Be careful not to insert the cake pop stick too far into the cake ball, as it can cause the cake to crumble or break. Inserting it halfway helps keep the cake pop secure while still being easy to eat.

    Substitutions

    Vegan Version: Use a vegan cake mix and substitute the frosting with dairy-free options, such as coconut or almond-based frosting, to make vegan holiday cake pops.

    Gluten-Free Version: Use a gluten-free cake mix and ensure that your frosting and coatings are also gluten-free for making gluten-free holiday cake pops.

    Cream Cheese Frosting: If you prefer not to use cream cheese frosting, you can substitute with buttercream frosting for a sweeter, lighter filling.

    Chocolate Coating Substitutions: Instead of almond bark or chocolate, you can use candy melts, which come in various colors and are easy to work with. If you prefer not to use white chocolate, substitute with dark or milk chocolate, ensuring it is melted properly.

    Pop Sticks: If you don’t have cake pop sticks, you can use lollipop sticks, wooden skewers, or even drinking straws as alternatives.

    Showing the texture of holiday cake pops

    Variations

    Here are some variations you can try for your holiday cake pops:

    Red Velvet Cake Pops: Swap the yellow cake mix for red velvet cake mix for a festive, vibrant twist.

    Chocolate Cake Pops: Use chocolate cake mix instead of yellow for a rich, indulgent flavor.

    Spiced Cake Pops: Add cinnamon, nutmeg, and cloves to the cake batter for a warm, spiced flavor perfect for the holidays.

    Candy Melts: Use different colored candy melts (like red, green, or gold) for a more personalized or themed look.

    Sprinkles: Use different sprinkles like edible glitter, crushed candy canes, or themed confetti for a festive touch.

    Equipment

    Mixing Bowls: For combining the cake mix ingredients.

    Hand Mixer: To blend the cake batter smoothly.

    Sheet Pan: Used for baking the cake.

    Ice Cream Scoop or Tablespoon: Helps scoop the mixture evenly for rolling the cake balls.

    CHRISTMAS cake pops with sprinkles in the side

    Storage

    Room Temperature: Store the cake pops in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3-4 days. 

    Refrigerate: If you need to store them for longer, you can refrigerate them for up to a week.

    Freezer: You can also freeze the cake pops for up to 2-3 months.

    Thawing: If frozen, allow the cake pops to thaw in the fridge or at room temperature for about 30 minutes before serving.

    FAQ

    Why my cake pops are falling out from the sticks?

    If your cake pops are falling off the sticks, it's usually because the stick wasn’t properly dipped in the coating. Before inserting the cake pop stick into the cake ball, dip the tip of the stick into the melted coating. This helps anchor the stick inside the cake pop, creating a 'glue' effect that prevents it from sliding out.

    Can I make these cake pops using a homemade cake from the scratch?

    Yes, you can definitely make cake pops using a homemade cake from scratch! I used cake mix because it’s easy to make and hassle-free, especially during the holiday season.

    Can I make this cake pop ahead?

    Yes, you can make these holiday cake pops ahead of time. Preparing them in advance is a great way to save time, especially during busy seasons like the holidays. Check the storage notes above for easy guideline.

    Can I use a different type of frosting?

    Yes, you can absolutely use different frostings in cake pops! Here are some of my recommendations; buttercream frosting, chocolate frosting, or even ganache will work in this recipe.

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    Pairing

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with [this recipe]:

    CHRISTMAS cake pops in a glass

    Christmas Cake Pops with Cake Mix

    Abi Guna
    A Showstopper on the Dessert Table - Christmas cake pops are festive, bite-sized treats made from crumbled cake mixed with creamy cream cheese frosting, shaped into balls, and coated in a smooth layer of almond bark.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes
    Chilling Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 25 minutes
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 30 Cake Pops
    Calories 165 kcal

    Equipment

    • Mixing Bowls
    • Hand Mixer
    • Sheet Pan
    • Cooling rack
    • Meansuring cup

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 13.25 oz box super moist yellow cake mix (such as Betty Crocker)
    • 3 large eggs at room temperature
    • ⅓ cup unflavored oil such as vegetable oil
    • 1 cup water
    • ½ cup cream cheese frosting such as Betty Crocker Rich and Creamy
    • 12 oz vanilla almond bark or substitute white chocolate or candy melts
    • 15 Cake pop sticks
    • Holiday sprinkles for decorating

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Grease a 9x13-inch baking sheet pan with cooking spray and set it aside.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the yellow cake mix, eggs, oil, and water. Use a hand mixer or whisk to blend everything together until the cake batter is smooth and well-combined, about 2 minutes.
    • Transfer the cake batter to the prepared pan and spread it out evenly. Bake for 25-28 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center of the cake comes out clean.
    • Once baked, allow the cake to cool completely. After cooling, trim off the brown edges of the cake to create a clean surface. Then, break the cake into 4-5 large pieces and crumble them into fine crumbs in a bowl.
    • Add the cream cheese frosting to the crumbled cake in the bowl. Mix it well until the frosting is evenly distributed, and the mixture becomes dough-like.
    • Using an ice cream scoop, take a portion of the cake mixture about the size of a golf ball and roll it into a smooth ball. Place the formed cake balls on a plate. Refrigerate them for about 10 minutes to help them firm up.
    • Meanwhile, in a microwave-safe bowl, melt the white chocolate or almond bark in short intervals (20-30 seconds), stirring after each interval until smooth and fully melted.
    • Dip the tip of each cake pop stick into the melted chocolate, then insert it halfway into each cake pop to help it stay in place. Return the cake pops to the plate and refrigerate again for 10 minutes to set the sticks.
    • After the cake pops have chilled, dip each one into the melted white chocolate or almond bark until completely coated. Gently tap the stick to remove any excess chocolate and ensure an even coating.
    • Decorate the cake pops with festive holiday sprinkles immediately after coating. Once decorated, place the cake pops vertically, sticking the end of the stick into a foam block or a similar surface to keep them upright.
    • Allow the cake pops to come to room temperature and let the chocolate coating fully set. Once set, enjoy these delicious and festive holiday treats!

    Notes

    1. Make sure to cool the cake completely before crumbling. This ensures the cake is firm enough to shape into pops and prevents the frosting from melting too much. I recommend leaving the cake on a wire rack at room temperature for at least 30 minutes before working with it.
    2. Chill the cake balls before inserting the sticks and after dipping them in chocolate. This helps them hold their shape and prevents the cake from falling off the stick when dipped.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 165kcal
    Keyword Cake Mix, Cake Pops, Holiday Desserts
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!